751.9 Bridge Seismic Design: Difference between revisions

Latest revision as of 12:48, 19 July 2024

751.9.1 Seismic Analysis and Design Specifications

Additional Information

Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart

All new or replacement bridges on the state system shall include seismic design and/or detailing to resist an expected seismic event per the Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart. For example, for a bridge in Seismic Design Categories A, B, C or D, complete seismic analysis or seismic detailing only may be determined as per “Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart”.

Missouri is divided into four Seismic Design Categories. Most of the state is SDC A which requires minimal seismic design and/or detailing in accordance with SGS (Seismic Zone 1 of LRFD) and “Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart”. The other seismic design categories will require a greater amount of seismic design and/or detailing.

For seismic detailing only:

When A_S is greater than 0.75 then use A_S = 0.75 for abutment design where required per “Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart” and SEG 24-01

For complete seismic analysis:

When A_S is greater than 0.75 then use A_S = 0.75 at zero second for seismic analysis and response spectrum curve. See Example 1_SDC_Response_Spectra. The other data points on the response spectrum curve shall not be modified.

Additional Information

Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart

When existing bridges are identified as needing repairs or maintenance, a decision on whether to include seismic retrofitting in the scope of the project shall be determined per the “Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart”, the extent of the rehabilitation work and the expected life of the bridge after the work. For example, if the bridge needs painting or deck patching, no retrofitting is recommended. However, redecking or widening the bridge indicates that MoDOT is planning to keep the bridge in the state system with an expected life of at least 30 more years. In these instances, the project core team should consider cost effective methods of retrofitting the existing bridge. Superstructure replacement requires a good substructure and the core team shall decide whether there is sufficient seismic capacity. Follow the design procedures for new or replacement bridges in forming logical comparisons and assessing risk in a rational determination of the scope of a superstructure replacement project specific to the substructure. For example, based on SPC and route, retrofit of the substructure could include seismic detailing only or a complete seismic analysis may be required determine sufficient seismic capacity. Economic analysis should be considered as part of the decision to re-use and retrofit, or re-build. Where practical, make end bents integral and eliminate expansion joints.

Bridge seismic retrofit shall be in accordance with Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart. Seismic isolation systems shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design 4th Ed. 2023.

751.9.1.1 Applicability of Guidelines and Seismic Design Philosophy

SGS 3.1, 3.2, LRFD 3.4 and LRFD C3.4.1

EPG 751.9 supplements the above documentation for typical bridges in accordance with SGS 3.1. It does not apply to movable bridges, bridges with spans greater than 500 ft., suspension bridges, cable-stayed bridges, truss bridges or arch-type bridges. The State Bridge Engineer shall specify and/or approve appropriate provisions or specifications for non typical bridges. There are special considerations for single-span bridges, temporary bridges and bridges with stage construction.

Critical and Recovery Bridges are not specifically addressed in SGS specification, SGS 3.1. Operational classification shall be in accordance with SGS 3.1 and SGS 3.2. Bridges shall be designed for the life safety performance objective using at a minimum the limit state of incipient collapse or unacceptable performance for geotechnical failure modes at a targeted risk of approximately 1.5 percent over 75 years in accordance with SGS 3.2 Higher levels of performance, such as the operational objective, may be established and authorized by the bridge owner. Critical and Recovery bridges shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO Guidelines for Performance-Based Seismic Design of Highway Bridges, 1^st ed.

The following categories are used throughout EPG:

Nonseismic = Bridges requiring a static design only. Minimal seismic details in accordance with SDC A are still required.

Seismic Details = This category refers to SDC A (S_D1 ≥ 0.1), B, C and D bridges that do not require a seismic design, but do require higher levels of seismic detailing.

Complete Seismic Analysis = Bridges requiring a full seismic analysis. SDC C or D bridges may be applicable based on the importance of the route.

Life safety for the design event shall be taken to imply that the bridge has a low probability of collapse but may suffer significant damage, and significant disruption to service is possible. Partial or complete replacement may be required in accordance with SGS 3.2. Hazard to human life should be minimized, and essential bridges should continue to function after an earthquake. Bridges are designed for good ductility and displacement control and are allowed to suffer minor, acceptable damage in order to prevent major, unacceptable damage.

Note: For seismic design force concepts and guidance, follow the seismic design process (EPG 751.9.1.3 thru 751.9.4) and modify design/details of LFD as necessary to meet SGS and LRFD seismic requirements until LRFD seismic section is created (modified EPG 751.9.1.3 thru 751.9.4).

All new or replacement bridges on the state system shall include seismic design and/or detailing to resist an expected seismic event (seismic design category) per the Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart.

For a major bridge, the State Bridge Engineer will decide the design as a life safety or critical/essential or recovery bridge in accordance with SGS 3.1, SGS 3.2 and SGS C3.2.
Except for section 7 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SGS) is based on Displacement Based Design. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (LRFD) is based on Force Based Design. For seismic details and design concept use the SGS when information is available otherwise use LRFD. Seismic analysis shall be performed using displacement-based design (for exception see SGS 7).

Seismic Design Category/Seismic Zone by Code
Value of design spectral acceleration coefficient at 1.0 second period, S_D1 SGS 3.4.1 and 3.5	¹AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SGS) SGS table 3.5-1 Seismic Design Category (SDC)	²AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (LRFD) LRFD Table 3.10.6-1 Seismic Zones
S_D1 < 0.10	A1	1
0.10 ≤ S_D1 < 0.15	A2³	1³
0.15 ≤ S_D1 < 0.30	B	2
0.30 ≤ S_D1 < 0.50	C	3
0.50 ≤ S_D1	D	4

¹SGS is required for seismic design. LRFD is shown because SGS refers to LRFD for support, and understanding the equivalency category and zone may be important. In accordance with SGS, all bridge designs must meet the requirements for SDC A (Seismic Zone 1). Additional seismic details are typically required for higher seismic design categories.

²LRFD inequalities are different. Use SGS as shown.

³Structural member shall be detailed in accordance with SDC B (SGS 8.2) if bridge carry a 1st or 2nd priority earthquake emergency route.

751.9.1.2

(This article is not being used)

751.9.1.3 Seismic Design Force Concepts

As shown in Fig. 751.9.1.3.1(a), a two span bridge can be modeled as a single–degree-of-freedom lumped-mass system (Fig. 751.9.1.3.1(b)). For a single degree-of-freedom lumped-mass system, the total elastic seismic design force is equal to

F = m x c_s x g

where:

m is the total structural mass

c_s is the elastic seismic response coefficient

g is the gravitational acceleration constant

The elastic seismic response coefficient is given by the dimensionless formula

AASHTO Div. I-A, Equation 3-1

C_{s}={\frac {1.2AS}{T^{0.67}}}

where:

A = the acceleration coefficient on rock from AASHTO Division I-A, Article 3.2; the acceleration coefficients for Missouri are shown in Fig. 751.9.1.3.3.

S = the dimensionless coefficient for the soil profile characteristics of the site as given in Article 3.5. S = 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, and 2.0 for soil profile type I, II, III, and IV respectively.

T = the fundamental period of the bridge,

T=2\pi {\sqrt {\frac {m}{k}}}

where: k is the structural lateral stiffness

m is the structural mass

**Fig. 751.9.1.3.1 Single-Degree-of-Freedom Lumped-Mass System; (a) Two-Span Bridge, (b) Bridge Structural Model**

The elastic design acceleration spectra shown in Fig. 751.9.1.3.2 is a plot of structural period T versus the maximum acceleration quantity of the structure. For example: a bridge with the foundation period T₁ is subjected to an earthquake having a rock acceleration of $A\times g$ . The maximum acceleration of this bridge during the whole seismic excitation will be $C_{s1}\times g$ (see Fig. 751.9.1.3.2).

**Fig. 751.9.1.3.2 Elastic Design Acceleration Spectrum**

From Fig. 751.9.1.3.1, it can be seen that the acceleration of soil is larger than the acceleration of rock by an amplification factor S. Soil type is important to the evaluation of ground acceleration. From Figs. 751.9.1.3.1 and 751.9.1.3.2, stated briefly, the design acceleration spectrum is a plot of the maximum acceleration to a specified seismic load for all possible single degree-offreedom systems.

Using the above mentioned concept, AASHTO considers four analysis procedures to calculate elastic earthquake design force for the Multiple Degree of Freedom (MDOF) System in order of increasing complexity. Theses are:

Procedure 1 – Uniform Load Method

Procedure 2 – Single-Mode Spectral Method

Procedure 3 – Multi-Mode Spectral Method

Procedure 4 – Time History Method

MoDOT practice is to use the Multi-Mode Method for all bridges, because the Uniform Load and Single-Mode Methods are inadequate for irregular bridges and the Time History Method requires an excessive level of numerical integration time and time history records being used. A seismic structural analysis program, such as SEISAB, performs a linear elastic multi-mode response spectrum analysis, accounting also for inertial effects, damping, and modal combination, and determines seismic forces and displacements at individual joints and members.

In the Multi-mode Spectral Method, the seismic deign force, P, of a specific structural component can be calculated by taking the square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) or the complete quadratic combination (CQC) of the design for P_i corresponding to the i^th mode of the structural component.

SRSS approach:

CQC approach:

where:

\alpha _{y}={\frac {8\rho ^{2}(1+q)q^{3/2}}{(1-q^{2})^{2}+4\rho ^{2}q(1+q)^{2}}}

and

q={\frac {w_{j}}{w_{i}}}

where n = the total number of modes of structure considered, P_i is calculated according to seismic design force F_i which is the design force corresponding to the structural i^th mode with fundamental period of T_i and seismic response coefficient of C_si, P_i and F_i represent internal force of individual structural component and external seismic force applied to the structure respectively, P_j is similar to P_i , α_ij is the cross-correlation coefficient indicating the crosscorrelation between modes i and j, w_i is the natural frequencies corresponding to the i^th mode and ρ is the damping ratio (i.e. 0.05). For more detailed descriptions of procedures 1, 2, 3, and 4, see AASHTO Division I-A 4.3-4.6 and for a more detailed description of how to calculate P_i and F_i, see AASHTO Division I-A Commentary C.4.5.4.

For Seismic Performance Category (SPC) A, the above mentioned analysis procedure is not required.

For a regular bridge in SPC B, C, or D, procedure 1 and 2 are the minimum required analysis methods, procedure 3 is strongly recommended. A regular bridge, as described in AASHTO Division I-A, 4.2 has fewer than seven spans, no abrupt changes in weight, stiffness, or geometry and no large change in these parameters from span to span, or support to support (abutments excluded). Any bridge not satisfying the definition of a regular bridge is considered to be irregular. For an irregular bridge, procedure 3 must be used. The designer may use procedure 4 in place of procedure 3 if so desired.

Multi-mode spectral analysis is recommended for most bridges. Time History analysis is generally not recommended because its application requires considerable engineering judgement and experience.

751.9.1.4 Seismic Performance Category (SPC), Acceleration Coefficient (A)

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.2-3.4, and foldout map (Figure 1.5) at back of Division I-A

Missouri is divided into four Seismic Performance Categories (SPC A, B, C and D, see Fig. 751.9.1.3.3, based on Acceleration Coefficients (A). The map for SPC and rock acceleration A is based on a 90% probability that the horizontal rock acceleration will not be exceeded in the 50-year lifetime of the bridge, corresponding to a return period of 475 years. For Missouri, the maximum A=0.36. For bridges with A > 0.29, an additional factor called Importance Classification (IC) is used to distinguish between SPC C and D.

751.9.1.5 Elastic and Plastic Design

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.7

In some cases, bridges can resist seismic forces elastically, that is, without permanent deformations. In other cases, it is not economical to design a bridge for elastic behavior under seismic loading, so the bridge may be designed for inelastic (plastic) behavior. However, plastic design requires careful detailing to ensure ductility and connections with higher energy absorption characteristics. Plastic behavior is nonlinear, but AASHTO Division I-A allows an approximate analysis procedure using a linear elastic analysis along with the application of a response modification factor (R) to account for the assumed level of ductility and redundancy. This allows the use of linear elastic analysis programs such as SEISAB (or any other seismic analysis program). Response modification factors are specified in AASHTO 1-A, Article 3.7. An example of ductility demand is described below:

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 1992 Commentary C3.6

In an elastic seismic analysis, a column in a multiple-column bent is subjected to an elastic moment, M_e , and a rotation, θ_max at the bottom of the column. The dashed line in Figure 751.9.1.5 represents the elastic moment demand. If plastic behavior is allowed and a maximum ductility factor, μ, equal to 5 is used, then

\mu ={\frac {\theta _{max}}{\theta _{p}}}=5

. The column is then sized so that its plastic moment capacity, M_p, is greater than or equal to the modified elastic moment, M_ME, such that

M_{ME}={\frac {M_{e}}{(R=5)}}

. This is based on the assumption that the deformations produced by a given seismic input force, F, are essentially the same for both elastic column behavior and for column yielding behavior at a ductility demand of μ = 5. Response modification factors (R) are allowed because of component ductility capacity and because of redundancy provided by adjacent columns, piers, and abutments.

**Fig. 751.9.1.5 Moment Ductility Demand on a Column**

\theta _{max}=

rotation at bottom of column (elastic or plastic)

\theta _{p}={\frac {\theta _{max}}{\mu }}

M_{e}\cong 5\times M_{p}

751.9.1.6 Structural Analysis Model

The bridge is usually modeled using idealized linear elements, connection nodes and lumped masses. The lumped masses are placed throughout the structure (see Fig. 751.9.1.6) to model the mass distribution (a mass matrix, [M]). Structural stiffness is approximated using linear springs for substructures (a stiffness matrix, [K]). A coefficient of damping is selected for the overall system (usually 5%, represented by a damping matrix, [C]). The displacements, velocities and accelerations of the system are represented by:

{\big \{}x(t){\big \}}

{\big \{}{\dot {x}}(t){\big \}}

and

{\big \{}{\ddot {x}}(t){\big \}}

vectors in the structural dynamic analysis equation as shown below:

[M]{\big \{}{\ddot {x}}(t){\big \}}+[C]{\big \{}{\dot {x}}(t){\big \}}+[K]{\big \{}x(t){\big \}}={\big \{}F_{eq}{\big \}}

eq. 1

in which:

{F_eq} is the seismic induced force vector

The development of multi-mode response spectrum analysis is based on the above dynamic equation.

**Fig. 751.9.1.6 Lumped Mass Model of a General Bridge**

where: m1 ∼ m4 = Lumped Masses

m1 = M2 / 4

m2 = M2 / 4

m3 = M2 / 4

m4 = M2 / 8

where M2 = total mass of span 2

751.9.1.7 Directional Load Cases

The AASHTO Div. I-A specifications specify two major load cases to provide for combinations of longitudinal and transverse seismic forces:

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.9

Case I = L + 0.3*T (This is loading case 3 in SEISAB.)

Case II = 0.3*L + T (This is loading case 4 in SEISAB.)

751.9.1.8 Group Loading

The group loading includes dead load (D), earth pressure (E) and seismic (EQ) loads, and other possible loadings such as buoyancy (B) and stream flow pressure (SF). Thus:

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 6.2 and 7.2

Group Load = 1.0*(D+B+SF+E+EQ),

This is to be considered as a Load Factor group loading, but it may also be considered as a Service Load if the allowable overstresses in Division I-A are used. Wind and temperature loads are not included in this group and need not be applied simultaneously with seismic loads.

751.9.1.9 Seismic Performance Category Specifications

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 5, 6 and 7

Each Seismic Performance Category has its own seismic specifications. All categories require minimum support lengths at expansion gaps and adequate connections between superstructure and substructure. Categories B, C and D have additional specifications concerning foundations, abutments, special pile requirements, column design and footing design. See AASHTO Division I-A for details of specifications.

751.9.2 Seismic Analysis Model

751.9.2.1 Flowchart of Seismic Analysis Procedure

**Fig. 751.9.2.1. "Section 6.1.2.7" is EPG 751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation and "Section 6.12.10" is EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis**

751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations

See Fig. 751.9.2.1.

0) GROUP I-VI DESIGN

____ The bridge should have already been designed for Group I-VI loads.

____ If expansion gaps are present, check seismic support lengths EPG 751.9.2.3.

1) SOIL PROPERTIES

____ Determine the soil properties at each bent as a function of depth at each bent EPG 751.9.2.4.

____ Check the factor of safety against liquefaction EPG 751.9.2.5, for all layers of soil that might liquefy, before determining all spring constants.

2) STIFFNESSES

____ Determine the stiffnesses at applicable piles, footings and abutments using the approved stiffness methods EPG 751.9.2.6.

3) RIGID BODY TRANSFORMATION (Stiffnesses)

____ Use RBT to compute the equivalent master joint stiffness matrix at abutments and pile footings EPG 751.9.2.7.

4) SEISMIC STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS PROGRAM

____ Prepare the input for the SEISAB, SAP2000 or any seismic analysis program, and run the program to perform a seismic analysis.

5) RIGID BODY TRANSFORMATION (Forces)

____ Use RBT and the master joint's force output from the Seismic Structural Analysis Program to compute the individual element forces at the original local slave joints EPG 751.9.2.7.

6) ITERATIVE ABUTMENT ANALYSIS

____ Check soil pressures and pile stresses against allowables as described in the iterative abutment analysis flowchart EPG 751.9.2.10. If necessary, either perform remedial actions or reduce the spring constants and iterate until pressures and stresses are within allowable limits.

____ When abutment element forces are OK, check resultant abutment displacement against the allowable. If the displacement is excessive, perform remedial actions and iterate until displacements are within allowable limits (EPG 751.9.2.10).

7) CONNECTION DESIGN EPG 751.9.3.1

____ Design any required connections such as anchor bolts, dowel bars, restrainers, stud plates, shear blocks, concrete end diaphragms, isolation systems, T-joints, etc. If structural behavior changes as a result of connection design, then revise and repeat any applicable steps listed above.

8) ABUTMENT COMPONENT DESIGN EPG 751.9.3.2

Wings (Integral & Non-Integral Abutments)

____ Design wings for shear and flexural reinforcement.

Non-Integral Abutments

____ Check stability using the Mononobe-Okabe active pressure.

____ Design the backwall thickness and flexural bars for shear and moment from active seismic pressure, restrainer forces and deadman anchor forces.

If abutment behavior changes as a result of abutment component design, then revise and repeat any applicable steps listed above.

9) INTERMEDIATE BENT DESIGN

____ Complete steps 0-6 before designing the intermediate bents. See EPG 751.9.3.3.1 and EPG 751.9.3.3.2 for definitions of terms below.

Column & Footing Intermediate Bents EPG 751.9.3.3.1

____ First, try to design the columns, footings and beam for the full elastic demand forces. If elastic design fails, then size the columns for modified elastic demand forces, and design footings and beam for the overstrength plastic capacity of that column size. Check T-joint stresses.

Pile Caps Intermediate Bents EPG 751.9.3.3.2

____ First, try to design the piles and beam for the full elastic demand forces. If elastic design fails, then design the pile for modified elastic demand forces, and design the beam for the overstrength plastic capacity of that pile size. Check T-joint stresses.

Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents EPG 751.9.3.3.3

____ First, design the columns, shafts and beam for the full elastic demand forces. If elastic design fails, then size the columns for modified elastic demand forces, and design shafts and beam for the overstrength plastic capacity of that column size. Check T-joint stresses.

751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.10 and AASHTO Div. I-A, 5.3, 6.3, 7.3

At expansion gaps (near abutments, intermediate bents and hinges), the substructure must accommodate differential seismic displacements between the substructure and the superstructure. The minimum support length capacity, N(c), of the substructure beam shall meet or exceed the minimum support length demand, N(d), of the superstructure girders.

N(c) > = N(d)

At fixed bents, minimum support length need not be calculated.

**Fig. 751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length**

Seismic Performance Categories A & B

English Units

N(d) = [8 + 0.02*L + 0.08*H]*(1 + 0.000125 S² ), (inches)

Metric Units

N(d) = [203 + 1.67*L + 6.66*H]*(1 + 0.000125 S² ), (mm)

Seismic Performance Categories C & D

English Units

N(d) = [12 + 0.03*L + 0.12*H]*(1 + 0.000125 S²), (inches)

Metric Units

N(d) = [305 + 2.5*L + 10*H]*(1 + 0.000125 S² ), (mm)

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.10

Term Definitions for SPC A, B, C and D:

N(d) = minimum support length demand, in inches or mm

L = in feet or meters, as defined below

L = length of the bridge deck unit to the adjacent expansion joint or to the end of the bridge deck. For hinges within a span, L shall be the sum of , the distances to either side of the hinge. For single span bridges, L equals the length of the bridge deck. Units of L are feet or meters.

H = in feet or meters, as defined below:

H = (For abutments) The average height, from the c.g of the superstructure to the c.g. of the footing, for all bents supporting the bridge deck to the next expansion joint. H = 0 for single span bridges.

H = (For column intermediate bents) The height from the c.g. of the superstructure to the c.g. of the average footing at the expansion bent only.

H = (For pile cap & drilled shaft intermediate bents) The height from the c.g. of the superstructure to a point 5 times the pile diameter below the groundline, at the expansion bent only.

H = (For hinges within a span) The average height, from the c.g. of the superstructure to c.g. of the footing, for the two bents adjacent to the hinge.

S = Skew angle of the support, measured from a line normal to the span, in degrees.

N(c) = The shortest distance (in any direction) from the end of the girder and the edge of the substructure beam, in inches or mm, measure normal to the face of the substructure beam.

751.9.2.4 Material Properties

751.9.2.4.1 Soil Properties

Soil Profiles

From the boring data in the design layout file, determine the soil properties at known cores and borings. Cores describe soil types in each soil layer plus soil property test data at regular depth increments (usually 5 feet). Borings only describe soil types in each soil layer, without the test data. When soil properties are not well-documented at all bent locations, estimate soil properties based on the best available information. On a profile sheet, draw the cores and borings to scale at their appropriate stations and elevations. Match up soil types from borings to estimate properties from cores, or use linear interpolation between known cores.

Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

The most common test data reported in cores are Standard Penetration Test(SPT) blowcounts per foot (N). If only SPT data are known, other properties such as N, φ, c (same as S), γ, E, ν, and other soil properties can be estimated using correlation charts. Correlations with N blowcounts are fairly reliable for sands, but are less reliable for clays. The SPT blowcounts are given for three 6 in. intervals, and the first datum is thrown out in order to avoid seating errors. The soil shear strength, in KSF, can be estimated as S = N / 10. Hereafter, N represents (N₁)₆₀ which represents the standard penetration test blowcounts corrected to 60% of the theoretical free fall energy delivered by the hammer system used to the top of the drill stem and to a overburden stress of 1 ton/ft².

Note: Common soil property correlations are maintained in the Bridge Division, Development Section, prepared by Construction and Materials Division, Geotechnical Section.

Example:

Given: SPT data = 6 / 9 / 8 in 6-in. increment layers

Compute: Soil Shear strength in KSF

The 6 blows for the first 6 in. are ignored.

N = (9 in 6") + (8 in 6") = (17 blows per 12") = 17 blows/foot.

S = N / 10 = 17 / 10 = 1.7 KSF = Soil Shear Strength

The standardized penetration resistance (N₁)₆₀ is based on standardized equipment and procedure (E. Kavazanjian, etc., 1997). Other “non-standard” equipment and procedural details can affect the measured penetration resistance, and require correction of the blow counts in order to develop the (N₁)₆₀. The details of corrections can be found in the reference by E. Kavazanjian, etc., 1997.

Form 751.9.2.4.1.1, Soil Parameter Request Form

MoDOT soils specialists perform the SPT tests and provide corrected penetration resistance (N₁)₆₀. (N₁)₆₀ is included in the standard soil parameters request form as shown in Form 751.9.2.4.1.1. This form shall be used to request soil parameters in the request for soundings.

Compacted Backfill at Abutments

Additional Information

Sec. 203.3.4 and Sec. 206.4.9

Backfill at abutments shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density, and it may consist of sands, clays, silts, gravels or a mixture. Call the district and ask what type of borrow soil will be used for compacted fill at abutments. Soil property correlations may be used for estimating Young's Modulus (E).

Ultimate Soil Pressure at Abutments For integral and non-integral end bents, use 7.7 KSF as the ultimate soil pressure. This is based on CalTrans' recommendations, usage by other state DOTs, and tests performed at the University of California at Davis.

751.9.2.4.2 Concrete Properties

The concrete compression strength, f’c, should be a probable, rather than a minimum. 1.5 f’c shall be used in the seismic analysis. This over the specified strength recognizes the typically conservative mix designs and the natural strength gain with concrete age.

The flexural rigidity of columns, beam cap and c.i.p. piles should be calculated based on the cracked sections, rather than gross member section. Natural periods should also be based on the cracked sections. The flexural rigidity of the cracked section is defined as the rigidity at which the first steel rebar reaches the yield limit state.

Figure 751.9.2.4.2 shows the moment of inertia ratio, Ie/Ig, for circular and rectangular columns.

**Fig. 751.9.2.4.2, Adjustment Factors for Effective Stiffness for Concrete (Priestly et al, 1996)**

In Fig. 751.9.2.4.2:

A_g = gross section area

A_st = steel section area

I_g = gross moment of inertia

I_e = effective moment of inertia of cracked section

f'c = compressive strength of unconfined concrete

P = applied axial compressive load

751.9.2.4.3 Steel Properties

Yield strength of reinforcement should be based on mill certificate or tensile test results if available. If not, a nominal strength of 1.1 times the specified minimum strength should be assumed, resulting in 66 ksi yield strength for grade 60 reinforcement. (Priestly et al,1996; FHWA, 1995)

751.9.2.5 Liquifaction

Conditions for Liquefaction

Additional Information

Volume II of report #FHWA/RD-86/102, sections 4.2-4.3

When subjected to seismic ground motions, some soils tend to liquefy - that is, to lose most of their shear strength. When ground shaking is intense and of long duration, soil pore pressures can build up and exceed the intergranular stress, causing loss of grain contact and loss of cohesion. Liquefaction of soil can lead to extremely large displacements and dramatic structural failure. Some high-risk factors for liquefaction might include:

Water Table Location = below water table, saturated, or water content greater than 0.9 * Liquid Limit,

Soil type = poorly-drained cohesionless soils or nonplastic silts with Liquid Limit < 35%,

Soil gradation = uniformly-graded and fine particle size, low percentage of plastic fines (< 5%),

Relative Density = loose, with relative density, DR < 50%,

Confining pressure = low confinement pressure, in top 50 ft. of soil,

Intensity of ground shaking = exceeding critical acceleration levels, close to epicenter,

Duration of shaking = long duration, numerous cycles.

When to Check Liquefaction

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 1992 Commentary, C6.3.1(A), C6.4.1(A), C6.5.1(A)

The Soil Report should include the factor of safety against liquefaction, but if it is not the bridge designers should calculate the factor of safety against liquefaction for each saturated (submerged under the water table) soil layer at each bent. Do not check compacted abutment fill near vertical end drains. If the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than 1.3, then consider the possibility of liquefaction as explained in Step 3 below. If both the designer and checker agree that the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than 1.0, then consult the Structural Project Manager about the possibility of lengthening piles, increasing pile sizes, or soil strengthening measures.

Step 1:

Compute the seismically-induced (active) cyclic stress ratio, ${\frac {\tau _{av}}{\sigma _{o'}}}$ .

{\frac {\tau _{av}}{\sigma _{o'}}}=0.65\times A\times \sigma _{T}\times {\frac {r_{d}}{\sigma _{o'}}}

\tau _{av}

= average earthquake-induced shear stress on the sand layer under consideration, psf.

\sigma _{o'}

= initial effective overburden pressure, psf (Use γ' = γ_t - γ_w, below the watertable, where γ_w = 62.4 pcf).

A = Acceleration Coefficient

\sigma _{t}

= total stress at mid-layer of soil, psf, = Σγ_t*H_t for each layer from the ground surface down to the layer being investigated.

r_d = a stress reduction factor varying from 1.0 at ground surface to 0.9 at about 30 ft. deep, remaining at 0.9 for depths below 30 ft.

Step 2: Determine the (resistive) cyclic stress ratio, ${\frac {\tau }{\sigma '_{v}}}$ , as described below.

From Fig. 751.9.2.5.1, enter with (N₁)₆₀ and M, and determine the (resistive) cyclic stress ratio, ${\frac {\tau }{\sigma '_{v}}}$ . (N₁)₆₀ is described in EPG 751.9.2.4.

In the absence of getting a Richter magnitude, M, from the geotechnical engineer, the USGS deaggregation map can be used or the following table may also be used, where “A” represents the design acceleration coefficient.

A = 0.04g	M = 4.25
A = 0.08g	M = 4.75
A = 0.16g	M = 5.75
A = 0.33g	M = 7.00
A = 0.50g	M = 8.50

The USGS deaggregation maps are available at http://eqint.cr.usgs.gov/deaggint/.

Step 3:

Calculate the factor of safety against liquefaction.

FS =

{\frac {Resistive}{Active}}={\frac {Step\ 2}{Step\ 1}}

≥ 1.3 (desired) or 1.0 (required)

If FS ≥ 1.3, then analyze the bridge on the assumption that liquefaction will not occur. If FS < 1.3, then assume liquefaction might occur within the layer under consideration: this consists of running two seismic analyses to design the bridge for both possibilities of: a) liquefaction and b) no liquefaction. Note that superstructures may be subject to large lateral movement when soil liquefation is considered in the seismic analysis. Hence, expansion bearings shall be designed to tolerate these movements. For CIP concrete piles, determine the maximum pile moment and depth, with and without liquefaction, and design reinforcement down to the development length below that depth, as necessary.

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 6.4.2(C), 7.4.2(C)

The residual strength of the liquefied soil layer may be considered. The calculation of residual strength is described below.

Residual Strength

Liquified soil has a residual shear strength, Sr, which can be considered for the pile stiffness computations. When not enough information is available, use a residual strength of zero. The residual shear strength shall not be more than the non-liquefied shear strength.

The residual shear strength of liquefied soil can be estimated by using the corrected penetration resistance, (N₁)₆₀, as described previously, but with an additional correction factor, Ncorr, for fines contents to generate an equivalent “clean sand” blowcount value (N₁)_60-CS = (N₁)₆₀ + N_corr, where N_corr are shown in Table 751.9.2.5.

Table 751.9.2.5 Corrections to Blowcounts for Percent Fines (N_corr)
Percent Fines	N_corr (blows/ft)
10%	1
25%	2
50%	4
75%	5

Figure 751.9.2.5.2 presents an updated correlation between S_r and (N₁)_60-CS (FHWA-SA-97-076, 1997). For (N₁)_60-CS > 16 blows, continue the curve as a straight line at the same slope as at 16 blows.

**Fig. 751.9.2.5.1, Resistive Cyclic Stress Ratio** (AASHTO Div. I-A 1998 Commentary, Fig. CA1). **Note: AASHTO's N₁ is actually (N₁)₆₀**

**Fig. 751.9.2.5.2, Relationship Between Corrected Blowcounts (N₁)_60-CS (Blows/ft.) and Undrained Residual Strength, S_r (psf).** (FHWA-SA-97-076, 1997)

751.9.2.6 Spring Constants

751.9.2.6.1 Modeling Abutment Stiffnesses

"Full-Zero" Abutment Stiffnesses

For the "full-zero" stiffness approach, one abutment's backfill is in compression (full soil springs are engaged) while the other abutment's backfill is in tension (this backwall soil spring is zero because soil tensile strength is negligible. Note that although the backwall soil stiffness is zero, the pile, beam and wing stiffnesses are NOT zero.) To account for compression and tension at both abutments, two Seismic Structural Analysis programs are required:

(Program # 1) Use full springs at all pile and soil springs, except set the backwall spring equal to zero at the FIRST abutment only, and

(Program # 2) Use springs at all pile and soil springs, except set the backwall spring equal to zero at the SECOND abutment only.

For analyzing and designing the structure, use the worst case forces from these two models. When these "full-zero" models are used, the resulting longitudinal abutment soil force does not require adjustment as it would in the "half-half" model.

"Half-Half" Abutment Stiffnesses

For skewed bridges, the "half-half" method should not be used. For the "half-half" stiffness approach, half of the backwall soil stiffness is used at each abutment, in addition to the full stiffnesses at all other abutment spring elements (piles, beams, wings, etc.). After the seismic analysis, the "halfhalf" method also requires doubling the backwall force.

Non-Integral Abutments

For non-integral abutments with restrainers, three separate Seismic Structural Analysis Programs are required:

(1) With restrainer elements only on the first abutment: This model covers movement toward the last abutment.

(2) With restrainer elements only on the last abutment: This model covers movement toward the first abutment.

(3) Without restrainer elements: With no restrainers, the components of the springs that are longitudinal with respect to the bridge centerline will have no effect.

Point-of-Fixity Approximations for Piles

Avoid using the point-of-fixity formulas (U.S. Steel Design Handbook, 1965 & NHI Course No. 13063, 1996). Stiffnesses based on estimated points of fixity are not recommended, for several reasons:

a) For standard integral pile cap END bents, there is DOUBLE-curvature bending in both directions. The point-of-fixity formulas were apparently derived for SINGLE-curvature bending, so the formulas should not be used for most standard integral end bents.

b) For standard INTERMEDIATE bents, out-of-plane bending is usually single-curvature, and in-plane bending is usually double-curvature, and one fixity length cannot model the different bending cases in both directions at the same time. Therefore, the point-of-fixity formulas should not be used for most standard intermediate bents.

c) The point-of-fixity formulas also assume homogeneous soil (no layers). When piles or drilled shafts penetrate through multiple varying soil layers, or when the water table is near the top of the pile head, use programs such as SPILE and COM624P because of their more accurate analyses and their more detailed soil layer geometries.

d) It is virtually impossible to select a point of fixity such that both the maximum deflection and maximum bending both were computed correctly.

751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Stiffness, Wilson Equations

Abutment Soil Types

Compacted Backfill: Wings, Backwall and possibly Beam

Additional Information

Sec. 203.3.4 and Sec. 206.4.9

Call the district to determine the type of borrow soil that will most likely be used as abutment backfill. When estimating soil properties (see EPG 751.9.2.4), consider that backfill is compacted to 95% maximum density, so assume dense or stiff conditions.

Natural (in-situ): possibly Beam

Use available boring data for estimating soil deposit properties.

Abutment Spring Types

Spring Location	Direction of Spring	Type of Soil at Location
____ Backwall	Horizontal, normal to backwall	Compacted backfill
____ Beam	Vertically downward	In-situ? or compacted?
____ Wings	Horizontal, normal to wing	Compacted backfill

Wilson Equations (Wilson, 1988) For translational and rotational stiffnesses on plate-like elements such as backwalls, wings and beams, use the Wilson equations:

Translation normal to the plane

K={\frac {E\times L}{(1-\nu ^{2})\times \ I}}

, kip/ft.

Rotation about the transverse axis (y-axis)

K_{\theta _{y}}={\frac {K\times L^{2}}{12}}

, kip * ft/radian.

Rotation about the longitudinal axis (x-axis)

K_{\theta _{x}}={\frac {K\times B^{2}}{12}}

, kip * ft/radian.

The axis orientation for each element used to determine K_θx and K_θy is shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation, below. If K is reduced as in EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis, then K_θ must also be reduced.

K = estimated equivalent linear stiffness for translation, kip/ft.

K_θ = estimated equivalent linear stiffness for rotation, kip*ft/radian

E = Young's Modulus of soil at spring location, either for in-situ soil or for compacted backfill, ksf

L = length of item, ft.

For backwall, L = length of backwall along skew, to inside wing face

For wings, L = inside layout length of wing

For beams, L = skewed length of beam along cl. beam

\nu

= Poisson's Ratio of soil at spring location, either natural or compacted

I=1.2136\times log_{10}{\frac {L}{B}}+0.84

= Shape factor for soil contact area

B = height or width of item, ft.

For backwall, B = height from top of slab to bottom of beam

For wings, B = equivalent height of wing = (wing area)/(wing L) For beams, B = beam width normal to beam

751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness

General Procedure

1) From the boring data and the bridge profile plot, determine the SPT blowcounts along the pile length.

2) Determine the soil properties required for the SPILE computer program or any other computer programs based on the methods presented by Nordlund (1963,1979), Thompson (1964), Meyerhoff (1976), Cheney and Chassie (1982), and Tomlison (1979,1985). Assume that the groundwater table is at the Normal Water Surface Elevation.

3) Run the SPILE program (Urzua,1993) or other programs using the methods described above to determine Q_b and Q_f.

4) Determine the axial pile stiffness, K, as described below for friction piles and bearing piles (Lam and Martin, 1986).

Friction Piles

Q_u = the ultimate axial pile capacity, in kips (or tons)

Q_f = the ultimate friction capacity from SPILE, in kips (or tons)

Q_b = the ultimate bearing capacity from SPILE, in kips (or tons)

For steel HP friction piles, use the box perimeter for friction, but use the HP steel area for bearing.

In compression, Q_u= Q_f + Q_b

In tension, Q_u = Q_f because Q_b = zero.

The typical pile resistance – displacement relationship is shown in Figure 751.9.2.6.3.

At a displacement, z, at which the pile capacity is less than the ultimate capacity (q < Q_u ), the partial capacity, q, is equal to the sum of the partial friction capacity, f, and the partial bearing capacity, b.

q = f + b, in kips

f = friction mobilized along a pile segment at a displacement, z ≤ z_c

$f=Q_{f}\times {\bigg [}2\times {\sqrt {\frac {z}{z_{c}}}}-{\frac {z}{z_{c}}}{\bigg ]}$ , kips

z_c = the critical displacement of the pile segment at which Q_f is fully mobilized. Use z_c = 0.2 in.

b = tip resistance mobilized at a displacement, z ≤ z'_c

$b=Q_{b}\times {\bigg (}{\frac {z}{z'_{c}}}{\bigg )}^{1/3}$ , kips

z'_c = the critical pile displacement at which Q_b is fully mobilized.

Use z'_c = 0.05*D, inches

D = least pile dimension (D = diameter for C.I.P. piles), inches

However, the pile itself will deform, also. This pile deformation or pile compliance, δ, should be included in the pile resistance – displacement curve as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.3.

$\delta ={\frac {qL}{AE}}=$ pile compliance = pile deformation, inches

q = f + b = compressive axial load corresponding to a pile displacement z, kips

L = total friction length of the pile in the soil, inches

AE = For concrete C.I.P. piles, AE = A_cE_c+A_sE_s, kips.

For steel HP piles, AE = A_sE_s, kips.

From Figure 751.9.2.6.3, it can be seen that the pile axial load-axial deformation curve is nonlinear. If response spectrum method is considered in the analysis, the secant modulus stiffness is used. The secant modulus stiffness, K_s, is defined as the slope between two points at which the axial loads are equal to zero and Q_u/2. For regular highway bridge foundation piles, typical levels of cyclic compression loading would be from 50 to 70% of Q_u.

**Fig. 751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness Model**

Steel HP Bearing Piles

In compression, Q_f = 0, because bearing piles bear directly on rock.

In tension, Q_f = the ultimate friction capacity of the pile.

Q_b = the ultimate bearing capacity, in kips (or tons)

Q_b = 0.25 * f_y * A_s (AASHTO 4.5.7.3), where:

A_s = the HP steel pile area, in square inches

f_y = yield stress of the pile steel, in ksi

In compression, Q_u = Q_b, because Q_f = zero.

In tension, Q_u = Q_f, because Q_b = zero.

The pile is more often in compression due to preloading from dead load, so the pile axial spring constant can be calculated as:

K_{s}={\frac {AE}{L}}

where:

AE = A_sE_s, kips, using the HP steel area, square inches.

L = total length of pile between the pile cap and the point of bearing on rock, inches.

Pile Group Effects

Design pile footings with a center to center spacing of more than or equal to 3 pile diameters.

a) Pile group capacity in cohesionless soils: The ultimate group capacity for driven piles in cohesionless soils can be taken as the sum of the individual ultimate pile capacities.

b) Pile group capacity in cohesive soils:

1) For pile groups driven in clays with c ≤ 14 psi, a group efficiency of 0.7 (i.e. use 70% of the sum of the individual ultimate pile capacities) for center to center pile spacings of three times the pile diameter. If the center to center pile spacing is greater than 6 times the pile diameter, a group efficiency of 1.0 may be used. Linear interpolations should be used for intermediate center to center pile spacings.

2) For pile groups driven in clays with c > 14 psi, a group efficiency of 1.0 may be used.

751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)

Calculating Stiffnesses

The pile lateral translational spring constants are determined using estimated soil properties and the COM624P computer program (Wang and Reese, 1993) or any other programs that utilize non-linear p-y curves for either single piles or a pile group.

1) First, set up the soil depth profile at the pile location. Use the boring data and the bridge profile plot to determine the SPT blowcounts along the pile length.

2) For a given soil profile, the pile lateral force-lateral deflection curve at the top of pile (pile head) can be obtained by applying incremental lateral forces at the pile head, the program then calculates the corresponding lateral deflections at the pile head. The material non-linearity of the pile is also considered in the program. Similarly, pile moment-rotational curve at the top of pile can be obtained by the COM624P program.

Since the response spectrum method is based on linear analysis, the secant modulus stiffness is used to represent the equivalent linear stiffness. The secant modulus stiffness is defined as the slope between two points at which the lateral loads are equal to zero and P(M_u)/2, where Mu is the ultimate moment capacity of the pile; P(M_u) represents the lateral load at which Mu is developed in the pile. The ultimate moment capacity of CIP pile or composite concrete-steel shell pile is based on the limit state of concrete strain, ε_c=0.003 and the steel shell strain, ε_s=0.015. The ultimate moment capacity of steel HP pile is equal to the plastic moment, M_p, of the pile under constant axial load due to superstructure and substructure loads.

3) It should be recognized that using the secant stiffness approach (including axial, lateral, and rotational stiffness) in the seismic analysis is an approximation method to simplify the time consuming non-linear dynamic analysis following the load-deformation relationship of the pile head. In general, using the secant stiffness approach in conjunction with the pile stress check described in EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis gives reasonable solutions in the design process without conducting an iterative procedure.

Example 6.1.2.6.4. Find the stiffness of an individual pile at the groundline level which represents the characteristics of the soil–pile interactions.

Description: A pile-cap bent with four steel HP12 x 53 piles is shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1. The bent has skew of 54.5 degrees. For individual piles, the stiffnesses of pile-soil interaction are estimated using COM624P computer program, then these stiffnesses are used to form Point elements in the structural model as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.2. The point elements are located at the ground level which represent the characteristics of the pile-soil interactions.

**Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1 Intermediate Pile Bent**

Additional Information

Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.3 Test 5.out

Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.4 Test 6.out

Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.4 Test 6.out, second page

Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.5 Test 5B.out

Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.6 Test 6B.out

Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.6 Test 6B.out, second page

The soil is classified as stiff clay with c = 2 ksf; γ= 0.069 pci; ε₅₀= 0.007; and k =400 pci, where c is the undrained shear strength of clay; γ is effective unit weight; ε₅₀ is the strain corresponding to one-half the maximum principle stress difference; and k is the variation of soil modulus.

In order to formulate the stiffnesses of pile-soil interaction, the computer program COM624P is used to obtain the translational, rotational and rotational-translational coupling stiffnesses for joints 9, 10, 11, and 12 (see Fig. 751.9.6.1.2.6.4.2). The COM624P output for fixed head and applied lateral forces in the y_e direction, hinge head and applied moment in the z_e direction, fixed head and applied lateral forces in the z_e direction, and hinge head and applied moments in the y_e direction are shown in the output files TEST5.OUT, TEST6.OUT, TEST5B.OUT, and TEST6B.OUT, respectively.

From the TEST5.out and TEST6.out outputs, the stiffnesses of point element S₃₃ (or S(3,3)), S₃₅ (or S(3,5)), S₅₅, S₂₂, S₂₆, and S₆₆ can be calculated as follows:

a) For S₃₃:

Plastic moment M_pye = 1159.2 k-in.

$M={\frac {M_{pye}}{2}}=$ 579.6 k-in, which is close to M=548 k-in in the SUMMARY TABLE of TEST5B.OUT

$S_{33}={\frac {P}{\delta _{ze}}}={\frac {20\ kip}{0.14\ in.}}=$ 142.9 k/in.

b) For S₃₅:

$S_{3}5={\frac {M}{\delta _{ze}}}={\frac {548}{0.14}}=$ 3914 (kip/rad)in which δ is the lateral displacement at pile head.

c) For S₅₅:

Since 579.6 k-in is close to 600 k-in, S55 can be obtained from TEST6B.OUT as

Total rotation at top of the pile is θ_ye= 0.0123/5 = 0.0025 rad.

$S_{55}={\frac {M}{\theta _{ye}}}={\frac {600}{0.0025}}=$ 240000(k-in/rad.)

$S_{53}={\frac {P}{\theta _{ye}}}={\frac {16.2}{0.0025}}=$ 6480(kip/rad.)

Since the program performs structural analysis using symmetric stiffness matrix, use average number for S₃₅ and S₅₃ approximately: S35 = S53 = (3914+6480)/2 = 5200 (kip/rad.)

d) For S₂₂:

Plastic moment M_pze= 2664 kip-in.

M = (M_pze)/2 = 1332 kip-in. (From TEST5.OUT SUMMARY TABLE, it is between 1100 k-in. and 1630 k-in.)

${\frac {1332-1100}{1630-1100}}={\frac {232}{530}}=0.438$

$S_{22}={\frac {P}{\delta _{ye}}}={\frac {30+(0.438\times 10)}{0.159+(0.438\times (0.289-0.159))}}={\frac {34.38}{0.216}}=$ 159.2 (kip/in.)

e) For S_26</sub:>

$S_{26}={\frac {M}{\delta _{ye}}}={\frac {-1332}{0.216}}=$ -6166 (kip/rad.)

f) For S₆₆:

Since 1332 k-in. is closer to 1400 k-in., the S₆₆ can be obtained from TEST6.OUT as

Total rotation at top of the pile θ_ze = 0.0132/5 = 0.0026 rad.

$S_{66}={\frac {M}{\theta _{ye}}}={\frac {1400}{0.0026}}=$ 538460 k-in./rad.

$S_{62}={\frac {-P}{\theta _{ye}}}={\frac {-27.2}{0.0026}}=$ -10460 kip/rad.

Since the program performs structural analysis using symmetric stiffness matrix, use average number for S₆₂ and S₂₆ approximately: S₂₆ = S₆₂ = (−6166 − 10460)/2 = -8313 (kip/rad.)

g) For axial stiffness S₁₁: ${\frac {AE}{L}}={\frac {15.5\times 29000}{25\times 12}}=$ 1498.33 kip/in

h) For torsional stiffness S₄₄: GJ/L = (11100 x 1.12)/(25 x 12) = 41.44 kip-in/rad. Usually, the torsional effect of an individual pile is insignificant for the multiple-column bent.

Therefore, the stiffness matrix of the pile at the groundline level corresponding to the pile element coordinate system (x_e, y_e, z_e) is:

Pile Group Effects:

Design pile footings with a center to center spacing of more than or equal to 3 pile diameters.

For center to center pile spacing of 3 pile diameters, it is suggested that a p multiplier, P_m, value of 0.8 be used to modify the p-y curve of individual piles along the lead row, 0.4 for the second row, and 0.3 for the third and subsequent rows. For larger center to center spacings, these P_m values should be conservative. Alternatively, using a P_m = 0.5 for all piles to represent the average adjustment factor is adequate in practical design for earthquake loadings. For center to center pile spacings of 6 pile diameters, the pile group effect can be neglected. For pile spacings between 3 and 6 pile diameters, us a linear interpolation between p multipliers of 0.5 and 1.0.

p-y Curves for Liquefied Soil:

The p-multiplier of 0.1 can be used for liquefied soil (MCEER Report 98-0018, 1998). If p-multipliers are not used, the residual shear strength of the liquefied soil can be used in accordance with EPG 751.9.2.5 where the soil type is determined from the residual shear strength soil property correlations that can be used for the p-y analysis.

751.9.2.6.5 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness - Linear Subgrade Modulus Method

The lateral load-deflection characteristics of the pile-soil system are mildly nonlinear. The elastic pile usually dominates the nonlinear soil stiffness. Furthermore, the significant soil-pile interaction zone is usually confined to a depth at the upper 5 to 10 pile diameters. Therefore, simplified single-layer pile-head stiffness design charts are appropriate for lateral loading. The stiffness charts shown in figures 6.1.2.6.5-1 – 6.1.2.6.5-4 make use of a discrete Winkler spring soil model in which stiffness increases linearly with depth from zero at grade level where the location of the pile head is assumed. This linear subgrade stiffness model has been found to reasonably fit pile load test data for both sand and clay soil conditions. The coefficient f in these figures is used to define the subgrade modulus E_s at depth z, representing the soil stiffness per unit pile length. Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.5 and 751.9.2.6.5.6 show f values for piles embedded in sand and clay respectively (assuming elastic pile). For the purpose of selecting an appropriate f value, the soil condition at the upper 5 pile diameters should be used.

These stiffness charts are appropriate for piles with embedded length greater than 3 times the pile characteristic length, λ. The following equation can be used to obtain the characteristic length of pile-soil system:

\lambda ={\Big (}{\frac {EI_{p}}{f}}{\Big )}^{1/5}

(1)

Embedment Effect

Soil resistance on the pile increases and the stiffness coefficients at the pile head increase with the depth of embedment due to additional overburden. Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.7 – 751.9.2.6.5.9 present pile head stiffness coeficients for pile embedment depths of 5 and ten ft. based on a subgrade modulus, which increases linearly with depth.

Pile Response and Load Distribution

The pile lateral and moment distribution can be estimated by the equations shown in the Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.10 and 751.9.2.6.5.11 for non-embedded and embedded piles respectively. In the figures, the A and B shape functions are non-dimensional and can be used to solve for the pile deflections and moments along the pile including the fixed pile head condition. Tables 751.9.6.5.1 – 751.9.2.6.5.7 give the data of the shape functions.

Example 1:

Find the stiffness matrix of a vertical pile shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1 at the groundline level.

Solution"

1) Calculate S₃₃:

EPG 751.9.2.6.5 Figures

EI_y = 29000 ksi x 127 in⁴ = 3.6 x 10⁹ # - in⁴

From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6: for clay with undrained shear strength of 2 ksf, f = 32 pci

From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.1, using EI = 3.6 x 10⁹ # - in² and f = 32 pci,

S₃₃ = 5.5 x 10⁴ lb/in

2) Calculate S₅₅: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2, using the same EI and f as in 1), S₅₅ = 1.2 x 10⁸ lb-in/rad. = 120000 k-in/rad.

3) Calculated S₃₅: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3, using the same EI and f as 1), S₃₅ = 2.2 x 10⁶ lb/rad. = 2200 k/rad.

4) Calculate S₂₂: EI_z = 11397000 k-in² = 1.1 x 10¹⁰ #-in²

From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.11, using new EI and the same f as above: S₂₂ = 8.5 x 10⁴ lb/in

5) Calculate S₆₆: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2, using the same EI and f from 4): S₆₆ = 2.7 x 10⁸ lb-in/rad. = 270000 k-in/rad.

6) Calculate S₂₆: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3, using the same EI and f from 4): S₂₆ = 4 x 10⁶ lb/rad. = 4000 k/rad.

7) S₁₁ and S₄₄ are the same as calculated in Example 1 in EPG 751.9.2.6.4. The completed stiffness matrix is as follows:

In comparison with the stiffness matrix calculated in Example 1 from EPG 751.9.2.6.4, there are some discrepancies between the two matrices. The reason for the discrepancies is because the linear subgrade modulus method (Lam, et al, 1991) is originally derived using a 1 inch deflection of the pile head in clay as shown on the figure below.

From the above figure, it is recommended using the secant stiffness approach for the pile stiffness estimation as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4. If a p-y curve based computer program is not available, the linear subgrade modulus method may be used to estimate pile stiffness and moment distribution along a pile. However, using the linear subgrade modulus method may result in a significant underestimation of pile stiffness when a dynamic structural analysis shows that pile deflection is much less than 1 inch.

EPG 751.9.2.6.5 Tables

Note: For the following example, λ = T from Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.10 & 751.9.2.6.5.11 and Tables 751.9.2.6.5.1 through 751.9.2.6.5.7.

Example 2:

Find: a) the lateral stiffness of the embedded pile-head, S₃₃ shown below.

b) the moment distribution and lateral deflection along the pile using the linear subgrade modulus method.

pile-head is fixed

c = 2 ksf

γ = 0.069 pci

ε₅₀ = 0.007

k = 400 pci

EI_y = 3.6 x 10⁹ #-in = 3.6 x 10⁶ k-in²

Solve: a) Using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6 with c = 2 ksf, f = 32 pci

Using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7 with EI_y = 3.6 x 10⁹ #-in² and f = 32 pci,

S₃₃ ≈ 1.05 x 10⁵ #/in = 105 k/in

b) From eq (1), the characteristic length:

\lambda ={\Big (}{\frac {EI_{y}}{f}}{\Big )}^{1/5}={\Big (}{\frac {3.6\times 10^{9}\ lb-in^{2}}{32pci}}{\Big )}^{1/5}

= 40.76 in

E_so= f x 4ft = (32 pci) (4 x 12) = 1536 psi

{\frac {E_{so}}{f\times \lambda }}={\frac {1536}{32\times 40.76}}=

1.178, use Table 751.9.2.6.5.5 (E_so ≈ 1.0)

from Fig.751.9.2.6.5.11:

Slope, S =

{\frac {P_{t}\lambda ^{2}}{EI}}A_{s}+{\frac {M_{t}\lambda }{EI}}B_{s}

(a)

Deflection, y =

{\frac {P_{t}\lambda ^{3}}{EI}}A_{y}+{\frac {M_{t}\lambda ^{2}}{EI}}B_{y}

(b)

Moment, M = (P_tλ)A_m + M_tB_m (c)

For a fixed-head pile: S=0

Substituting S=0 into eq (a),

S = 0 = ${\frac {P_{t}\lambda ^{2}}{EI}}A_{s}+{\frac {M_{t}\lambda }{EI}}B_{s}$ , Where A_s and B_s are coefficients at the pilehead

= λA_s + (M_t / P_t)B_s

∴(M_t / P_t) = -λ(A_s / B_s) (d) Where λ= = 40.76in.

From Table 751.9.2.6.5.5: A_s = -0.879 and B_s = -1.290 ∴ (A_s / B_s) = 0.681

Substituting eq (d) into eq (c),

Moment M = (P_tλ)A_m +M_tB_m

=

P_{t}\lambda {\big (}A_{m}+{\frac {M_{t}}{P_{t}\lambda }}B_{m}{\big )}

=

P_{t}\lambda {\big (}A_{m}-{\frac {A_{s}}{B_{s}}}B_{m}{\big )}

= (10 kips x 40.76 in)(A_m - 0.681B_m)

= 407.6 (A_m - 0.681B_m) kip-in (e)

Using Table 751.9.2.6.5.5,the following table is created:

Substituting eq (d) into eq (b)

y =

{\frac {P_{t}\lambda ^{3}}{EI}}A_{y}+{\frac {M_{t}\lambda ^{2}}{EI}}B_{y}

=

{\frac {P_{t}\lambda ^{3}}{EI}}{\big (}A_{y}+{\frac {M_{t}\lambda ^{2}}{P_{t}\lambda }}B_{y}{\big )}

=

{\frac {P_{t}\lambda ^{3}}{EI}}{\big (}A_{y}-{\frac {A_{s}}{B_{s}}}B_{y}{\big )}

=

{\frac {10\times (40.76)^{3}}{3.6\times 10^{6}}}{\big (}A_{y}-0.681B_{y}{\big )}

= 0.188(A_y - 0.681B_y) (f)

Using Table 751.9.2.6.5.5, the following table is created:

Z/λ	Depth (z), in.	Coefficients	Deflection From eq (f)
Z/λ	Depth (z), in.	A_y	Deflection From eq (f)	B_y
0.0	0.00	1.097	0.879	0.0937 in
0.2	8.15	0.923	0.641	0.0915 in
0.4	16.30	0.755	0.442	0.0854 in
0.8	32.60	0.460	0.153	0.0669 in
1.2	48.91	0.236	-0.012	0.0459 in
1.6	65.22	0.087	-0.087	0.0275 in
2.0	81.52	0.001	-0.104	0.0135 in
3.0	122.3	-0.044	-0.051	-0.0017 in
3.5	142.7	-0.031	-0.023	-0.0029 in
4.0	163.0	-0.016	-0.006	-0.0022 in
5.0	203.8	0.000	0.004	-0.0005 in

Check the pile stiffness: S₃₃ = 10kips/0.0937in. = 107 k/in. which is very close to the value calculated in a) using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7.

751.9.2.6.6 Drilled Shaft Lateral and Rotational Stiffnesses

The diameter of the drilled shaft is usually much bigger than the typical piles used by MoDOT and the aspect ratio (length to diameter) is usually smaller for drilled shafts. Due to a smaller aspect ratio, the magnitude of rotation of the shaft can be more significant than for a pile. Therefore, the rotational resistance along the length and at the tip of the shaft, which is neglected for a typical pile, could be very significant. For simplicity, the procedure of using p-y curves for piles is recommended for drilled shafts. However, a scaling factor (larger than unity) shall be applied to either the linear subgrade modulus, Es, or the resistance value (p) of the p-y curves for shaft diameters greater than 24 inches. The scaling factor is the ratio of the shaft diameter to a 24 in. diameter shaft (Lam 1998).

Additional Information

Volume II of report #FHWA/RD-86/102, sections 5.0-5.8

751.9.2.6.7 Spread Footing Stiffness, Equivalent Circular Footing Method

For spread footings and caps of pile footings, the general form of stiffness matrix is summarized in the figure below, (Lam and Martin, 1986).

**Spread Footing Foundation Matrix, [K₀]**

For spread footings, this is the master joint stiffness matrix located at the center of gravity of the footing. For pile footings, this stiffness matrix should be combined with the pile stiffness matrices using rigid body transformation. In general, the off-diagonal (cross-coupling) terms can be neglected, for two reasons: 1) the values of the off-diagonal terms are small, especially for shallow footings, and 2) they are difficult to compute. However, for some unusual deeply-embedded footings where the ratio of embedment depth to equivalent diameter is greater than five, the contribution of stiffness from the cross-coupling terms may need to be included.

Stiffness Matrix

The stifness matrix [K], of an embedded footing can be express as:

[K] = α ∗ β ∗ [K0] where:

[K0] = the stiffness matrix of an equivalent circular surface footing from the above figure.

α = the foundation shape correction factor using L/B from Fig. 751.9.2.6 Shape Factor and:

2L = the longer of the footing length or width in feet.

2B = the shorter of the footing length or width in feet.

β = the foundation embedment factor using D/R from Fig. 751.9.2.6 Embedment Factor and:

D = footing thickness in feet

R = equivalent footing radius as defined in the figure below, in feet. Note that R is different for different modes of displacement.

Equivalent Radius

Translational:

R={\sqrt {\frac {4BL}{\pi }}}

(Translation about any axis)

Rotational:

R_{1}={\Bigg [}{\frac {(2B)(2L)^{3}}{3\pi }}{\Bigg ]}^{(1/4)}

(Rocking about the 1-axis)

R_{3}={\Bigg [}{\frac {(2B)^{3}(2L)}{3\pi }}{\Bigg ]}^{(1/4)}

(Rocking about the 3-axis)

Torsional:

R_{2}={\Bigg [}{\frac {4BL(4B^{3}+4L^{2})}{6\pi }}{\Bigg ]}^{(1/4)}

(Torsion about the 2-axis)

Stiffness Coefficients

Horizontal translation (KF1F1) =

{\frac {8GR}{2-\nu }}

Vertical translation (KF2F2) =

{\frac {4GR}{1-\nu }}

Horizontal translation (KF3F3) =

{\frac {8GR}{2-\nu }}

Rocking rotation (KM1M1) =

{\frac {8GR_{1}^{3}}{3(1-\nu )}}

Torsional rotation (KM2M2) =

{\frac {16GR_{2}^{3}}{3}}

Rocking rotation (KM1M1) =

{\frac {8GR_{3}^{3}}{3(1-\nu )}}

Where:

G = Shear modulus for the soil directly beneath the footing, ksf

=

{\frac {E}{2(1+\nu )}}

, where E and ν are from EPG 751.9.2.4

ν = Poisson’s Ratio for the soil directly beneath the footing

Three idealized embedment conditions are represented in the figure below. To consider all of the cases of embedment effects, β would normally be a function of R, D and h. However, report # FHWA/RD-86/102 (Volume II) shows that the effects of ground cover and excavations can be ignored, and the situation depicted in Case 1 can be used to approximate the conditions in Case 2 and 3. Therefore, β can be determined based solely on D/R from Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Embedment Factor for all three of the above cases.

**Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Shape Factor, α (Lam and Martin 1986)**

**Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Embedment Factor, β**

751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation

An abutment consists of many translational and rotational springs which represent the interaction between soil and backwall, beam, wings, pile caps and piles as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7A. To reduce the total number of degrees-of-freedom in the analysis and to take into account the geometric relationships among the spring constants, it is attractive to lump all the stiffnesses of these springs from “slave” joints to a “master” joint through a rigid body transformation. Any two joints on the rigid body (e.g. abutment) are constrained such that the deformation of one joint (the slave joint) can be represented by the deformation of the other joint (the master joint). Thus the degrees-of-freedom for the slave joint are transferred to the master joint, and the number of degrees-of-freedom in an abutment is reduced. Fig. 751.9.2.7B depicts the typical joints “j” and “m” for slave and master joints, respectively. For integral abutments, usually the center of gravity of the superstructure is chosen as the “master” joint as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7A. RBT can also be applied to the pile footing by transforming all the pile springs and pile cap springs to an assigned master joint. Usually the master joint is placed at the center of gravity of the pile cap. The RBT takes into account the coupling effects between translational and rotational responses of skewed abutments.

**Fig. 751.9.2.7A Abutment Spring Constants Considered**

1) RBT for Stiffness

Before a seismic structural analysis computer program is run, RBT is used to sum up the stiffness effects of many individual springs (at different "slave joint" locations and in different local element directions) into one equivalent 6 X 6 stiffness matrix (at the "master joint" and in its joint coordinate system).

2) RBT for Force

After the seismic structural analysis program has been run, RBT uses the master joint's forces to back-solve for individual forces and displacements at the slave joints. Usually, the master joint's displacements are not used because the displacements are very small and are more difficult to backcalculate.

**Fig. 751.9.2.7B Master Joint and Slave Joint Relationship**

Iteration of RBT for Stiffness and Force

A) Abutments

Sometimes during Iterative Abutment Analysis (see Section 6.1.2.10), it becomes necessary to reduce spring constants at slave joints. If individual stiffnesses are reduced, then (1) and (2) above must be repeated to recompute the master joint stiffness matrix and to recompute the local slave element forces for each new iteration.

B) Pile Footings

If pile footing design significantly changes the assumed size and pile geometry of a pile footing, then (1) and (2) above must be repeated to recompute the master joint stiffness matrix and to recompute the local slave element forces for each new iteration. The distribution of seismic forces to bents is by stiffness, relative to each other, so a change in stiffness at one bent affects the force distribution to all bents, particularly the distribution between intermediate bents.

In order to perform rigid body transformation, several procedures are needed and defined in the remaining portion of EPG 751.9.2.7.

751.9.2.7.1 Joint Definition and Degrees of Freedom

A joint is defined as the point where one or more springs are connected. The assemblage of all springs becomes a structural model. The structural model is built by first defining the location and orientation of each joint.

1.) Global Coordinate System. The global coordinate system (GCS) defines the location of a structure. The GCS is a cartesian coordinate system, with three perpendicular axes x_g, y_g and z_g. The z_g axis is defined as x_g cross y_g (right hand rule), as shown in the figure below. The location of the GCS’s origin is arbitrary, and usually taken at the base of the structure.

2.) Joint Coordinate System. The location of a joint is defined by its x_g, y_g and z_g coordinates in the GCS. Each joint is assumed to have six degrees of freedom (dof). The first three dof are translational, and correspond to the joint’s x_j, y_j and z_j axes. The remaining three dof are rotational, about the joint’s x_j, y_j and z_j axes as shown in the figure below. The x_j, y_j and z_j axes define a joint coordinate system (JCS) for a given joint. The JCS may not be parallel to the GCS, and the JCS may vary for different joints. Thus, the orientation of the JCS for a given joint is defined by two vectors ${\overrightarrow {V}}_{xj}$ and ${\overrightarrow {V}}_{yj}$ . The origin of the JCS is at the joint. A third vector is then ${\overrightarrow {V}}_{zj}={\overrightarrow {V}}_{xj}\times {\overrightarrow {V}}_{yj}$ . The three vectors are written in matrix form as:

where ${\overrightarrow {i}},{\overrightarrow {j}}$ and ${\overrightarrow {k}}$ are unit vectors parallel to the x_g, y_g and z_g axes. Note that the orientation of the JCS determines the orientation of the global degrees of freedom.

751.9.2.7.2 Rigid Body Constraints

As shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7.2, summing the forces acting on the slave joint “j” about the master joint “m” in three dimensions, yields the force transformation matrix for a 3D rigid body as follows:

where {δ_m}_j represents the displacement vector of the master joint, and {δ_s}_j represents the displacement vector of the slave joint.

751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System (ECS)

Each structural component of an abutment or pile footing such as piles, pile caps, backwalls or wings contain several spring constants in the element coordinate directions. The direction of the individual ECS is defined by the designer. Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 shows some typical ECS for piles, pile caps, backwalls and wings.

**Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System**

For example, in Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 (b), there are three translational springs, K₁₁, K₂₂, K₃₃, in the ECS’ x_e, y_e and z_e directions, respectively, and 3 rotational springs, K₄₄, K₅₅, K₆₆, in the ECS’ x_e, y_e and z_e directions, respectively.

751.9.2.7.4 Transferring Element Force Matrices

Transferring Spring Element Force Matrix From ECS to GCS

Let the element coordinate system be denoted x_e, y_e and z_e at a joint. The three vectors that define the orientation of the ECS can be written in matrix form as:

Transferring Element Force Matrix From GCS to JCS

751.9.2.7.5 Transferring the Element Stiffness Matrix at Slave Joint “i” in its ECS to Master Joint in the JCS Direction

Example:

Transfer the pile-head stiffness matrix of pile no.2 as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7.5 to the master joint at joint 17. In the figure, the pile footing consists of 16 piles and a rigid pile cap. The GCS (x, y, z) and ECS (x_e, y_e, z_e) of the individual piles are also shown in the figure. Let all the joints JCS be in the same direction as the GCS and assume all the slave joints (at pilehead locations) have the same elevations as that of the master joint. The individual pile-head matrix corresponding to the pile ECS is:

It is assumed that the rotation and lateral movements at the pile-heads are small. Therefore, the rotational stiffnesses at the pile-head are neglected in this example.

751.9.2.8 Modeling of Intermediate Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Bents

751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method

A rigorous procedure to develop a linear 6x6 pile stiffness matrix at groundline has been described in the example in EPG 751.9.2.6.4. Fig. 751.9.2.8.1 illustrates the structural model used by this approach.

**Fig. 751.9.2.8.1 Structural Model for Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents**

The common form of the stiffness matrix in the local pile coordinate system (x_e, y_e, z_e) is given in eq. (1) in which the diagonal terms K_x, K_y, K_z, K_θx, K_θy, K_θz are stiffnesses corresponding to translational and rotational degrees of freedom associated with x_e, y_e and z_e axes, respectively. The off-diagonal terms represent coupling between two degrees of freedom. These stiffness coefficients can be calculated from the solutions presented in EPG 751.9.2.6.

751.9.2.8.2 Equivalent Cantilever Column Method - a Simplied Approach

In the equivalent cantilever method, the foundation is replaced by a cantilever column that has stiffness approximately equivalent to those of the pile and surrounding soil. This is represented in Fig. 751.9.2.8.2.

**Fig. 751.9.2.8.2 Structural Model for Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents**

This simplified approach may be used if a seismic analysis computer program is not capable of providing user input of a 6x6 stiffness matrix to represent the foundation stiffness at ground level. The stiffness matrix of a equivalent cantilever column can be expressed as:

For translational and rotational stiffnesses, it is obvious that only three cantilever model parameters (i.e. EIy, EIz, and L) are not sufficient to satisfy all six stiffness coefficients (four diagonal stiffnesses, K_y, K_z, K_θy, K_θz, and two cross-coupling stiffness, K_yθz, K_zθy) in equation (1) of EPG 751.9.2.8.1.

However, the general approach is to match the diagonal stiffness terms K_y, K_z and K_θz. From eqs. (1) and (2):

Example 751.9.2.8.2:

Find the equivalent cantilever column’s L, EI_y, EI_z, EA and GJ in example 751.9.2.6.4.

Solve: From Example 751.9.2.6.4,

751.9.2.9 Modeling of Pile (Drilled Shaft) Footings

751.9.2.9.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method – Rigorous Approach

A rigorous approach to develop a linear 6 x 6 pile stiffness matrix at the bottom of the foundation cap has been described in Example 751.9.2.6.4 in EPG 751.9.2.6.4. Figure 751.9.2.9.1 illustrates the structural model used by this approach.

**Fig. 751.9.2.9.1 Structural Model for Pile (and Drilled Shaft) Footing Bents**

The common form of the stiffness matrix in the local pile (or shaft) coordinate system (x_e, y_e, z_e) is given in eq. (1) in EPG 751.9.2.8.1.

751.9.2.9.2 Axial and Translational Stiffness Method - Simplified Approach

For a pile footing type configuration shown in Fig. 751.9.2.9.1, the rotational stiffness of the pile group tends to be dominated by the axial pile stiffness as compared to the stiffness contribution from the bending stiffness of individual piles. Therefore, a simplified fixed pile-head model can be used in the seismic analysis. Fig. 751.9.2.9.2 illustrates the pile footing model based on this approach. Only pile axial and two horizontal translational stiffnesses are considered in the analysis.

**Fig. 751.9.2.9.2 Structural Model for Pile (and Drilled Shaft) Footing Bents**

The stiffness matrix of a pile can be expressed as:

[K_pile]_3x3 =

{\begin{bmatrix}K_{x}&0&0\\0&K_{y}&0\\0&0&K_{z}\end{bmatrix}}

in which the diagonal terms K_x, K_y and K_z are stiffnesses corresponding to translational degrees of freedom associated with x_e, y_e and z_e, respectively. Except for a special case, the simplified approach shall be considered sufficient in the seismic analysis.

751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis

Soil Stiffness Nonlinearity

During an earthquake, ground motion causes the bridge abutments to impact against the soil, which deforms the soil. So, soil stiffness varies nonlinearly during seismic motion.

Linear Approximations of Nonlinear Soil Stiffnesses

By using response spectrum methods, an equivalent linear soil stiffness is required for proper modeling. Spring "constants" are not really constant, but instead they are changeable modeling tools. Equivalent linear springs are used to approximate nonlinear structure/soil interaction, similar to the "secant modulus" approximation for other nonlinear materials.

Reducing Stiffnesses

Fig. 751.9.2.10.1 is slightly altered from the AASHTO flowchart because of limits on reducing pile stiffnesses as described below.

Equivalent linear stiffnesses are valid only if they predict achievable soil forces. The passive force applied on the backwall will never exceed the passive force capacity of the soil, because the soil would fail before this could happen. If the seismic analysis program model is outputting an abutment force which exceeds the soil pressure capacity, then the model is predicting something impossible, and the spring constants must be reduced before accepting the model. According to AASHTO Div. I-A 1998 C4.5.2, this force-limiting should apply to all spring locations, including: 1) soil at backwall, 2) soil at wings, 3) piles, etc. Pile stiffness reduction is limited, as described below.

The starting values for springs should be based on the best available soil information, as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4 and EPG 751.9.2.6.5, and it is better to slightly overestimate the stiffness than to underestimate it. Overestimated stiffnesses may be reduced to satisfy the displacement demand through iterative abutment analysis, usually iterative abutment analysis does not increase underestimated stiffnesses in order to save computing time.

Redesigning the Abutment for Force or Displacement

As indicated in the flowchart (Fig. 751.9.2.10.1) and the discussion of this section, the abutment may require redesigning if force or displacement limitations are exceeded. See EPG 751.9.2.10.1, EPG 751.9.2.10.2 or EPG 751.9.2.10.3 for discussion of intermediate wings, squared-off wings, deepened beams and other remedial actions.

General Procedure

Iterative Abutment Analysis

Note: Each different bridge model will require its own Iterative Abutment Analysis. For example, a model without liquefaction will require a completely independent analysis from a model with liquefaction.

1) Stiffness:

Compute the initial stiffness estimates as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.

2) RBT for Stiffness:

Combine the stiffnesses at the master joints using RBT as described in EPG 761.9.2.7.

3) Seismic Analysis:

Run the Seismic Structural Analysis Program as described in EPG 751.9.2.8.

4) RBT for Forces:

Redistribute the master joint forces using RBT for force as described in EPG 761.9.2.7.

5) Soil Pressures:

Compute the soil pressure (see EPG 751.9.2.10.1) on the backwall and the pressure on the wings. If the pressure is greater than the allowable pressure, then reduce the corresponding stiffness accordingly and go to Step 2. If the pressures are less than the allowable, then go to Step 6.

6) Pile Stresses:

a) Check shear stress and resultant moment (see EPG 751.9.2.10.2). If pile stress or moment is greater than the allowable, for simplicity, reduce the stiffnesses in each direction accordingly, corresponding to the pile-head displacement calculated in that direction. However, in order to keep R = 1 for pile foundations, do not reduce the stiffness below the minimum stiffness. The minimum stiffness is defined as the translational stiffness at which the ultimate moment, M_u, for concrete piles or plastic moment, M_p, for steel piles occurred along the pile as shown in Fig.751.9.2.10.2.

If the new stiffness is greater than the minimum stiffness, then go to Step 2.

If the new stiffness is less than the minimum stiffness, then go to Step 6 (b).

If the stress and moment are OK, then go to Step 7.

b) If pile stiffness has been reduced to the minimum, then the designer must do one of the following before going to Step 2:

i) For excessive transverse force, first add an intermediate wing (a maximum of two) and/or square off the exterior wings.

ii) For excessive longitudinal force, first try deepening the abutment beam by 6 in. min. - 12 in. max.

iii) If (i) and (ii) does't fix the problem, then try using a larger size pile or more piles and go to Step 2.

iv) As a last resort, if the abutment is still overloaded, try stiffening the intermediate bents by using larger columns or larger piles or more piles at the intermediate bents.

**Fig. 751.9.2.10.2 Definition of K_min**

7) Abutment Displacements:

Check the displacements at the master joint (see EPG 751.9.2.10.3). If the abutment displacements are less than the allowable, then go to Step 8. If the abutment displacements are greater than the allowable, then the designer must do one of the following before going to Step 2:

i) Add abutment piles.

ii) Use larger size abutment piles.

iii) For excessive transverse displacement, add an intermediate wing (a maximum of two) and/or square off the exterior wings.

iv) For excessive longitudinal displacement, deepen the abutment beam by 6 in. min. - 12 in. max.

v) If the abutment is still overloaded, try stiffening the intermediate bents by using larger columns or larger piles or more piles at the intermediate bents.

vi) As a last resort, see the Structural Design Engineer about specifying the backfill soil properties.

8) Complete the Seismic Design:

Return to the checklist and/or flowchart in EPG 751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations, then design abutment components, connections and intermediate bents as described in EPG 751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length. If the seismic response of the bridge changes as a result of the design being different from the model assumed, then return to Step 2.

751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings

Compacted Backfill Soil at Abutments

Ultimate soil capacities should be used for seismic design.

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A Sections 6.4.2(B) and 7.4.2(B)

It is not necessary to check resultant soil pressures. The longitudinal failure state of an abutment is taken to be when the ultimate soil pressure acts on the entire backwall, causing global failure of the sliding wedge of soil behind the backwall. The transverse failure state is taken to be when the ultimate soil pressure acts on the entire wing area, causing global failure of the sliding wedge of soil behind the wings. The actual distribution of stresses in compacted abutment fill is too complex to compute for cyclical seismic loads, and it is the global failure rather that a local failure that controls the ultimate capacity of the abutment soil. Therefore, check the backwall pressure normal to its plane, then check the wing pressure normal to its plane, considering them to be independent of each other.

p = F / A ≤ p_A

p = pressure on the planar surface of the backwall or wing, ksf

F = Force on element obtained from Rigid Body Transformation (see EPG 761.9.2.7), kips. Check all seismic loading cases including both abutments and both load combinations:

Case I = 1.0*L + 0.3*T

Case II = 0.3*L + 1.0*T

A = Area of the backwall or wing, square feet

p_A (for integral and non-integral abutments) = 7.7ksf = the maximum (ultimate) dynamic soil passive pressure, ksf. The maximum dynamic soil passive pressure, pA, shall be reduced for backwall heights less than 8 ft. For example: p_A for a backwall height of 6 ft. p_A = 7.7*(6/8) = 5.8 ksf.

If p > p_A, then reduce the stiffness as described below and iterate until the pressure is just barely less than the allowable.

K_{i+1}={\frac {A\times p_{A}}{\delta _{i}}}

= trial stiffness for the i+1 run, kips/foot

δ_i = displacement of backwall or wing from the i run, ft.

Return to the checklist and/or flowchart in EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis.

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A Sections 6.4.2(C) and 7.4.2(C)

751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses

Abutment Pile Stresses The allowable pile stress is the ultimate pile strength.

In order for the estimated pile stiffnesses to be valid, the pile stresses must be below the ultimate pile stress (i.e. R=1).

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, 1992 Commentary C5.4.2

Non-Integral Abutments:

Consider non-integral abutment piles as "foundation" piles in AASHTO Div. IA, 7.2.1(B), with R=1, and do not allow plastic hinging.

Integral Abutments:

Use R=1 for ALL end bent piles, including those on integral end bents.

Concrete CIP Piles

1) Before running a seismic analysis program such as SEISAB, run one p-y curve program such as COM624P to obtain the stiffness and the lateral loadlateral displacement relationships as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4.

2) After SEISAB & RBT have been run, rerun COM624P to obtain the moment demand (MR) due to the resultant applied lateral pile load, PR.

3) From the same or other COM624P programs, the resultant ultimate moment capacity, (Mu) can be obtained at the demand axial loads P = DL ± EQ. For seismic load Case I and Case II, check the following criteria:

MR ≤ Mu, where:

MR = maximum resultant moment demand at the demand axial load, P=DL ± EQ, and at the demand resultant lateral load, PR, ft.*kips

PR =

{\sqrt {(P_{x})^{2}+(P_{y})^{2}}}

, resultant applied lateral load, kips

P_x or P_y = applied lateral load at the pile-head from the RBT, in the longitudinal and transverse directions respectively, kips

M_u = ultimate moment capacity at the demand axial load, at P = DL ± EQ, and at a limit state of ε_c= 0.003 (concrete) or ε_s= 0.015 (steel).

If M_R> M_u, then reduce the pile stiffnesses in both the long. and trans. directions according to the following equation:

K_new =

{\frac {P'_{x}}{H_{x}}}

or

{\frac {P'_{y}}{H_{y}}}

, where:

K_new = stiffness for new trial run, kips/ft., in the strong or weak directions.

P_x’ and P_y’ = pile-head lateral force on pile lateral load - lateral displacement curve as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4 in the long. and trans. directions, respectively.

Hx and Hy = pile-head lateral displacements in the long. and trans. direction, respectively, from RBT.

4) Return to the checklist or flowchart of EPG 751.9.2.10.

Steel HP Piles

1) Before running a seismic analysis program such as SEISAB, run two p-y curve programs such as COM624P: one for the strong direction, and one for the weak direction to obtain pile lateral load – lateral displacement curves in the strong and weak directions.

2) After SEISAB & RBT have been run, rerun COM624P to obtain the maximum demand moments along the pile in the strong direction (M_x) and weak direction (M_y). To obtain M_x, run COM624P with the pile demand axial load, P = DL ± EQ and the pile lateral load in the strong direction (P_x). To obtain M_y, run another COM624P with the pile demand axial load, P = DL ± EQ, and the pile lateral load in the weak direction (P_y).

These two COM624P programs will have different pile section properties. Run both programs for load case I and load case II.

3) All piles must meet the following equation:

{\frac {P}{0.85A_{s}F_{y}}}+{\frac {M_{x}}{M_{px}}}+{\frac {M_{y}}{M_{py}}}\leq 1.0

(1)

Additional Information

AASHTO 10.54.2

where:

P = applied axial load (DL ± EQ), kips

M_x and M_y = maximum moment demand at the above axial load, P, at the corresponding lateral load, P_x or P_y.

A_s = steel area, square inches

F_y = yield stress of steel, usually 36 ksi or 50 ksi. The difference in price is small, so 50 ksi should be used when steel stresses are high.

M_p = Z*F_y, where Z = plastic section modulus in the strong (x) or weak (y) direction, inch*kips

4) If eq. (1) can not be satisfied, then reduce the pile stiffness in both the strong and weak directions according to the following equation:

K_new =

{\frac {P'_{x}}{H_{x}}}

or

{\frac {P'_{y}}{H_{y}}}

, where:

K_new = stiffness for new trial run, kips/ft., in the strong or weak directions.

P_x’ and P_y’ = pile-head lateral force on pile lateral load - lateral displacement curve as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4 in the long. and trans. directions, respectively.

Hx and Hy = pile-head lateral displacements in the long. and trans. direction, respectively, from RBT.

5) Return to the checklist or flowchart of EPG 751.9.2.10.

751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, 1998 Commentary, C4.5.2

In Fig. 751.9.2.10.1, Flowchart for Iterative Abutment Analysis, after the abutment forces are OK, the resultant abutment displacement must also be acceptable before finishing the seismic analysis of the bridge.

\delta _{R}\leq \gamma _{allowable}

where:

\delta _{R}

= resultant displacement of the master joint from the seismic analysis, ft.

\delta _{R3}={\sqrt {\delta _{L}^{2}+(\delta _{0.3T})^{2}}}

, for Case I = L+0.3T

\delta _{R4}={\sqrt {(\delta _{0.3L})^{2}+\delta _{T}^{2}}}

, for Case II = 0.3L+T

δ_R is at the master joint (see Fig. 751.9.2.10.3), using either CQC or SRSS.

δ_allowable = 0.3 ft., for integral abutments and non-integral abutments with restrainers engaged.

δ_allowable = 10*A (in inches) for non-integral abutments under active Mononobe - Okabe pressure, where A = Acceleration Coefficient in gs.

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, 1998 Commentary

If the displacement exceeds the allowable value, then the abutment must be structurally altered as described in the flowchart description of EPG 751.9.2.10. If the structural behavior is different as a result of these changes, it will be necessary to redesign the bridge and the abutment for Group I-VI loads and for Seismic loads.

**Fig. 751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Master Joint**

751.9.3 Seismic Design Procedure

751.9.3.1 Connection Design

Seismic Performance Categories A, B, C, D

Seismic design forces can be considered either service loads or factored loads with a factor of 1.0. Load Factor Design (LFD) is to be used wherever possible. However, Allowable Stress Design (ASD) is still allowed when LFD would be difficult to apply. Connections must be designed for seismic forces in all four Seismic Performance Categories (A, B, C and D). For design of some typical seismic connections, see the EPG articles, below:

a) Anchor bolts (EPG 751.9.3.1.1)

b) Dowel bars (EPG 751.9.3.1.2)

c) Restrainer rods (EPG 751.9.3.1.3)

d) Concrete shear blocks (EPG 751.9.3.1.4)

e) Concrete end diaphragms (EPG 751.9.3.1.5)

f) Seismic isolation systems (EPG 751.9.3.1.6)

g) Joints (Beam/Column or Column/Footing) (EPG 751.9.3.1.7)

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2

Seismic Performance Category A

Minimum horizontal design force in each restrained direction for connections in SPC A is as described in AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2.

A seismic analysis is not required in SPC A, so do not use R=0.8 in SPC A. Use R=1 instead.

Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6

For design of connections in SPC B, C and D, see AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 and 7.2.1(A). For design of column joint connections in SPC C and D, see AASHTO Division I-A, Section 7.6.4 and EPG 751.9.3.1.7.

751.9.3.1.1 Anchor Bolts

For LRFD, see EPG 751.11.2 Design for anchor bolt design.

751.9.3.1.2 Dowel Bars

For LRFD, see EPG 751.22.2.7 Dowel Bars for dowel bar design.

751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers

Most restrainer rods are low carbon steel (ASTM F1554, F_u = 58ksi, F_y = 36ksi) threaded rods at expansion gaps and hinges. They can be either longitudinal, transverse or vertical restrainers, depending on their axis of orientation. Restrainers are designed to remain elastic.

Longitudinal Restrainers

Longitudinal restrainers may be added at expansion gaps when predicted seismic displacements exceed the available support length. Restrainers should be added at all hinges with expansion gaps. Restrainers may also be added in other situations as discussed in a retrofit strategy meeting. Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders. Locate the restrainer group as close as possible to the center of gravity (c.g.) of the superstructure (see Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.3). Orient the restrainers parallel to the centerline of the superstructure, except for expansion joints on bridges with skew > 30° and all curved bridges, then consider orienting the restrainers normal to the joint. If the restrainer is connected to the bent cap, a higher force may be directed to the columns than otherwise expected, and the bent should be designed to withstand the restrainer force. See Figs. 751.9.3.1.3.3 – 751.9.3.1.3.9 for the details for Longitudinal Earthquake Restrainers for the different superstructure types.

Restrainer Rod Design:

Restrainer Capacity

F_cap = force capacity of restrainer in kips, the smaller of these forces:

A_t*F_t where:

A_t = tensile stress area of threaded rod, square inches

F_t = = allowable tensile stress = 1.5(0.33 F_u) = 1.5 x 0.33 x 58 = 28.7 ksi for F1554, grade 36 rod.

where:

DS = dead load of the entire superstructure unit, kips. When two segments are tied together, use the weight of the heavier segment.

n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap

Restrainer Demand

F_dem= demand force in kips, taken to be the larger of these forces:

a) force from seismic analysis divided by the response factor, R,

where:

R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A

R = 0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D

b) 0.2*DS/n where:

DS = dead load of the entire superstructure unit, kips. When two segments are tied together, use the weight of the heavier segment.

n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap

c) A*DL/n where:

A = Acceleration coefficient in gs

DL = the weight of the lighter of the two adjoining superstructure segments

n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap

Example 9.3.1.3-1:

The accumulated dead load weight of a prestressed bridge segment with six girders is 1110 kips. The bridge is located in Seismic Performance Category C with A = 0.25. There are two 1 3/8 in. diameter restrainers for each girder at the end bent. From the seismic analysis, the total longitudinal force at the expansion gap is 300 kips. Check the suitability of the restrainers.

Solution:

Demand Force: 1) 0.2*DS/n = 0.2x1110/(2x6) = 18.5 kips

2) A*DS/n = 0.25x1110/(2x6) = 23.1 kips

3) (F/R)/n = (300/0.8)/12 = 31.25 kips ← Controls

Design Capacity: At*Ft = 1.48 x 28.71 ksi = 42.6 kips

42.6 kips > 31,25 kips Capacity is O.K.

∴ Two 1 3/8 in. diameter rods for each girder are satisfactory.

Note: Usually, restrainers should be omitted on the exterior face of exterior girders. For exterior girders, the two restrainers should be located on the interior face of the girder.

Anchor Stud Design

Anchor studs shall be designed using ultimate strength design and concrete shear cone failure theory. The standard stud size is 7/8” φ x 7” stud.

Use a response modification factor for connections of 0.8.

Locate the studs on the concrete backwall or diaphragm using the minimum spacing, 2R, and the minimum edge distance, R, where R is the major radius of the concrete shear cone as shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.1, below. If the minimum spacing or minimum edge distance cannot be met, then see manufacturer's catalog for computation of partial cone strength reductions. If possible, center the stud group around the restrainer rod.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.1 Concrete Shear Cone for Anchor Stud**

Anchor Plate Design

The area of the steel anchor plate shall be sized by the number of anchor studs required for tensile pullout and by the stud spacing (2R above) and edge distance on the plate. Locate the studs on the backwall or diaphragm using the minimum spacing, 2R, and the minimum edge distance, R. If the minimum spacing or minimum edge distance cannot be met, then consider the partial cone strength reductions. If possible, center the stud group around the restrainer rod. The thickness of the plate shall be sized by:

(a) Flexural stress on the plate considering the plate as a beam continuous-over-simple-supports with an allowable stress of 0.55Fy and a 33% allowable overstress in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D,

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 & 7.2.1 and AASHTO Table 10.32.1A

(b) Bearing stress on concrete (to account for the possibilities of local crushing at the expansion gap and/or restrainer deflection greater than 1/2" and/or backwall knockoff) of 0.3*f '_c, with a multiplier, ${\sqrt {\frac {A_{2}}{A_{1}}}}$ , (where A₁ is the loaded area and A₂ is the maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometrically similar and concentric with the loaded area), plus a 33% allowable overstress in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D. or

Additional Information

AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 & 7.2.1 and AASHTO 8.15.2.1.3

(c) minimum plate thickness = 3/8"

The backwall should be designed for flexure and shear as specified for abutment components in EPG 751.9.3.2.

Transverse Restrainers

Transverse restrainers are mainly used to keep the superstructure from sliding off the bearings. This type of restrainer is used either in place of, or along with, concrete shear blocks. The design procedure for transverse restrainers is the same as the design procedure for longitudinal restrainers with the exception that the demand force, F_dem, is only part a) of the longitudinal restrainer demand force design.

Vertical Restrainers (Hold-down Devices)

Vertical restrainers are only required in Seismic Performance Categories C and D (AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.5(B)), but they may also be used on important structures in SPC B. Vertical restrainers shall be used at all supports or hinges in continuous structures when the vertical seismic force (EQ) exceeds 50% of the dead load reaction (DR).

When 0.5(DR) < EQ < 1.0(DR), then the minimum net uplift force = 10% of the dead load downward force that would be exerted if the span were simply supported.

When EQ > 1.0(DR), then the net uplift force = 1.2*(EQ-DR), but not less than 10% of the dead load downward force that would be exerted if the span were simply supported.

Vertical restrainers can take several forms: (a) using existing anchor bolts, (b) adding threaded rods, (c) adding vertical restraining plates, or (d) adding prestressing strands. If vertical restrainers are required, see the Structural Project Manager to determine which vertical restrainer system should be used.

End Section thru Girder
Section thru Intermediate Bent Beam at Expansion Gap

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.2 Examples of Vertical Restrainers

(1) (Expansion Gap @ 60°F) + 1/2“
(2) Expansion Gap @ 60°F
(3) Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.
(4) On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.
(5) Locate the restrainer as close as possible to the neutral axis of the superstructure and as close as possible to the bottom of the diaphragm.
(6) End bent backwalls are to be designed for active seismic soil pressure as described in EPG 751.9.3.2.
(7) Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.3 Longitudinal Restrainers (End Bents - Steel Girders)

Note: For skewed structures, see Figure 751.9.3.1.3.9.

(1) On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.

(2) Locate at the center of gravity for the superstructure, using the spacing between girders.
If different beam depths are used, locate the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller beam. May adjust for clearance.

(3) Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.

(4) End bent backwalls are to be designed for active seismic soil pressure as described in EPG 751.9.3.2.

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.4 Longitudinal Restrainers (End Bents - Concrete Girders)

Note: For skewed structures, see Figure 751.9.3.1.3.9.

Yb = GRAVITY NEUTRAL AXIS OF PRESTRESSED I-GIRDERS *
ROADWAY	GIRDER SPACING	GIRDER TYPE
ROADWAY	GIRDER SPACING	III	IV	VI	VII
26'-0"	7’-6”	32.7	36.5	41.1	54.2
28’-0”	8’-2”	33.2	37.0	41.6	54.9
30’-0”	8’-8”	33.6	37.5	42.1	55.5
32’-0”	9’-2”	33.9	37.9	42.6	56.1
36’-0”	8’-2”	33.2	37.1	41.7	55.0
38’-0”	8’-8”	33.5	37.4	42.1	55.5
40’-0”	9’-0”	33.8	37.8	42.5	55.9
44’-0”	9’-9”	34.4	38.4	43.2	56.8

* Yb = Inches from bottom of beam, based on an 8½” slab.

(1) On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.

(2) Locate at the center of gravity for the superstructure. Use the gravity neutral axis of the
composite section, using the spacing between girders. If different beam depths are used, locate
the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller beam. May adjust for clearance.

(3) Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.5 Longitudinal Restrainers (Intermediate Bents - Concrete Girders)

(1) (Expansion Gap @ 60°F) + 1/2“
(2) Expansion Gap @ 60°F
(3) Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.
(4) On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.
(5) Locate the restrainer as close as possible to the neutral axis of the superstructure. Use the gravity neutral axis of the composite
section, using the spacing between girders. If different beam depths are used, locate the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller
beam. Adjust the restrainer to clear channel and shop weld. Larger bracing is required for prestressed to steel beam restrainers.
(6) Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.6 Longitudinal Restrainers (Intermediate Bents - Steel to Concrete Girders)

(1) (Expansion Gap @ 60°F) + 1/2“
(2) Expansion Gap @ 60°F
(3) Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.
(4) On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.
(5) Locate the restrainer as close as possible to the neutral axis of the superstructure and as close as possible to the bottom of
the diaphragm. Use the gravity neutral axis of the girder, using the spacing between girders. If different beam depths are used,
locate the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller beam. Adjust the restrainer to clear channel and shop weld.
(6) Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.7 Longitudinal Restrainers (Hinged Connection)

Note: Use Detail A for prestressed I-Girder structures at end and intermediate bents and also for all exterior
girders on inside face.

Use Detail B for steel structures at end bents or P/S I-Girders to steel structures at intermediate bents
or whenever more than two restrainers occupy one anchor plate.

Pull-out 32k per stud. Working stress load 16k per stud. (See TRW Nelson Division catalog.)

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.8 Details A and B for Anchor Plates

* For dimension properties of pipe, see AISC Steel Construction Manual, Part 1.
(1) Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.

Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.9 Details for Longitudinal Restrainers on Skewed Structures

751.9.3.1.4 Concrete Shear Blocks

For LRFD, see EPG 751.22.3.13 Concrete Shear Blocks for Concrete Shear Blocks design

751.9.3.1.5 Concrete End Diaphragms

Restrainers at Expansion Gaps, Concrete Girders

Design the concrete diaphragm thickness on P/S-I girder bridges with longitudinal restrainers at expansion gaps at abutments or intermediate bents. Check punching shear by Load Factor Design, as per AASHTO 8.16.6.6. Design force is the restrainer force used to size the rods in EPG 751.9.3.1.3. In tension, the failure surface is d/2 outside the outermost anchor studs.

751.9.3.1.6 Seismic Isolation Bearings

Isolation Bearings

Seismic isolation bearings shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 3^rd Ed., July 2010. Isolation bearings should only be used when specified on the design layout or when required for special retrofit projects. See the Structural Project Manager for approval and for the design specifications for the specific proprietary system to be used.

For LRFD, Seismic isolation bearings shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 4th Ed., 2023.

751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections

Principal Tension and Compression Stresses in Beam-Column Joints

The connections where columns and beams join, or where columns and footings join, should be based on the capacity design for shear and diagonal tension. For most locations, this is a “T”-shaped joint. For the analysis of “knee joints”, see Priestley and Seible, 1996.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.1 Joint Shear Stresses in a T-Joint**

In the capacity design of connection joints, the column moment, M⁰, will be the moment that is known and which will correspond to flexural overstrength of the column plastic hinges, i.e. M⁰ = 1.3M_p of the column. If the columns are designed based on plastic hinging, the beam and footings shall be designed with capacities greater than or equal to 1.3M_p.

At each joint, the principal tension and compression stresses are defined and checked as follows:

V_{jh}={\frac {M^{o}}{h_{b}}}

(1)

V_{jh}={\frac {V_{j}h}{b_{je}h_{c}}}

(2)

b_{je}={\begin{cases}{\sqrt {2}}D\\h_{c}+b_{c}\end{cases}}

(3)

V_{jv}={\frac {V_{jh}h_{b}}{h_{c}}}

(4)

V_{jv}=v_{jh}={\frac {v_{jv}}{b_{je}h_{b}}}

(5)

f_{v}={\frac {P_{c}}{b_{je}(h_{c}+h_{b})}}

(6)

p_{c}={\frac {f_{c}+f_{h}}{2}}+{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {f_{v}-f_{h}}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+v_{jh}^{2}}}

(7)

p_{t}={\frac {f_{c}+f_{h}}{2}}-{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {f_{v}-f_{h}}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+v_{jh}^{2}}}

(8)

in which:

V_jh = Average horizontal shear force within a joint.

V_jv = Average vertical shear force within a joint.

v_jh = Average horizontal shear stress within a joint.

v_jv = Average vertical shear stress within a joint.

h_b = Beam depth.

h_c = Column diameter or rectangular column cross-section height.

b_je = The effective width of a joint, defined in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.2.

D = Round column diameter.

f_v = Average vertical axial stress due to column axial force P_c, including the seismic component.

P_c = Column axial force.

f_h = Average horizontal axial stress at the center of the joint.

p_c = Nominal principal compression stress in a joint. (positive)

p_t = Nominal principal tensile stress in a joint. (negative)

b_b = Beam width

b_c = Column cross-section width

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.2 Effective Joint Width for Joint Shear Stress Calculations**

In Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.2(c), the effective width is taken at the center of the column section, allowing a 45° spread from boundaries of the column section into the beam cap. In the transverse direction, the effective width will be the smaller of the value given by eq. (3) and the beam cap width b_b. Experimental evidence indicates that diagonal cracking is initiated in the joint region when $p_{t}\geq 3.5{\sqrt {f'_{c}}}$ psi. The principle compression stress p_c shall be limited to $p_{c}\leq 0.3f'_{c}$ .

Design of Reinforcement for Beam-Column Joints

When the principal tension stress, p_t, exceeds $3.5{\sqrt {f'_{c}}}$ psi, joint cracking occurs and the following reinforcement shall be provided:

a) Vertical beam stirrup reinforcement shall be placed throughout the distance of h_b/2 from the column face on each side of the column. The required amount of vertical beam stirrup reinforcement, A_jv, is:

A_{jv}=0.125A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{\circ }}{f_{yv}}}

(9)

Where:

A_sc = The total area of longitudinal steel

f°_yc = overstrength stress in the column reinforcement use

f°_yc = 1.1f

f_yv = yield stress of vertical stirrup reinforcement.

b) Vertical beam stirrup reinforcement within the joint, A_vi, is

A_{vi}=0.0625A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{\circ }}{f_{yv}}}

(10)

c) The additional beam bottom longitudinal reinforcement required is

A_{sb}=0.0625A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{\circ }}{f_{yb}}}

(11)

where f_yb = the yield stress of the beam bottom longitudinal reinforcement. This additional reinforcement must be carried a sufficient distance to develop its yield strength a distance h_b/2 from the column face.

d) The horizontal hoop reinforcement within a joint requires

\rho _{s}={\frac {3.3}{Df_{gh}L_{a}}}{\Bigg (}{\frac {0.09A_{sc}f_{yc}^{\circ }D}{L_{a}}}-F{\Bigg )}

(12)

which for F = 0 simplifies to

\rho _{s}={\frac {0.3A_{sc}f_{yc}^{\circ }}{L_{a}^{2}f_{yh}}}

(13)

Where

F = The beam cap prestress force.

f_yh = The yield stress of the horizontal hoops.

L_a = The Anchorage length in the joint.

The minimum amount of horizontal hoop reinforcement shall be

\rho _{s}={\frac {3.5{\sqrt {f'_{c}}}}{f_{yh}}}

(14)

The spacing of the horizontal hoop can be based on:

$S={\frac {4A_{s}}{D'\rho _{s}}}$ (15)

Where

A_s = The cross-sectional area of the hoop bar.

D’ = The hoop diameter.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.3 Beam Cap Joint Reinforcement**

When the principal tension stress, p_t, does not exceed $3.5{\sqrt {f'_{c}}}$ psi, no joint cracking is expected. However, the following minimum reinforcement shall be provided:

a) Vertical beam stirrup reinforcement within the joint based on eq. (10)

b) Minimum horizontal hoop reinforcement based on eq. (14)

Note that the bending of any hooked reinforcement outward, away from the column core, shall not be used because it directs the anchorage force away from the joint. Inward bending of the column reinforcement is allowed. However, it is likely to cause a congestion problem. The use of straight column reinforcement embedded into the beam-column joint is recommended. The standard T-joint reinforcement details are shown in Figs. 751.9.3.1.7.4 - 751.9.3.1.7.6. If any reinforcement requirement based on eqs. (9) through (14) is greater than that shown in Figs. 751.9.3.1.7.4 - 751.9.3.1.7.6, the greater requirement shall be used.

(1) Increase by 25% the development length (other than top bars) or the standard hook in tension “Ldh” of EPG 751.40.8.4.2.

(2) The spiral bars or wire shall be continued for a distance equal to ½ the column diameter but not less than 15” from the face of the column connection into the footing.

(3) Use the greatest length of the following: column diameter of 1/6 of the clear height of column. Lapping of spiral reinforcement in this region is not permitted.

(4) Splices may be eliminated when the column height is 20’-0” or less or restrictions do not practically allow for lap splices.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.5 Seismic Bar Details**

See additional guidance in EPG 751.9.3.1.7, below, for footing reinforcement not shown.

(1) Increase by 25% the development length (other than top bars) or the standard hook minimum in tension “Ldh” of EPG 751.40.8.4.2.

(2) The spirals shall be continued for a distance equal to ½ the column diameter but not less than 15” from the face of the column connection into the footing.

Example 751.9.3.1.7.1: A column is subjected to an axial load (due to dead and seismic earthquake loads) of 520 kips. The column diameter is 36 in. with 20 #8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement. The beam cap dimensions are 3 ft. 9 in. wide by 3 ft. 7 in. deep with 5 #11 bars for the top reinforcement and 7 #10 bars for the bottom reinforcement as shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.7. The column overstrength moment-axial load curve is shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8. Design the reinforcement details for the beam-column joint.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.7 Properties for Example Design**

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8 Column Overstrength Interaction Diagram**

Solution:

The axial load for the column = 520 kips.

From Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8, M⁰ = 1562.6 k-ft.

From eq. (1): $V_{jh}={\frac {M^{0}}{h_{b}}}={\frac {1562.6\times 12}{43}}$ = 436.07 kips

From eq. (3): $b_{je}={\sqrt {2}}D=50.9\ in.>b_{b}=45\ in.;\ Use\ b_{je}=b_{b}$ = 45 in.

From eq. (2): $v_{jh}={\frac {V_{jh}}{b_{je}h_{c}}}={\frac {436.07}{45(36)}}$ = 269.18 psi.

Vertical Axial Stress:

From eq. (6):

f_{v}={\frac {P_{c}}{b_{je}(h_{c}+h_{b})}}={\frac {520}{45(36+43)}}

= 146.27 psi.

Horizontal Stress:

f_h = 0 psi.

From eq. (7):

$p_{c}={\frac {f_{v}+f_{h}}{2}}+{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {f_{v}-f_{h}}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+v_{jh}^{2}}}={\frac {146.27+0}{2}}+{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {146.27-0}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+269.18^{2}}}$

p_c = 352.07 psi ≤ 0.3(3000 psi) = 900 psi O.K.

From eq. (8):

$p_{t}={\frac {f_{v}+f_{h}}{2}}-{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {f_{v}-f_{h}}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+v_{jh}^{2}}}={\frac {146.27+0}{2}}-{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {146.27-0}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+269.18^{2}}}$

p_t = -205.80 psi ≥ 3.5 3000 = 191.7 psi Not O.K.

Since p_t is greater than $3.5{\sqrt {f'_{c}}}$ , special joint reinforcement based on eqs. (9) through (14) are needed.

Check if moment capacity of the beam is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column.

Neglect the effect of the compression steel (conservative).

Compare moment capacity of beam versus overstrength moment capacity of the column:

1669.39 k-ft. > 1562.60 k-ft.

Moment capacity of beam is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column. O.K.

Design of reinforcement for the beam-column joint

- Vertical reinforcement should be placed throughout a distance of h_b/2 from the column face on each side of the column.

From eq.(9):

A_{jv}=0.125A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yv}}}

A_sc = 15.70 in²

f_{yc}^{0}

= 1.1f = 66 ksi.

f_yv = 60 ksi.

A_jv = 0.125 (15.70) 66 / 60 = 2.16 in²

- Reinforcement within the joint confines:

From eq. (10):

A_{vi}=0.0625A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yv}}}

= 0.0625 (15.70) 66 / 60 = 1.08 in²

- Additional bottom of beam longitudinal reinforcement:

From eq. (11):

A_{sb}=0.0625A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yb}}}

= 0.0625 (15.70) 66 / 60 = 1.08 in²

This reinforcement must be developed at a distance h_b/2 away from the face of the column.

- Hoop Reinforcement:

From eq. (13):

\rho _{s}={\frac {0.3A_{sc}f_{yc}^{\circ }}{L_{a}^{2}f_{yh}}}

L_a = 40 in.

f_yh = 60 ksi

\rho _{s}={\frac {0.3(15.70)(66)}{40^{2}(60)}}

\rho _{s,min}={\frac {3.5{\sqrt {3000}}}{60000}}=0.003195\rho _{s}>\rho _{s,min}

∴use ρs

use #4 hoop reinforcement

A_s = 0.1963 in²

D’ = 36 – 2(2) – 4/8 = 31.5 in.

ρ_s = 0.003238

From eq. (15):

S={\frac {4A_{s}}{D'\rho _{s}}}={\frac {4(0.1963)}{31.5(0.003238)}}

= 7.70” spacing > 3” max. from Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.4. Therefore, Use S = 3”

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.9 Summary of “T-Joint” Reinforcement**

Principal Tension and Compression Stresses in Column-Footing Joints

Column – Footing joints are essentially the same as inverted beam-column T joints. Eqs. (1) through (8) are applicable to column-footing joints except the beam height, h_b, shall be changed to the footing height, h_f.

Design of Reinforcement for Column-Footing Joint

The design of the reinforcement for column-footing joints is similar to that for beam-column T joint. From a joint performance viewpoint, it is desirable to bend the column bars inward toward the joint by using 90° hook bars, but this will cause undue congestion. Bending column bars away from the joint will increase the diagonal tension stress within the joint region. However, it makes a stable platform for supporting the column cage and prevents congestion. When the column reinforcement is bent outward, eqs. (9) through (14) shall be applied. Since the column inelastic action may develop in directions other than parallel to one of the principal axes of the footing, the amount of vertical reinforcement in eq. (9) shall be placed in each of the four quadrant areas outside the joint. In other words, a total vertical stirrup area of:

A_{jv}=0.5A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yv}}}

(16)

shall be placed around the column.

Extra top reinforcement in the footing is also required in accordance with eq. (11). This reinforcement should pass through the column reinforcement or be placed as close as possible to the sides of the column and extend a distance of not less than l = 0.5*D + L_d, where L_d is the bar development length, beyond the face on both sides of the column.

Example 751.9.3.1.7.2: A column is subjected to an axial load (due to dead and seismic loads) of 520 kips. The column diameter is 36 in. with 20 #8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement. All column reinforcement is bent outward into the footing away from the joint. The footing depth is 39 inches. The top and bottom reinforcement for the footing is shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.10, below. Design the reinforcement details for the column-footing joint.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.10 Details of Footing Reinforcement for Example 751.9.3.1.7.2**

Solution:

The axial load for the column = 520 kips.

From Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8 in Example 751.9.3.1.7.1, M⁰ = 1562.6 k-ft.

From eq.(1): $V_{jh}={\frac {M^{0}}{h_{f}}}={\frac {1562.6(12)}{39}}$ = 480.8 kips

From eq. (3): $b_{je}={\sqrt {2}}D={\sqrt {2}}\times 36''=50.9''$

From eq. (2): $v_{jh}={\frac {V_{jh}}{b_{je}h_{c}}}={\frac {480.8}{50.9(36)}}$ =262.39 psi.

Vertical Axial Stress:

From eq. (6):

f_{v}={\frac {P_{c}}{b_{je}(h_{c}+h_{b})}}={\frac {520}{50.9(36+39)}}

= 136.21psi.

Horizontal Axial Stress:

f_h = 0 psi.

Principal Stresses:

From eq. (7): $p_{c}={\frac {f_{c}+f_{h}}{2}}+{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {f_{v}-f_{h}}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+v_{jh}^{2}}}={\frac {136.21+0}{2}}+{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {136.21-0}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+262.39^{2}}}$

= 339.19 psi. ≤ 0.3(3000psi.) = 900 psi. O.K.

From eq. (8): $p_{t}={\frac {f_{v}+f_{h}}{2}}-{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {f_{v}-f_{h}}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+v_{jh}^{2}}}={\frac {136.21+0}{2}}-{\sqrt {{\Big (}{\frac {136.21-0}{2}}{\Big )}^{2}+262.39^{2}}}$

= -202.98 psi. > 3.5

{\sqrt {3000}}

= 191.7 psi. Not O.K.

Since p_t is greater than allowed, special joint reinforcement based on eqs. (9)through (14) are needed.

Check moment capacity

Check the moment capacity of footing in the long direction to see if it is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column.

Neglect the effect of the compression reinforcement.

Since C_c = T

a={\frac {9.42(60,000)}{0.85(108)(3000)}}

= 2.0523"

M_n = A_s(f_y)(d - a/2)

= 9.42(60)(35-(2.0523/2))

= 1600.17 k-ft.

Compare moment capacity of footing overstrength moment capacity of the column:

1600.17 k-ft > 1562.60 k-ft.

Moment capacity of the footing is greater than the overstrength moment of capacity of the column. O.K.

Check the moment capacity of the footing in the short direction to see if it is greater than the overstrength moment capacity of the column.

Neglect the effect of the compression reinforcement.

Since C_c = T

a={\frac {9.43(60,000)}{0.85(168)(3000)}}

= 1.3207"

M_n = A_s(f_y)(d - a/2)

= 9.43(60)(35-(1.3207/2))

= 1619.11 k-ft.

Compare moment capacity of footing overstrength moment capacity of the column:

1619.11 k-ft > 1562.60 k-ft.

Moment capacity of the footing is greater than the overstrength moment of capacity of the column. O.K.

Design of reinforcement for the column-footing joint

- Vertical reinforcement should be placed throughout a distance of h_f/2 from the column face on each side of the column.

From eq. (16):

A_{jv}=0.5A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yv}}}

A_sc = 15.71 in²

f_{yc}^{0}

= 1.1 f_y = 66 ksi.

f_yv = 60 ksi.

A_jv = 0.5 (15.71) (66 / 60) = 8.641 in²

- Reinforcement within the joint confines:

From eqs. (9),(10) & (16):

A_{vi}=0.25A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yf}}}

= 0.25 (15.71)(66/60) = 4.320 in²

- Additional top of footing longitudinal reinforcement:

A_{sb}=0.0625A_{sc}{\frac {f_{yc}^{0}}{f_{yf}}}

= 0.0625 (15.70)(66 / 60) = 1.08 in²

This reinforcement must be developed at a distance h_b/2 away from the face of the column and must be placed so that the reinforcement goes through the column reinforcement. A_sb is required in both directions in the footing.

- Hoop Reinforcement:

From eq. (13):

\rho _{s}={\frac {0.3A_{sc}f_{yc}^{\circ }}{L_{a}^{2}f_{yh}}}

L_a = 35 in.

f_yh = 60 ksi

\rho _{s}={\frac {0.3(15.71)(66)}{35^{2}(60)}}

= 0.004232

\rho _{s,min}={\frac {3.5{\sqrt {3000}}}{60000}}

= 0.003195

ρs > ρ_{s, min} ∴use ρ_s

Use #5 hoop reinforcement

A_s = 0.3068

D’ = 36 - 2(2) - 5/8” = 31.375”

ρ_s = 0.004232

From eq. (15):

S={\frac {4A_{S}}{D'\rho _{s}}}={\frac {4(0.3068)}{31.375(0.004232)}}

= 9.24"

Use 9” Spacing

Note: By adding 3 in. to footing depth in this example problem, the principal tensile stress in the joint would have been less than the maximum allowed tensile stress, thus eliminating the need for the special joint reinforcement other than the minimum required reinforcement. However, the practice of increasing footing depth to eliminate the need for the special joint reinforcement should be limited to increasing the footing depth a maximum of 6 inches.

**Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.11 Summary of Column-Footing Joint Reinforcement**

751.9.3.1.8 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic B, C and D

For anchorage of piles for seismic categories B, C and D, see EPG 751.36.4 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic Categories B, C and D.

751.9.3.2 Abutment Component Design

After Iterative Abutment Design has shown that abutment forces and displacements are acceptable, and after connection design is completed, the abutment components may be designed.

Wings (Integral OR Non-Integral Abutments)

1) Design the wing thickness for the applied shear on the wing. The design section is where the corner brace meets the inside edge of the wing. Use φ = 1.0 for shear. It is sometimes satisfactory to treat wing walls as fuse elements (i.e., broken off elements). This is mainly for integral abutment on very wide structures where large forces are drawn to the abutment. In this case, a second analysis with reduced stiffness in the transverse direction is required. Divide the wing up into two sections of f'c = 3 ksi and f'c = 4 ksi. Soil pressure acts below the bottom of the approach slab. See EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair.

2) Design the flexural steel in the inside face of the wing (minimum #6 - H - bars @ 8" cts.) for the applied wing moment. Moment = (wing Area)*(soil pressure)*(arm from edge of corner brace to c.g. of wing area). The design section is where the corner brace meets the inside edge of the wing. Use φ = 1.0 for flexure. Divide the wing up into two sections of f'c = 3 ksi and f'c = 4 ksi. Soil pressure acts below the bottom of the approach slab. Position the wing reinforcement so that it does not interfere with girders or piles. The top of intermediate wings shall clear the bottom of the approach slab by a minimum of 3". See EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair.

Non-Integral Abutments

3) For non-integral abutments, check the stability under application of active soil pressure. Find the Mononobe-Okabe (combined seismic and nonseismic) pressure and the Rankine (non-seismic) pressure. For the stability and reinforcement computations for non-integral Abutment Design, the height of the soil force resultant could be obtained by assuming that the non-seismic resultant force by Rankine theory acts at H/3 from the bottom of the backwall, while the seismic resultant force should be taken to act at a height of 0.6H. H is defined as the height of the backwall. See AASHTO Div. I-A Commentary for a description of Mononobe-Okabe active seismic soil pressure computations.

4) Design non-integral bent backwalls for shear due to soil pressure on the fill face of the backwall. The design section is at the base of the backwall, just above the beam. Use φ = 0.85 for shear, as in AASHTO 8.16.6.

5) Design non-integral bent backwalls for flexure due to soil pressure on the cantilevered backwall. The design section is at the base of the backwall, just above the beam. Use φ = 0.90 for flexure in AASHTO 8.16.3.

6) Design the backwall for flexure with the restrainers engaged (in tension) on the cantilevered backwall. In general, the soil pressure on the backwall can be neglected because it will be tensile when the restrainers are in tension, due to the separating motion of the superstructure. The design section is at the base of the backwall, just above the beam. Use φ = 0.90 for flexure in AASHTO 8.16.3.

7) Design the thickness of the backwall when restrainer anchor plates are present. For two-way shear (AASHTO 8.16.6), the design section is a rectangle surrounding the anchor plate. The design of anchor studs for restrainer anchor plates is described in EPG 751.9.3.1.3.

Deadman Anchors

8) Design deadman anchors, if present, as in EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair.

751.9.3.3 Intermediate Bent Design

751.9.3.3.1 Column/Footing Intermediate Bents

Analysis

1) From dynamic analysis, determine seismic (EQ) force and moment demands at top and bottom of columns. These full elastic (R=1) forces assume elastic response under seismic loads.

2) Determine dead load demands (DL) at top and bottom of columns.

3) Calculate magnified moment due to full elastic, $M_{FE}=M_{DL}+{\frac {M_{eq}}{R=1}}$ , and modified elastic, $M_{ME}=M_{DL}+{\frac {M_{eq}}{R=5}}$ , moments (including minimum moment from eccentricity) at top and bottom of columns. Second-order effects shall also be considered.

Elastic Design, Without Plastic Hinging

4) Check the column (the size and reinforcement required for Groups I-VI is the minimum size column) using the full elastic (R=1) moments from Step (3) and φ = 0.75 to 0.9, as per AASHTO 8.16.1.2. Calculate 8 cases at 8 axial loads (P3max, P3min, P4max, P4min, at both top and bottom of each column):

For LC 1.0*L + 0.3*T: a) P3max = DL + EQ, b) P3min = DL - EQ

For LC 0.3*L + 1.0*T: a) P4max = DL + EQ, b) P4min = DL - EQ

If the column requires only a few bars to be designed elastically, then add a few bars rather than design the column for plastic hinging.

If UP/AP ≥ 1.0 (Ultimate moment over Applied resultant moment), then skip to Step (7) for no plastic hinging. Else, if UP/AP < 1.0, then perform Steps (5) and (6) first, considering plastic hinging.

Plastic Design, With Hinging

5) If UP/AP < 1.0 in Step (4), then determine the column size and reinforcement required for modified elastic (R=5) moments using φ = 0.5 to 0.9 as per AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 7.6.2(B). The column design required for Groups I-VI loads is the minimum size. Generate the column P-M interaction capacity curve. Plot the 8 combinations of axial and modified elastic moment on the same graph. If all the points lie within the curve, then the design is sufficient. If not, add bars and re-plot the curve until all points barely lie within the curve.

6) Determine the overstrength (φ = 1.3) plastic moment capacities of the column sized in step (5) as per AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 7.2.2. Use any non-linear push-over analysis program to determine the column overstrength moment, 1.3M_p, at the bent failure mechanism stage. If a non-linear pushover analysis program is not available, any static analysis program can be used by designating the hinging locations at top and/or bottom of column, use a joint release, then apply the overstrength plastic moment as a joint load.

Column Shear

7) Check column shear reinforcement (spirals) as required in AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 6.6.2 & 7.6.2, which specifies the required reinforcement ratio.

$\rho _{s}={\frac {A_{s}\pi (D_{c}-d_{b})}{A_{c}(s)}}$ = ratio of volume of provided spiral reinforcement to total volume of concrete core, no units

A_s= cross-sectional area of one leg of spiral, sq. in.

D_c= diameter of spiral, out-to-out, inches

d_b= bar diameter of spiral, inches

A_c= area of core, out-to-out of spirals, sq. in.

s = spiral pitch or spacing, inches

For computation of shear demand, consider the possibility that hinging could occur between the top of the footing and the mud line, instead of at the column/footing junction. This situation could occur on footings with large overburdens and soils with high SPT blow counts, which could cause a shorter effective column length and a larger column shear demand.

Footing Design

8) Design footings under Load Factor Design with φ = 0.90 for flexure and φ= 0.85 for shear, as per AASHTO 8.16.1.2.

Compare the moments from steps (4) and (6). If step (4) moments are lesser, then size the footings for the full elastic loads from step (4).

If step (6) moments are lesser, then size the footings for the overstrength plastic column moment capacities (M_op) from step (6) in all directions of possible hinging: a) In-plane hinging at its corresponding axial load, b) Outof-plane hinging at its corresponding axial load

For spread footing pressure, keep resultants in the middle 2/3 of the footing.
For the footing shear check, use Load Factor Design, with φ = 0.85.
For footing reinforcement design, use Load Factor Design, with φ = 0.90. For spread footings, design top steel for weight of footing + weight of soil. For pile footings, design the top of footing reinforcement for weight of footing + weight of soil + seismic pile

tension. Check pile requirements in AASHTO Division I-A, Section 6.4.2 or 7.4.2.

Beam Design

9) Design beams under Load Factor Design, with φ = 0.90 for flexure and φ = 0.85 for shear, as per AASHTO 8.16.1.2.

If the column design was OK (no hinging) under full elastic loads from Step (4), then consider dead loads and the seismic in-plane top-of-column shears and axial loads (for P-Δ effects) for the beam design.

If the column design was controlled by modified elastic loads (with plastic hinging) from Step (5), then consider dead loads and the overstrength (φ = 1.3) plastic moments from Step (6) for the beam design. In this case, designate the hinging location as a support, use

a joint release, then apply the overstrength plastic moment as a joint load.

For either elastic or plastic loads, design the beam for negative moments and for shear at faces of equivalent square columns, and design for maximum positive moments in between columns.

T-Joint Connection Design

10) Check the beam/column T-joint stresses and the column/footing T-joint stresses as described in EPG 751.9.3.1.7.

751.9.3.3.2 Pile Cap Intermediate Bents

Definitions of Terms

In AASHTO Div. I-A Sections 6 & 7, some AASHTO terms are different from MoDOT terms. AASHTO's "pile caps" are caps of pile footings or beam caps of pile bents, and are considered "foundations". AASHTO's "pile bents" are what MoDOT calls pile cap intermediate bents, and piles on pile bents are treated as columns, not as "foundations". MoDOT's CIP piles are considered in AASHTO both as "concrete-filled pipe piles" and as "Cast-in-Place concrete piles" with the shell considered as both longitudinal reinforcement and as shear reinforcement.

Additional Information

AASHTO LRFD Specs., 5.10.11.4.1c&d&e, 5.13.4.5, 5.13.4.6

AASHTO Division I, 4.5.17.4

For drilled shafts and piles, a plastic hinge developed above the ground line is allowed for trestle piles (at intermediate bents), but not for foundation piles (below the ground line). "Trestle" and "foundation" piles are as defined in EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair.

Analysis of Bent

1) Model the bent according to EPG 751.9.2.8.1 or EPG 751.9.2.8.2.

2) From dynamic analysis, determine seismic (EQ) axial, moment and shear force demands of the piles. These full elastic (R=1) forces assume elastic response under seismic loads.

3) Determine dead load (DL) axial, moment and shear force demands of the piles.

Elastic Design, Without Hinging

4) The minimum pile size and reinforcement is that which was required for Groups I-VI. Check the minimum pile size using the full elastic (R=1) moments from Step (2) and φ = 0.75 to 0.9, as per AASHTO 8.16.1.2. Analyze the pile for axial / moment (P-M) interaction capacity for CIP piles. Steel piles are analyzed for buckling and for combined stresses as described in the AASHTO references.

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A,7.5.2 & AASHTO Div. I, 10.36 & 10.54

Analyze the pile at 4 axial loads (P3max, P3min, P4max, and P4min):

For LC 1.0*L + 0.3*T: a) P3max = DL + EQ, b) P3min = DL - EQ

For LC 0.3*L + 1.0*T: a) P4max = DL + EQ, b) P4min = DL - EQ

The shell of CIP piles provides shear reinforcement and longitudinal flexural reinforcement (see equations below). See EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair for the design thickness of the shell.

If UP/AP ≥ 1.0, or if UP/AP ≥ 1.0 by adding only a few bars, then skip to Step (8) for no hinging. Else, if UP/AP < 1.0 or if it takes too many added bars to increase UP/AP to more than 1.0, then perform Steps (5) or (6) first, considering plastic hinging.

Plastic Design, With Hinging

5) If UP/AP < 1.0 for pile above the ground line in Step (4), then determine the pile size and reinforcement required for modified elastic (R=3 for vertical piles only and R=2 for one or more battered piles) moments using φ = 0.5 to 0.9 as described in AASHTO Div. IA, Section 7.6.2(B). The pile design required for Groups I-VI loads should be the minimum design. Generate the pile P-M interaction curve. For steel HP piles, combined stresses are computed as described in EPG 751.9.2.10.2. Plot the 4 points of axial and modified elastic moment on the same graph. If all the points lie within the curve, then the design is sufficient. If not, add bars or use a larger pile size, and re-plot the capacity curve until all points barely lie within the curve. Use R=1 to design pile under the ground line.

6) If a non-linear push-over analysis program is available, determine the plastic hinge locations based on the horizontal bent displacements from the seismic analysis. If any plastic hinges occurred below the ground line, redesign the bent by increasing the total number of pile or pile size, etc.

7) The end regions of concrete piles should be reinforced for plastic hinging. Refer to Fig. 751.9.3.3.2 for the following terms.

A = the greater of (D/2 or 15")

B = the greater of (2*D or H/6 or 24")

D = the pile diameter, in inches

G = A + B = the length of the upper plastic hinging region, in inches

H = the pile clear height, from bottom of beam to mud line, inches

**Fig. 751.9.3.3.2 C.I.P. Pile Plastic Hinge Region**

AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.6.2(D) specifies the reinforcement ratio required, and the provided reinforcement ratio is given by:

Shells of CIP Piles:

Provided

\rho ={\frac {4t}{D}}

= the ratio of volume of reinforcement provided by

the shell to the total volume of the concrete core, no units.

Where: t = Shell thickness

D = Core Diameter

Spirals:

Provided

\rho _{s}={\frac {A_{s}\pi (D_{c}-d_{b})}{A_{c}(s)}}

= the ratio of volume of reinforcement provided by the spiral to the total volume of the concrete core, no units.

A_{s}={\frac {\pi (D_{c})^{2}}{4}}

= cross-sectional area of one leg of spiral, sq. in.

Where: D_C= diameter of spiral, out-to-out, inches

d_b= bar diameter of spiral, inches

A_c= area of core, out-to-out of spirals, sq. in.

s = spiral pitch or spacing, inches

Steel piles shall be provided with shear connector angles for anchorage.

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.4.2(C) & Bridge Manual Section 3.72, 4.6 & 5.5

Beam Design

8) Design beams under Load Factor Design, with φ = 0.90. If the pile design was OK (no hinging) under full elastic loads from Step (4), then consider dead loads and the seismic in-plane top-of-column shears and axial loads (for P-Δ effects) for the beam design. If the column design was controlled by modified elastic loads (hinging) from Steps (5) or (6), then apply dead loads and the overstrength (φ = 1.3) plastic moments from Steps (5) or (6). For either elastic or plastic loads, design the beam for the negative moments at faces of equivalent square piles and for the maximum positive moments in between piles. Check shear in the beam at the faces of the equivalent square piles. Minimum beam width shall be as per EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair, but should also provide 6 in. concrete cover outside piles as per AASHTO Div. I Section 4.5.15.2. Note that for 20 in. and 24 in. CIP piles, the standard 30 in. integral end bent beam width must be enlarged to 32 in. and 36 in., respectively.

T-Joint Connection Design

9) Check the beam/pile T-joint stresses as described in EPG 751.3.1.7.

751.9.3.3.3 Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents

Drilled shafts (also called "Pedestal Piles") are described in EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair. In the following discussion, the portion of the pedestal pile above ground will be referred to as the "column". The portion of the pedestal pile below ground will be referred to as the "shaft". Most drilled shafts have a shaft diameter larger than the column diameter, as shown below in Fig. 751.9.3.3.3. Drilled shafts are drilled or augered in, whereas piles are driven into place.

**Fig. 751.9.3.3.3 Drilled Shaft (Pedestal Pile) Int. Bent**

The following discussion of drilled shafts assumes that the pile diameter is larger than the column diameter. The column portion is allowed to plastic hinge, but the shaft portion is not allowed to hinge.

Sometimes, there is an enlarged bell at the bottom when required for bearing pressure. EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Noon-LRFD) allows this bell only in SPC A, but unusual situations might require a bell in other Seismic Performance Categories. If a bell is required in SPC B, C or D, then reinforcement should be provided around the outside of the bell, in order to prevent local crushing of the bell.

Drilled shafts with no bell are socketed into rock a minimum distance of 1.5 times the shaft diameter and are considered fixed at the rock line. Drilled shafts with a bell are considered pinned at the rock line.

Analysis of Bent

1) Model the bent according to Sections 6.1.2.8.1 and 6.1.2.8.2.

2) From the dynamic analysis, determine seismic (EQ) axial, moment and shear force demands at "top of column" (near the beam/column joint) and at "bottom of column" (near the column/shaft joint). These full elastic (R=1) forces assume elastic response under seismic loads.

3) Determine dead load (DL) axial, moment and shear force demands at "top of column" and at "bottom of column".

4) Plastic hinging of the column portion of a drilled shaft is allowed for trestle piles (intermediate bents), but not for foundation piles (end bents), as defined in EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair. The shaft portion of a drilled shaft is considered a "foundation" in AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.1(B), so plastic hinging of the shaft portion of a drilled shaft is not allowed. Calculate the full elastic ${\big [}M_{FE}=M_{DL}={\frac {M_{EQ}}{(R=1)}}{\big ]}$ moments at all tenth-points of the entire column & shaft, and calculate the modified elastic ${\big [}M_{ME}=M_{DL}={\frac {M_{EQ}}{(R=5)}}{\big ]}$ moments at tenth-points of the column portion.

Column Design, Without Hinging

5) Check the column portion and shaft portion (the minimum size and reinforcement is that which was required for Groups I-VI) using the full elastic (R=1) moments from Step 5 and φ = 0.75 to 0.9, as per AASHTO 8.16.1.2. Analyze the column and shaft for axial / moment (P-M) interaction capacity. Analyze the column at 8 axial loads (P3max, P3min, P4max, and P4min, top and bottom):

For LC 1.0*L + 0.3*T, a) P3max = DL + EQ, b) P3min = DL - EQ

For LC 0.3*L + 1.0*T, a) P4max = DL + EQ, b) P4min = DL - EQ

If UP/AP ≥ 1.0 or if UP/AP ≥ 1.0 by adding only a few bars, then skip to Step (8) for no hinging. Else, if UP/AP < 1.0 or if too many bars must be added, then perform Steps (6) and (7) first, for column plastic hinging.

Plastic Column Design, With Hinging

6) If UP/AP < 1.0 in Step (4), then the column portion is designed for modified elastic moments (R=5), and the shaft portion is designed as a foundation (R=1). Determine the column size and reinforcement required for modified elastic (R=5) moments using φ = 0.5 to 0.9 as described in AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 7.6.2(B), with the column design required for Groups I-VI loads as the minimum. Generate the column P-M interaction curve for drilled shafts. Plot the combinations (as in Step (5) above) of axial and modified elastic moment on the same graph for all 8 points on the column portion. If all the points lie within the curve, then the column design is sufficient. If not, add bars and re-plot the capacity curve until all points barely lie within the curve.

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.2(B), Step 2

7) The end regions of columns should be reinforced for plastic hinging. The end region length at either end of the column is the larger of (two times the column diameter, one-sixth of the clear height of the column, and 24 inches). The spiral at the bottom end of the column shall continue into the shaft for a distance equal to the greater of (half the column diameter or 15 inches).

Design column shear reinforcement (spirals) for the required reinforcement ratio described in the reference below.

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 7.4.2 & 7.6.2

For the provided reinforcement ratio of spirals:

Provided

\rho _{s}={\frac {A_{s}\pi (D_{c}-d_{b})}{A_{c}(s)}}

= the ratio of volume of provided spiral reinforcement to total volume of concrete core, no units.

Where:

A_s= cross-sectional area of one leg of spiral, sq. in.

D_c= diameter of spiral, out-to-out, inches

d_b= bar diameter of spiral, inches

A_c= area of core, out-to-out of spirals, sq. in.

s = spiral pitch or spacing, inches

Shaft Design

8) The design moments for the shaft shall be the lesser of the full elastic moments (R=1) from Step (5) and the overstrength plastic moment capacity (φ = 1.3) of the column sized in step (6).

Additional Information

AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 7.2.1(B) & 7.2.2 & 7.2.6

Beam Design

9) Design the beam under Load Factor Design, with a flexural φ = 0.90 and a shear φ = 0.85. If the column design was OK (no hinging) under full elastic loads from Step (5), then apply dead loads and the seismic in-plane top-of-column shears and axial loads for the beam design. If the column design was controlled by modified elastic loads (hinging) from Step (6), then apply dead loads and the overstrength (φ = 1.3) plastic moments from Step (6). For either elastic or plastic loads, design the beam for the negative moments at faces of equivalent square columns and for the maximum positive moments in between columns. Check shear in beams according to hinging or no hinging.

T-Joint Connection Design

10) Check the beam/column T-joint stresses as described in EPG 751.9.3.1.7.

751.9.3.3.4 Integral Intermediate Bents

The difference between a standard intermediate bent and an integral intermediate bent is shown in Fig. 751.9.3.3.4.

**Fig. 751.9.3.3.4 Difference Between Standard and Integral Diaphragms**

On standard intermediate bents, the beam stirrups are completely contained within the beam, and a line of dowels creates only a "pinned" connection with the diaphragm and superstructure. Due to the roofing felt and the dowels, the "pinned" connection theoretically does not transfer moments between the superstructure and the substructure. A standard (non-integral) intermediate bent therefore exhibits single-curvature bending out of the plane of the bent. In-plane bending is double-curvature due to the moment connections between beam and columns or between beam and piles.

On an integral intermediate bent (non-standard), the beam stirrups extend up into the diaphragm (similar to standard integral end bents), making a "fixed" connection which can transfer moments between the superstructure and the substructure. This fixed connection makes the integral intermediate bent exhibit double-curvature bending out of the plane of the bent. In-plane bending is also double-curvature due to the moment connections between beam and columns or beam and piles.

When to Use Integral Intermediate Bents

1) When (KL)/R > 100 for piles or drilled shafts and a larger diameter member is not acceptable. This situation can be improved by making the intermediate bent integral, causing double-curvature out-of-plane bending (K = 1.2) instead of single-curvature out-of-plane bending (K = 2.0), thus reducing (KL)/R.

2) When the percentage of the total seismic force at the end bents is so high that other remedial actions are ineffective (see EPG 751.9.2.10). This situation can be improved by making the intermediate bents integral, which makes them stiffer and helps to distribute some of the excessive force from the end bents to the intermediate bents.

3) Sometimes, making the bent integral can help to stiffen up the entire bridge, decrease the period, and may improve the situation.

751.9.3.4 Cross Frame Analysis and Design

Recent earthquakes indicate that many steel bridges have suffered cross frame damage. Cross frames provide an important load path for the seismic force acting on slab-on-girder steel bridges. Cross frames shall be able to transmit all lateral forces from the superstructure to the bearings. The lateral seismic force at an individual bent calculated from the seismic analysis shall be proportionally distributed to the individual cross frames over the bent.

For details of cross frames, see EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair. The components of cross frames including top and bottom chords and diagonal angle members shall be designed based on allowable stress design with consideration of the eccentric axial load and buckling stresses. Welding sizes at gusset plate connection shall also be designed for the seismic load. Cross frames shall remain elastic when subjected to the seismic force.

The following cross frame model may be used for the structural analysis of cross frames:

**Fig. 751.9.3.4.1 Cross Frame Model (S.M. Zahrai & M. Bruneau, 1999)**

Study (S.M. Zahrai and M. Bruneau, 1999) has shown that bearing stiffeners provide the main stiffness for girders; in other words, using a longer length of girder (greater than 20 inches) in the model in Fig. 751.9.3.4.1 results in no significant difference in model stiffness. Based on the cross frame model in Fig. 751.9.3.4.1, the following structural analysis model can be considered:

**Fig. 751.9.3.4.2 Structural Model for Cross Frames**

In Fig. 751.9.3.4.2, I_y = moment of inertia of the stiffened stub girder (mainly due to the bearing stiffeners) in the lateral direction (i.e. y-y direction). The above model assumes full fixity at the concrete deck and zero fixity at the flexible bearings such as elastomeric bearings.

751.9.4 References

Cheney, R.S., and Chassie, R.G. (1982), “Soils and Foundation Workshop Manual,” U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration.

FHWA, “ Seismic Retrofitting Manual for Highway Bridges,” FHWA-RD-94-052, May 1995.

Kavazanjian, E. Jr., Matasovic, N., Hadj-Hamou, T., and Sabatini, P.J., “Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 3, Design Guidance: Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering for Highways,” Volume 1- Design Principles, FHWASA- 97-076, 1997.

Lam, I.P., Kapnskan, M., and Chandhuri, D., “Modeling of Pile Footings and Drilled Shafts for Seismic Design,” MCEER Report 98-0018, 1998.

Lam, I.P., and Martin, G.R., “Seismic Design of Highway Bridge Foundations,” Federal Highway Adminstration Report # RD-86-101, 102, 103, 1986.

Lambe, T.W., and Whitman, R.V. (1969), Soil Mechanics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York.

Meyerhof, G.G.(1976), “Bearing Capacity and Settlement of Pile Foundations,” Journal of Geotechnical Engineering Division, ASCE, Volume 102, No. GT3, Proc. Paper 11962.

NHI Course No. 13063, “Seismic Bridge Design Applications,” Session 6, 1996.

Norlund, R.L. (1963), “Bearing Capacity of Piles in Cohesionless Soils,” ASCE, SM&F Journal SM-3.

Norlund, R.L. (1979), “Point Bearing and Shaft Friction of Piles in Sand,” 5th Annual Fundamentals of Deep Foundation Design, University of Missouri-Rolla.

Priestley, M.J.N., and Seible, F., (1996) Seismic Design and Retrofit of Bridges, John Wiley and Sons.

Thurman, A.G. (1964), “Computed Load Capacity and Movement of Friction and End-Bearing Piles Embedded in Uniform Stratified Soil,” Ph.D. Thesis, Carnegie Institute of Technology.

Tomlinson, M.J. (1985), “Foundation Design and Construction,” Longman Scientific and Technical, Essex, England.

United States Steel (1965), Highway Structures Design Handbook, Volume 1, Chapter 10.

Urzua, A. (1993), SPILE: A Microcomputer Program for Determining Ultimate Vertical Static Pile Capacity, User’s Manual, FHWA-SA-92-044.

Wang, S.C., and Reese, L.C. (1993), COM624P- Laterally Loaded Pile Analysis Program for the Microcomputer, FHWA-SA-91-048.

Wilson, J.C. (1988), Stiffness of Non-Skew Monlithic Bridge Abutments for Seismic Analysis, Journal of Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics Vol. 16.

Zahrai, S.M., and Bruneau, M. (1999) Ductile End-Diaphragms for Seismic Retrofit of Slab-on-Girder Steel Bridges, Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Volume 125, No. 1.

@@ Line 1: / Line 1: @@
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#ffddcc" width="220px" align="right"
+<div style="float: right; margin-left: 30px; margin-bottom: 30px;">__TOC__</div>
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.pdf|'''Printable Version of April 2010 LFD Seismic Info''']]
+==751.9.1 Seismic Analysis and Design Specifications==
-|-
+<div style="float: left; margin-top: 5px; margin: 15px; width:255px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
-|align="left"|EPG 751.9 LFD Seismic presents the very latest information, but this pdf file may be helpful for those wanting to easily print the LFD seismic information as it was in April 2010.
+'''<u><center>Additional Information</center></u>'''
-|}
+* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]
-==751.9.1 Seismic Analysis & Design Specifications==
+</div>
+All new or replacement bridges on the state system shall include seismic design and/or detailing to resist an expected seismic event per the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]. For example, for a bridge in Seismic Design Categories A, B, C or D, complete seismic analysis or seismic detailing only may be determined as per “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]”.
+Missouri is divided into four Seismic Design Categories. Most of the state is SDC A which requires minimal seismic design and/or detailing in accordance with SGS (Seismic Zone 1 of LRFD) and “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]”.  The other seismic design categories will require a greater amount of seismic design and/or detailing.
+For seismic detailing only:
+When A<sub>S</sub> is greater than 0.75 then use A<sub>S</sub> = 0.75 for abutment design where required per “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart]” and [https://www.modot.org/media/47036 SEG 24-01]
+For complete seismic analysis:
+When A<sub>S</sub> is greater than 0.75 then use A<sub>S</sub> = 0.75 at zero second for seismic analysis and response spectrum curve. See [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Example-1_SDC_Response_Spectra.docx Example 1_SDC_Response_Spectra]. The other data points on the response spectrum curve shall not be modified.
+<div style="float: left; margin-top: 5px; margin: 15px; width:255px; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 0.3em; border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; text-align:left;">
+'''<u><center>Additional Information</center></u>'''
+* [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Retrofit_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart]
+</div>
+When existing bridges are identified as needing repairs or maintenance, a decision on whether to include seismic retrofitting in the scope of the project shall be determined per the “[https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Retrofit_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart]”, the extent of the rehabilitation work and the expected life of the bridge after the work. For example, if the bridge needs painting or deck patching, no retrofitting is recommended. However, redecking or widening the bridge indicates that MoDOT is planning to keep the bridge in the state system with an expected life of at least 30 more years. In these instances, the project core team should consider cost effective methods of retrofitting the existing bridge. Superstructure replacement requires a good substructure and the core team shall decide whether there is sufficient seismic capacity. Follow the design procedures for new or replacement bridges in forming logical comparisons and assessing risk in a rational determination of the scope of a superstructure replacement project specific to the substructure. For example, based on SPC and route, retrofit of the substructure could include seismic detailing only or a complete seismic analysis may be required determine sufficient seismic capacity. Economic analysis should be considered as part of the decision to re-use and retrofit, or re-build. Where practical, make end bents integral and eliminate expansion joints.
+Bridge seismic retrofit shall be in accordance with [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Retrofit_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Retrofit Flowchart]. Seismic isolation systems shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design 4th Ed. 2023.
+===751.9.1.1 Applicability of Guidelines and Seismic Design Philosophy===
+SGS 3.1, 3.2, LRFD 3.4 and LRFD C3.4.1
+EPG 751.9 supplements the above documentation for typical bridges in accordance with SGS 3.1. It does not apply to movable bridges, bridges with spans greater than 500 ft., suspension bridges, cable-stayed bridges, truss bridges or arch-type bridges. The State Bridge Engineer shall specify and/or approve appropriate provisions or specifications for non typical bridges. There are special considerations for single-span bridges, temporary bridges and bridges with stage construction.
+Critical and Recovery Bridges are not specifically addressed in SGS specification, SGS 3.1. Operational classification shall be in accordance with SGS 3.1 and SGS 3.2. Bridges shall be designed for the life safety performance objective using at a minimum the limit state of incipient collapse or unacceptable performance for geotechnical failure modes at a targeted risk of approximately 1.5 percent over 75 years in accordance with SGS 3.2 Higher levels of performance, such as the operational objective, may be established and authorized by the bridge owner. Critical and Recovery bridges shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO Guidelines for Performance-Based Seismic Design of Highway Bridges, 1<sup>st</sup> ed.
+The following categories are used throughout EPG:
+::Nonseismic = Bridges requiring a static design only.  Minimal seismic details in accordance with SDC A are still required.
+::Seismic Details = This category refers to SDC A (S<sub>D1</sub> ≥ 0.1), B, C and D bridges that do not require a seismic design, but do require higher levels of seismic detailing.
+::Complete Seismic Analysis = Bridges requiring a full seismic analysis. SDC C or D bridges may be applicable based on the importance of the route.
+Life safety for the design event shall be taken to imply that the bridge has a low probability of collapse but may suffer significant damage, and significant disruption to service is possible. Partial or complete replacement may be required in accordance with SGS 3.2. Hazard to human life should be minimized, and essential bridges should continue to function after an earthquake. Bridges are designed for good ductility and displacement control and are allowed to suffer minor, acceptable damage in order to prevent major, unacceptable damage.
+Note: For seismic design force concepts and guidance, follow the seismic design process (EPG 751.9.1.3 thru 751.9.4) and modify design/details of LFD as necessary to meet SGS and LRFD seismic requirements until LRFD seismic section is created (modified EPG 751.9.1.3 thru 751.9.4).
-Seismic design of bridges shall conform to AASHTO Division I-A, 1996 and Interims thru 1998. (Refer also to the 1998 Commentary for Division I-A.) Seismic retrofitting of existing bridges shall conform to the Seismic Retrofitting Manual for Highway Bridges, FHWA-RD-94-052, May 1995.
+All new or replacement bridges on the state system shall include seismic design and/or detailing to resist an expected seismic event (seismic design category) per the [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Bridge_Seismic_Design_Flowchart.pdf Bridge Seismic Design Flowchart].
-Seismic isolation systems shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 1999.
+:* For a major bridge, the State Bridge Engineer will decide the design as a life safety or critical/essential or recovery bridge in accordance with SGS 3.1, SGS 3.2 and SGS C3.2.
+:* Except for section 7 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SGS) is based on Displacement Based Design. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (LRFD) is based on Force Based Design. For seismic details and design concept use the SGS when information is available otherwise use LRFD. Seismic analysis shall be performed using displacement-based design (for exception see SGS 7).
-===751.9.1.1 Applicability of Guidelines===
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align:center;"
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+! colspan="3" | Seismic Design Category/Seismic Zone by Code
 |-
-|'''Additional Information'''
+| Value of design spectral acceleration</br>coefficient at 1.0 second period,</br>S<sub>D1</sub> SGS 3.4.1 and 3.5
+| <sup>1</sup>AASHTO Guide Specifications</br>for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SGS)</br>SGS table 3.5-1</br>'''Seismic Design Category (SDC)'''
+| <sup>2</sup>AASHTO LRFD</br>Bridge Design Specifications (LRFD)</br>LRFD Table 3.10.6-1</br>'''Seismic Zones'''
 |-
-|AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.1
+ |S<sub>D1</sub> < 0.10
-|}
+| A1
-EPG 751.9 supplements the above documentation and does not apply to culverts, movable bridges, bridges with spans greater than 500 ft., suspension bridges, [[media:756 cable stayed bridge.doc|cable-stayed bridges]], or arch-type bridges. There are special considerations for single-span bridges, temporary bridges and bridges with stage construction.
+|1
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
 |-
-|'''Additional Information'''
+| 0.10 ≤ S<sub>D1</sub> < 0.15
+| A2<sup>3</sup>
+| 1<sup>3</sup>
 |-
-|AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.11 and 3.12
+| 0.15 ≤ S<sub>D1</sub> < 0.30
-|}
+| B
+| 2
-===751.9.1.2 Seismic Design Philosophy===
-Bridges may suffer damage but should have a low probability of collapse. Hazard to human life should be minimized, and essential bridges should continue to function after an earthquake. Bridges are designed for good ductility and displacement control and are allowed to suffer minor, acceptable damage in order to prevent major, unacceptable damage.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
 |-
-|'''Additional Information'''
+| 0.30 ≤ S<sub>D1</sub> < 0.50
+| C
+| 3
 |-
-|AASHTO Div. I-A, 3.6
+| 0.50 ≤ S<sub>D1</sub>
+| D
+| 4
 |}
+<sup>1</sup>SGS is required for seismic design. LRFD is shown because SGS refers to LRFD for support, and understanding the equivalency category and zone may be important. In accordance with SGS, all bridge designs must meet the requirements for SDC A (Seismic Zone 1). Additional seismic details are typically required for higher seismic design categories.
+<sup>2</sup>LRFD inequalities are different. Use SGS as shown.
+<sup>3</sup>Structural member shall be detailed in accordance with SDC B (SGS 8.2) if bridge carry a [https://epg.modot.org/forms/general_files/BR/Preliminary_Seismic_Design_Map.pdf 1st or 2nd priority earthquake emergency route].
+===751.9.1.2===
+(This article is not being used)
 ===751.9.1.3 Seismic Design Force Concepts===
 As shown in Fig. 751.9.1.3.1(a), a two span bridge can be modeled as a single–degree-of-freedom lumped-mass system (Fig. 751.9.1.3.1(b)). For a single degree-of-freedom lumped-mass system, the total elastic seismic design force is equal to
@@ Line 45: / Line 96: @@
 The elastic seismic response coefficient is given by the dimensionless
 formula
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''AASHTO Div. I-A, Equation 3-1'''
@@ Line 110: / Line 161: @@
 ===751.9.1.4 Seismic Performance Category (SPC), Acceleration Coefficient (A)===
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 120: / Line 171: @@
 ===751.9.1.5 Elastic and Plastic Design===
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 129: / Line 180: @@
 absorption characteristics. Plastic behavior is nonlinear, but AASHTO Division I-A allows an approximate analysis procedure using a linear elastic analysis along with the application of a response modification factor (R) to account for the assumed level of ductility and redundancy. This allows the use of linear elastic analysis programs such as SEISAB (or any other seismic
 analysis program). Response modification factors are specified in AASHTO 1-A, Article 3.7. An example of ductility demand is described below:
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 167: / Line 218: @@
 ===751.9.1.7 Directional Load Cases===
 The AASHTO Div. I-A specifications specify two major load cases to provide for combinations of longitudinal and transverse seismic forces:
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 178: / Line 229: @@
 ===751.9.1.8 Group Loading===
 The group loading includes dead load (D), earth pressure (E) and seismic (EQ) loads, and other possible loadings such as buoyancy (B) and stream flow pressure (SF). Thus:
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 189: / Line 240: @@
 ===751.9.1.9 Seismic Performance Category Specifications===
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 225: / Line 276: @@
 '''7) CONNECTION DESIGN [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1 Connection Design|EPG 751.9.3.1]]'''
-::____ Design any required connections such as anchor bolts, dowel rods, restrainers, stud plates, shear blocks, concrete end diaphragms, isolation systems, T-joints, etc. If structural behavior changes as a result of connection design, then revise and repeat any applicable steps listed above.
+::____ Design any required connections such as anchor bolts, dowel bars, restrainers, stud plates, shear blocks, concrete end diaphragms, isolation systems, T-joints, etc. If structural behavior changes as a result of connection design, then revise and repeat any applicable steps listed above.
 '''8) ABUTMENT COMPONENT DESIGN [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.2 Abutment Component Design|EPG 751.9.3.2]]'''
@@ Line 246: / Line 297: @@
 ===751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length===
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 270: / Line 321: @@
 :'''Metric Units'''
 :N(d) = [305 + 2.5*L + 10*H]*(1 + 0.000125 S<sup>2</sup> ), (mm)
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 297: / Line 348: @@
 '''Standard Penetration Test (SPT)'''
-The most common test data reported in cores are Standard Penetration Test(SPT) blowcounts per foot (N). If only SPT data are known, other properties can be estimated using correlation charts. See Table 751.9.2.4.1.2 Soil Property Correlations for correlations of N, φ, c (same as S), γ, E, ν, and other soil properties. Correlations with N blowcounts are fairly reliable for sands, but are less reliable for clays. The SPT blowcounts are given for three 6 in. intervals, and the first datum is thrown out in order to avoid seating errors. The soil shear strength, in KSF, can be estimated as S = N / 10. Hereafter, N represents (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> which represents the standard penetration test blowcounts corrected to 60% of the theoretical free fall energy delivered by the hammer system used to the top of the drill stem and to a overburden stress of 1 ton/ft<sup>2</sup>.
+The most common test data reported in cores are Standard Penetration Test(SPT) blowcounts per foot (N). If only SPT data are known, other properties such as N, φ, c (same as S), γ, E, ν, and other soil properties can be estimated using correlation charts. Correlations with N blowcounts are fairly reliable for sands, but are less reliable for clays. The SPT blowcounts are given for three 6 in. intervals, and the first datum is thrown out in order to avoid seating errors. The soil shear strength, in KSF, can be estimated as S = N / 10. Hereafter, N represents (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> which represents the standard penetration test blowcounts corrected to 60% of the theoretical free fall energy delivered by the hammer system used to the top of the drill stem and to a overburden stress of 1 ton/ft<sup>2</sup>.
+Note: Common soil property correlations are maintained in the Bridge Division, Development Section, prepared by Construction and Materials Division, Geotechnical Section.
 :'''Example:'''
@@ Line 308: / Line 361: @@
 The standardized penetration resistance (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> is based on standardized
 equipment and procedure (E. Kavazanjian, etc., 1997). Other “non-standard” equipment and procedural details can affect the measured penetration resistance, and require correction of the blow counts in order to develop the (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub>. The details of corrections can be found in the reference by E. Kavazanjian, etc., 1997.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''[[media:751.9.2.4.1.1.jpg|Form 751.9.2.4.1.1, Soil Parameter Request Form]]'''
@@ Line 316: / Line 369: @@
 '''Compacted Backfill at Abutments'''
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|[http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0203.pdf Sec. 203.3.4] and [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0206.pdf Sec. 206.4.9]
+|[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=5 Sec. 203.3.4] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=5 Sec. 206.4.9]
 |}
-Backfill at abutments shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density, and it may consist of sands, clays, silts, gravels or a mixture. Call the district and ask what type of borrow soil will be used for compacted fill at abutments. Table 751.9.2.4.1.2 may be used for estimating Young's Modulus (E).
+Backfill at abutments shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density, and it may consist of sands, clays, silts, gravels or a mixture. Call the district and ask what type of borrow soil will be used for compacted fill at abutments. Soil property correlations may be used for estimating Young's Modulus (E).
 '''Ultimate Soil Pressure at Abutments'''
 For integral and non-integral end bents, use 7.7 KSF as the ultimate soil pressure. This is based on CalTrans' recommendations, usage by other state DOTs, and tests performed at the University of California at Davis.
-=====Table 751.9.2.4.1 Soil Property Correlations=====
+====751.9.2.4.2 Concrete Properties====
-In the absence of experimentally-determined soil properties, these values may be used as rough estimates.
+The concrete compression strength, f’c, should be a probable, rather than a minimum. 1.5 f’c shall be used in the seismic analysis. This over the specified strength recognizes the typically conservative mix designs and the natural strength gain with concrete age.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="760px" align="center"
+The flexural rigidity of columns, beam cap and c.i.p. piles should be calculated based on the cracked sections, rather than gross member section. Natural periods should also be based on the cracked sections. The flexural rigidity of the cracked section is defined as the rigidity at which the first steel rebar reaches the yield limit state.
+Figure 751.9.2.4.2 shows the moment of inertia ratio, Ie/Ig, for circular and rectangular columns.
+[[image:751.9.2.4.2.jpg|center|450px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.4.2, Adjustment Factors for Effective Stiffness for Concrete (Priestly et al, 1996)'''</center>]]
+:::::In Fig. 751.9.2.4.2:
+::::::A<sub>g</sub> = gross section area
+::::::A<sub>st</sub> = steel section area
+::::::I<sub>g</sub> = gross moment of inertia
+::::::I<sub>e</sub> = effective moment of inertia of cracked section
+::::::f'c = compressive strength of unconfined concrete
+::::::P = applied axial compressive load
+====751.9.2.4.3 Steel Properties====
+Yield strength of reinforcement should be based on mill certificate or tensile test results if available. If not, a nominal strength of 1.1 times the specified minimum strength should be assumed, resulting in 66 ksi yield strength for grade 60 reinforcement. (Priestly et al,1996; FHWA, 1995)
+===751.9.2.5 Liquifaction===
+'''Conditions for Liquefaction'''
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
-!colspan="13"|Sands, Gravels and Granular Soils
+|'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-!style="background:#BEBEBE"| ||style="background:#BEBEBE"|(N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub>, Blows/ft. !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|<math>\phi</math>, degree !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|S<sub>u</sub>, ksf !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Dr, relative density !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Grain Size !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|E, ksf!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Poisson's ratio, <math>\nu</math> !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Soil type distribution  !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|<math>\gamma</math><sub>dry</sub>(pcf) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|<math>\gamma</math><sub>sat</sub>(pcf) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Wet (below W.T.), Dry (above W.T.) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|K(f)<sup>1</sup>,(pci)
+|Volume II of report #FHWA/RD-86/102, sections 4.2-4.3
-|-
+|}
-|rowspan="2"|Very Loose||rowspan="2"|0 - 5||rowspan="2"|27.00||rowspan="2"|0 - 0.5 ||rowspan="2"|0.10||fine ||100.00||0.25||uniform||88.00||115.00||wet||10
-|-
+When subjected to seismic ground motions, some soils tend to liquefy - that is, to lose most of their shear strength. When ground shaking is intense and of long duration, soil pore pressures can build up and exceed the intergranular stress, causing loss of grain contact and loss of cohesion. Liquefaction of soil can lead to extremely large displacements and dramatic
-|medium||100.00||0.15||mixed||95.00||120.00||dry||15
+structural failure. Some high-risk factors for liquefaction might include:
+:Water Table Location = below water table, saturated, or water content greater than 0.9 * Liquid Limit,
+:Soil type = poorly-drained cohesionless soils or nonplastic silts with Liquid Limit < 35%,
+:Soil gradation = uniformly-graded and fine particle size, low percentage of plastic fines (< 5%),
+:Relative Density = loose, with relative density, DR < 50%,
+:Confining pressure = low confinement pressure, in top 50 ft. of soil,
+:Intensity of ground shaking = exceeding critical acceleration levels, close to epicenter,
+:Duration of shaking = long duration, numerous cycles.
+'''When to Check Liquefaction'''
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
-|rowspan="2"|Loose||rowspan="2"|5 - 10||rowspan="2"|28 - 30||rowspan="2"|0.5 - 0.10 ||rowspan="2"|0.2 - 0.4 ||fine||160 - 240|0.25||uniform||91.00||118.00||wet||20
+|'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|medium||200 - 600||0.2 - 0.25||mixed||99.00||123.00||dry||25
+|AASHTO Div. I-A, 1992 Commentary, C6.3.1(A), C6.4.1(A), C6.5.1(A)
-|-
+|}
-|rowspan="2"|Medium||rowspan="2"|10 - 20||rowspan="2"|30 - 33||rowspan="2"|1.0 - 2.0||rowspan="2"|0.4 - 0.5||fine||240 - 300||0.25||uniform||97.00||122.00||wet||55
-|-
+The Soil Report should include the factor of safety against liquefaction, but if it is not the bridge designers should calculate the factor of safety against liquefaction for each <u>saturated</u> (submerged under the water table) soil layer at each bent. Do not check compacted abutment fill near vertical end drains. If the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than 1.3, then consider the possibility of liquefaction as explained in Step 3 below. If both the designer and checker agree that the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than 1.0, then consult the Structural Project Manager about the possibility of lengthening piles, increasing pile sizes, or soil strengthening measures.
-|medium||600 - 800||0.25 - 0.3||mixed||104.00||127.00||dry||92
-|-
+'''Step 1:'''
-|rowspan="2"|Medium Dense||rowspan="2"|20 - 35||rowspan="2"|33 - 37||rowspan="2"|2.0 - 3.5||rowspan="2"|0.5 - 0.6||fine||300 - 400 ||0.25||uniform||103.00||126.00||wet||90
-|-
+Compute the seismically-induced (active) cyclic stress ratio, <math>\frac {\tau_{av}}{\sigma_{o'}}</math>.
-|medium||800 - 1000||0.3 - 0.35||mixed||110.00||131.00||dry||158
-|-
+:<math>\frac {\tau_{av}}{\sigma_{o'}} = 0.65 \times A \times \sigma_T \times \frac{r_d}{\sigma_{o'}}</math>
-|rowspan="2"|Dense||rowspan="2"|35 - 70||rowspan="2"|37 - 44||rowspan="2"|3.5 - 7.0||rowspan="2"|0.6 - 0.9||fine||400 - 600||0.25||uniform||109.00||130.00||wet||125
-|-
+: <math>\tau_{av}</math> = average earthquake-induced shear stress on the sand layer under consideration, psf.
-|medium||1000 - 1600||0.35 - 0.4||mixed||116.00||135.00||dry||225
+: <math> \sigma_{o'}</math> = initial effective overburden pressure, psf (Use γ' = γ<sub>t</sub> - γ<sub>w</sub>, below the watertable, where γ<sub>w</sub> = 62.4 pcf).
-|-
+:A = Acceleration Coefficient
-|rowspan="2"|Very Dense||rowspan="2"|75.00||rowspan="2"|45.00||rowspan="2"|8.00||rowspan="2"|0.95||fine||700.00||0.25||uniform||112.00||133.00||wet||150
+:<math> \sigma_t </math> = total stress at mid-layer of soil, psf, = Σγ<sub>t</sub>*H<sub>t</sub> for each layer from the ground surface down to the layer being investigated.
-|-
+:r<sub>d</sub> = a stress reduction factor varying from 1.0 at ground surface to 0.9 at about 30 ft. deep, remaining at 0.9 for depths below 30 ft.
-|medium||1700.00||0.45||mixed||119.00||138.00||dry||270
-|-
+'''Step 2:'''
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|N<sub>60</sub> = Standard Penetration Test blowcount, blows.ft, to 60% machine efficiency.
+Determine the (resistive) cyclic stress ratio, <math>\frac {\tau}{\sigma '_v}</math>, as described below.
+From Fig. 751.9.2.5.1, enter with (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> and M, and determine the (resistive) cyclic stress ratio, <math>\frac {\tau}{\sigma '_v}</math>.  (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> is described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.4 Material Properties|EPG 751.9.2.4]].
+In the absence of getting a Richter magnitude, M, from the geotechnical engineer, the USGS deaggregation map can be used or the following table may also be used, where “A” represents the design acceleration coefficient.
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="180px" align="center"
 |-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white" |<math>\phi</math> = Angle of internal friction, for cohesionless sands and gravels, degrees
+|A = 0.04g|| M = 4.25
 |-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|S<sub>u</sub> = Shear strength of soil at a given normal stress, ksf.
+|A = 0.08g|| M = 4.75
 |-
-|style="background:white"| ||colspan="12" align="left" style="background:white"|For sands (c = 0), S<sub>u</sub> = p x tan(<math>\phi</math>), where p = effecitve normal stress, or S<sub>u</sub> = N/10, in ksf.
+|A = 0.16g|| M = 5.75
 |-
-|style="background:white"| ||colspan="12" align="left" style="background:white" |For clays (<math>\phi</math> = 0), S<sub>u</sub> = c, and therefore shear capacity is independent of normal stress.
+|A = 0.33g|| M = 7.00
 |-
-|style="background:white"| ||colspan="12" align="left" style="background:white"|For mixed soils (<math>\phi</math>-c soils), S<sub>u</sub> = c + p x tan(<math>\phi</math>)
+|A = 0.50g|| M = 8.50
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|E = Young's Modulus = Elastic Modulus, ksf.  E = 2 x (1 + <math> \nu</math>) x G
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white" |G = Shear Modulus, ksf
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white" |<math>\gamma</math> = soil unit weight, pcf.  <math>\gamma</math> = <math>\gamma</math><sub>dry</sub> x (1 + w), where w = water content, unitless
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|K = f = slope (variation) of linear subgrade modulus.
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|W.T. = water table elevation, ft.
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|For additional estimation of soil properties, see AASHTO Div. I, Ch. 4
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|<sup>'''1'''</sup> For p-y curve analysis
 |}
+The USGS deaggregation maps are available at http://eqint.cr.usgs.gov/deaggint/.
+'''Step 3:'''
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="760px" align="center"
+Calculate the factor of safety against liquefaction.
-|-
-!colspan="9"|Clays, Silts and Cohesive Soils
+:FS = <math>\frac{Resistive}{Active} = \frac{Step\ 2}{Step\ 1}</math> ≥ 1.3 (desired) or 1.0 (required)
-|-
-!style="background:#BEBEBE"| ||style="background:#BEBEBE"|N<sub>60</sub>, Blows/ft. !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|c = S<sub>u</sub>, ksf !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|E, ksf!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Poisson's ratio, <math>\nu</math> !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|<math>\gamma</math><sub>dry</sub>(pcf) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|<math>\gamma</math><sub>sat</sub>(pcf) !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|K(f)<sup>1</sup>,(pci)!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|<math>\epsilon</math><sub>50</sub><sup>1</sup>(in./in.)
+If FS ≥ 1.3, then analyze the bridge on the assumption that liquefaction will not occur. If FS < 1.3, then assume liquefaction might occur within the layer under consideration: this consists of running two seismic analyses to design the bridge for both possibilities of: a) liquefaction and b) no liquefaction. Note that superstructures may be subject to large lateral movement when soil liquefation is considered in the seismic analysis. Hence, expansion bearings shall be designed to tolerate these movements. For CIP concrete piles, determine the maximum pile moment and depth, with and without liquefaction, and design reinforcement down to the development length below that depth, as necessary.
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
-|rowspan="2"|Very Soft||rowspan="2"|0 - 5||rowspan="2"|0 - 0.5 ||rowspan="2"|50 - 150||0.50 (sat.)|| -||105.00||rowspan="2"|50.00||rowspan="2"|0.02
+|'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|0.40 (unsat.)||73.00|| -
+|AASHTO Div. I-A, 6.4.2(C), 7.4.2(C)
+|}
+The residual strength of the liquefied soil layer may be considered. The calculation of residual strength is described below.
+'''Residual Strength'''
+Liquified soil has a residual shear strength, Sr, which can be considered for the pile stiffness computations. When not enough information is available, use a residual strength of zero. The residual shear strength shall not be more than the non-liquefied shear strength.
+The residual shear strength of liquefied soil can be estimated by using the corrected penetration resistance, (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub>, as described previously, but with an additional correction factor, Ncorr, for fines contents to generate an equivalent “clean sand” blowcount value (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> = (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> + N<sub>corr</sub>, where N<sub>corr</sub> are shown in Table 751.9.2.5.
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="300px" align="center"
 |-
-|rowspan="2"|Soft||rowspan="2"|5 - 10||rowspan="2"|0.5 - 1.0 ||rowspan="2"|150 - 300||0.50 (sat.)|| -||110.00||rowspan="2"|100.00||rowspan="2"|0.01
+!colspan="2" style="background:#BEBEBE"| Table 751.9.2.5 Corrections to Blowcounts for Percent Fines (N<sub>corr</sub>)
 |-
-|0.39 (unsat.)||76.00|| -
+|Percent Fines|| N<sub>corr</sub> (blows/ft)
 |-
-|rowspan="2"|Medium Stiff||rowspan="2"|10 - 20||rowspan="2"|1.0 - 2.0 ||rowspan="2"|300 - 650||0.50 (sat.)|| -||116.00||rowspan="2"|500.00||rowspan="2"|0.007
+|10%|| 1
 |-
-|0.38 (unsat.)||86.00|| -
+|25%|| 2
 |-
-|rowspan="2"|Very Stiff||rowspan="2"|20 - 35||rowspan="2"|2.0 - 3.5 ||rowspan="2"|650 - 1000||0.50 (sat.)|| -||123.00||rowspan="2"|1000.00||rowspan="2"|0.005
+|50%|| 4
 |-
-|0.37 (unsat.)||96.00|| -
+|75%|| 5
-|-
+|}
-|rowspan="2"|Hard||rowspan="2"|35 - 70||rowspan="2"|3.5 - 7.0 ||rowspan="2"|1000 - 1500||0.50 (sat.)|| -||129.00||rowspan="2"|2000.00||rowspan="2"|0.004
-|-
+Figure 751.9.2.5.2 presents an updated correlation between S<sub>r</sub> and (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> (FHWA-SA-97-076, 1997). For (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> > 16 blows, continue the curve as a straight line at the same slope as at 16 blows.
-|0.36 (unsat.)||106.00|| -
-|-
-|rowspan="2"|Very Hard||rowspan="2"|75.00||rowspan="2"|7.5 ||rowspan="2"|1500 - 2000||0.50 (sat.)|| -||134.00||rowspan="2"|3000.00||rowspan="2"|0.0035
-|-
-|0.35 (unsat.)||108.00|| -
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|N<sub>60</sub> = Standard Penetration Test blowcount, blows.ft, to 60% machine efficiency.
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white" |c = cohesion of cohesive clays and silts, ksf
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|S<sub>u</sub> = Shear strength of soil at a given normal stress, ksf.
-|-
-|style="background:white"| ||colspan="12" align="left" style="background:white"|For sands (c = 0), S<sub>u</sub> = p x tan(<math>\phi</math>), where p = effecitve normal stress, or S<sub>u</sub> = N/10, in ksf.
-|-
-|style="background:white"| ||colspan="12" align="left" style="background:white" |For clays (<math>\phi</math> = 0), S<sub>u</sub> = c, and therefore shear capacity is independent of normal stress.
-|-
-|style="background:white"| ||colspan="12" align="left" style="background:white"|For mixed soils (<math>\phi</math>-c soils), S<sub>u</sub> = c + p x tan(<math>\phi</math>)
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|For clays, c can be estimated from (unconfined compression strength, Q<sub>u</sub>)/2.
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|E = Young's Modulus = Elastic Modulus, ksf.  E = 2 x (1 + <math> \nu</math>) x G
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white" |G = Shear Modulus, ksf
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white" |<math>\gamma</math> = soil unit weight, pcf.  <math>\gamma</math> = <math>\gamma</math><sub>dry</sub> x (1 + w), where w = water content, unitless
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|K = f = slope (variation) of linear subgrade modulus.
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|<math>\epsilon</math><sub>50</sub> = strain at 50% of the maximum difference in principal stresses, unitless
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|For additional estimation of soil properties, see AASHTO Div. I, Ch. 4
-|-
-|colspan="13" align="left" style="background:white"|<sup>'''1'''</sup> For p-y curve analysis
-|}
-====751.9.2.4.2 Concrete Properties====
+[[image:751.9.2.5.1.jpg|center|460px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.5.1, Resistive Cyclic Stress Ratio'''</center> <center>(AASHTO Div. I-A 1998 Commentary, Fig. CA1).</center> <center> '''Note: AASHTO's N<sub>1</sub> is actually (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub>'''</center>]]
-The concrete compression strength, f’c, should be a probable, rather than a minimum. 1.5 f’c shall be used in the seismic analysis. This over the specified strength recognizes the typically conservative mix designs and the natural strength gain with concrete age.
-The flexural rigidity of columns, beam cap and c.i.p. piles should be calculated based on the cracked sections, rather than gross member section. Natural periods should also be based on the cracked sections. The flexural rigidity of the cracked section is defined as the rigidity at which the first steel rebar reaches the yield limit state.
+[[image:751.9.2.5.2.jpg|center|560px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.5.2, Relationship Between Corrected Blowcounts (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> (Blows/ft.) and Undrained Residual Strength, S<sub>r</sub> (psf).'''</center> <center>(FHWA-SA-97-076, 1997)</center>]]
-Figure 751.9.2.4.2 shows the moment of inertia ratio, Ie/Ig, for circular and rectangular columns.
+===751.9.2.6 Spring Constants===
-[[image:751.9.2.4.2.jpg|center|450px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.4.2, Adjustment Factors for Effective Stiffness for Concrete (Priestly et al, 1996)'''</center>]]
+====751.9.2.6.1 Modeling Abutment Stiffnesses====
-:::::In Fig. 751.9.2.4.2:
+'''"Full-Zero" Abutment Stiffnesses'''
-::::::A<sub>g</sub> = gross section area
-::::::A<sub>st</sub> = steel section area
-::::::I<sub>g</sub> = gross moment of inertia
-::::::I<sub>e</sub> = effective moment of inertia of cracked section
-::::::f'c = compressive strength of unconfined concrete
-::::::P = applied axial compressive load
-====751.9.2.4.3 Steel Properties====
+For the "full-zero" stiffness approach, one abutment's backfill is in compression (full soil springs are engaged) while the other abutment's backfill is in tension (this backwall soil spring is zero because soil tensile strength is negligible. Note that although the backwall soil stiffness is zero, the pile, beam and wing stiffnesses are NOT zero.) To account for
-Yield strength of reinforcement should be based on mill certificate or tensile test results if available. If not, a nominal strength of 1.1 times the specified minimum strength should be assumed, resulting in 66 ksi yield strength for grade 60 reinforcement. (Priestly et al,1996; FHWA, 1995)
+compression and tension at both abutments, two Seismic Structural Analysis programs are required:
-===751.9.2.5 Liquifaction===
+:'''(Program # 1)''' Use full springs at all pile and soil springs, except set the backwall spring equal to zero at the FIRST abutment only, and
+:'''(Program # 2)''' Use springs at all pile and soil springs, except set the backwall spring equal to zero at the SECOND abutment only.
-'''Conditions for Liquefaction'''
+For analyzing and designing the structure, use the worst case forces from these two models. When these "full-zero" models are used, the resulting longitudinal abutment soil force does not require adjustment as it would in the "half-half" model.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|Volume II of report #FHWA/RD-86/102, sections 4.2-4.3
-|}
-When subjected to seismic ground motions, some soils tend to liquefy - that is, to lose most of their shear strength. When ground shaking is intense and of long duration, soil pore pressures can build up and exceed the intergranular stress, causing loss of grain contact and loss of cohesion. Liquefaction of soil can lead to extremely large displacements and dramatic
+'''"Half-Half" Abutment Stiffnesses'''
-structural failure. Some high-risk factors for liquefaction might include:
-:Water Table Location = below water table, saturated, or water content greater than 0.9 * Liquid Limit,
+For skewed bridges, the "half-half" method should not be used. For the "half-half" stiffness approach, half of the backwall soil stiffness is used at each abutment, in addition to the full stiffnesses at all other abutment spring elements (piles, beams, wings, etc.). After the seismic analysis, the "halfhalf" method also requires doubling the backwall force.
-:Soil type = poorly-drained cohesionless soils or nonplastic silts with Liquid Limit < 35%,
-:Soil gradation = uniformly-graded and fine particle size, low percentage of plastic fines (< 5%),
-:Relative Density = loose, with relative density, DR < 50%,
-:Confining pressure = low confinement pressure, in top 50 ft. of soil,
-:Intensity of ground shaking = exceeding critical acceleration levels, close to epicenter,
-:Duration of shaking = long duration, numerous cycles.
-'''When to Check Liquefaction'''
+'''Non-Integral Abutments'''
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO Div. I-A, 1992 Commentary, C6.3.1(A), C6.4.1(A), C6.5.1(A)
-|}
-The Soil Report should include the factor of safety against liquefaction, but if it is not the bridge designers should calculate the factor of safety against liquefaction for each <u>saturated</u> (submerged under the water table) soil layer at each bent. Do not check compacted abutment fill near vertical end drains. If the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than 1.3, then consider the possibility of liquefaction as explained in Step 3 below. If both the designer and checker agree that the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than 1.0, then consult the Structural Project Manager about the possibility of lengthening piles, increasing pile sizes, or soil strengthening measures.
+For non-integral abutments with restrainers, three separate Seismic Structural Analysis Programs are required:
-'''Step 1:'''
+:(1) With restrainer elements only on the first abutment: This model covers movement toward the last abutment.
+:(2) With restrainer elements only on the last abutment: This model covers movement toward the first abutment.
+:(3) Without restrainer elements: With no restrainers, the components of the springs that are longitudinal with respect to the bridge centerline will have no effect.
+'''Point-of-Fixity Approximations for Piles'''
-Compute the seismically-induced (active) cyclic stress ratio, <math>\frac {\tau_{av}}{\sigma_{o'}}</math>.
+Avoid using the point-of-fixity formulas (U.S. Steel Design Handbook, 1965 & NHI Course No. 13063, 1996). Stiffnesses based on estimated points of fixity are not recommended, for several reasons:
-:<math>\frac {\tau_{av}}{\sigma_{o'}} = 0.65 \times A \times \sigma_T \times \frac{r_d}{\sigma_{o'}}</math>
+a) For standard integral pile cap END bents, there is DOUBLE-curvature bending in both directions. The point-of-fixity formulas were apparently derived for SINGLE-curvature bending, so the formulas should not be used for most standard integral end bents.
-: <math>\tau_{av}</math> = average earthquake-induced shear stress on the sand layer under consideration, psf.
+b) For standard INTERMEDIATE bents, out-of-plane bending is usually single-curvature, and in-plane bending is usually double-curvature, and one fixity length cannot model the different bending cases in both directions at the same time. Therefore, the point-of-fixity formulas should not be used for most standard intermediate bents.
-: <math> \sigma_{o'}</math> = initial effective overburden pressure, psf (Use γ' = γ<sub>t</sub> - γ<sub>w</sub>, below the watertable, where γ<sub>w</sub> = 62.4 pcf).
-:A = Acceleration Coefficient
-:<math> \sigma_t </math> = total stress at mid-layer of soil, psf, = Σγ<sub>t</sub>*H<sub>t</sub> for each layer from the ground surface down to the layer being investigated.
-:r<sub>d</sub> = a stress reduction factor varying from 1.0 at ground surface to 0.9 at about 30 ft. deep, remaining at 0.9 for depths below 30 ft.
-'''Step 2:'''
+c) The point-of-fixity formulas also assume homogeneous soil (no layers). When piles or drilled shafts penetrate through multiple varying soil layers, or when the water table is near the top of the pile head, use programs such as SPILE and COM624P because of their more accurate analyses and their more detailed soil layer geometries.
-Determine the (resistive) cyclic stress ratio, <math>\frac {\tau}{\sigma '_v}</math>, as described below.
-From Fig. 751.9.2.5.1, enter with (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> and M, and determine the (resistive) cyclic stress ratio, <math>\frac {\tau}{\sigma '_v}</math>.  (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> is described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.4 Material Properties|EPG 751.9.2.4]].
+d) It is virtually impossible to select a point of fixity such that both the maximum deflection and maximum bending both were computed correctly.
-In the absence of getting a Richter magnitude, M, from the geotechnical engineer, the USGS deaggregation map can be used or the following table may also be used, where “A” represents the design acceleration coefficient.
+====751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Stiffness, Wilson Equations====
+'''Abutment Soil Types'''
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="180px" align="center"
+:'''Compacted Backfill:''' Wings, Backwall and possibly Beam
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
-|A = 0.04g|| M = 4.25
+|'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|A = 0.08g|| M = 4.75
+|[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=5 Sec. 203.3.4] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=5 Sec. 206.4.9]
-|-
+|}
-|A = 0.16g|| M = 5.75
-|-
-|A = 0.33g|| M = 7.00
-|-
-|A = 0.50g|| M = 8.50
-|}
-The USGS deaggregation maps are available at http://eqint.cr.usgs.gov/deaggint/.
-'''Step 3:'''
+:Call the district to determine the type of borrow soil that will most likely be used as abutment backfill. When estimating soil properties (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.4 Material Properties|EPG 751.9.2.4]]), consider that backfill is compacted to 95% maximum density, so assume dense or stiff conditions.
-Calculate the factor of safety against liquefaction.
+:'''Natural (in-situ):''' possibly Beam
-:FS = <math>\frac{Resistive}{Active} = \frac{Step\ 2}{Step\ 1}</math> ≥ 1.3 (desired) or 1.0 (required)
+:Use available boring data for estimating soil deposit properties.
-If FS ≥ 1.3, then analyze the bridge on the assumption that liquefaction will not occur. If FS < 1.3, then assume liquefaction might occur within the layer under consideration: this consists of running two seismic analyses to design the bridge for both possibilities of: a) liquefaction and b) no liquefaction. Note that superstructures may be subject to large lateral movement when soil liquefation is considered in the seismic analysis. Hence, expansion bearings shall be designed to tolerate these movements. For CIP concrete piles, determine the maximum pile moment and depth, with and without liquefaction, and design reinforcement down to the development length below that depth, as necessary.
+'''Abutment Spring Types'''
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="400px" align="center"
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+|-
+!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Spring Location||align="center" style="background:#BEBEBE"|Direction of Spring||align="center" style="background:#BEBEBE"|Type of Soil at Location
+|-
+|____ Backwall|| Horizontal, normal to backwall ||Compacted backfill
 |-
-|'''Additional Information'''
+|____ Beam ||Vertically downward ||In-situ? or compacted?
 |-
-|AASHTO Div. I-A, 6.4.2(C), 7.4.2(C)
+|____ Wings ||Horizontal, normal to wing ||Compacted backfill
 |}
-The residual strength of the liquefied soil layer may be considered. The calculation of residual strength is described below.
+[[image:751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Springs.jpg|center|550px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Springs'''</center> <center>Orientations of Wilson Equation Stiffnesses</center>]]
-'''Residual Strength'''
+'''Wilson Equations (Wilson, 1988)'''
+For translational and rotational stiffnesses on plate-like elements such as backwalls, wings and beams, use the Wilson equations:
-Liquified soil has a residual shear strength, Sr, which can be considered for the pile stiffness computations. When not enough information is available, use a residual strength of zero. The residual shear strength shall not be more than the non-liquefied shear strength.
+:'''Translation normal to the plane'''
-The residual shear strength of liquefied soil can be estimated by using the corrected penetration resistance, (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub>, as described previously, but with an additional correction factor, Ncorr, for fines contents to generate an equivalent “clean sand” blowcount value (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> = (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub> + N<sub>corr</sub>, where N<sub>corr</sub> are shown in Table 751.9.2.5.
+::<math>K = \frac{E \times L}{(1 - \nu^2)\times \ I}</math>, kip/ft.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="300px" align="center"
+:'''Rotation about the transverse axis (y-axis)'''
-|-
-!colspan="2" style="background:#BEBEBE"| Table 751.9.2.5 Corrections to Blowcounts for Percent Fines (N<sub>corr</sub>)
-|-
-|Percent Fines|| N<sub>corr</sub> (blows/ft)
-|-
-|10%|| 1
-|-
-|25%|| 2
-|-
-|50%|| 4
-|-
-|75%|| 5
-|}
-Figure 751.9.2.5.2 presents an updated correlation between S<sub>r</sub> and (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> (FHWA-SA-97-076, 1997). For (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> > 16 blows, continue the curve as a straight line at the same slope as at 16 blows.
+::<math>K_{\theta_y} = \frac{K \times L^2}{12}</math>, kip * ft/radian.
-[[image:751.9.2.5.1.jpg|center|460px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.5.1, Resistive Cyclic Stress Ratio'''</center> <center>(AASHTO Div. I-A 1998 Commentary, Fig. CA1).</center> <center> '''Note: AASHTO's N<sub>1</sub> is actually (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60</sub>'''</center>]]
+:'''Rotation about the longitudinal axis (x-axis)'''
-[[image:751.9.2.5.2.jpg|center|560px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.5.2, Relationship Between Corrected Blowcounts (N<sub>1</sub>)<sub>60-CS</sub> (Blows/ft.) and Undrained Residual Strength, S<sub>r</sub> (psf).'''</center> <center>(FHWA-SA-97-076, 1997)</center>]]
+::<math>K_{\theta_x} = \frac{K \times B^2}{12}</math>, kip * ft/radian.
-===751.9.2.6 Spring Constants===
+:The axis orientation for each element used to determine K<sub>θx</sub> and K<sub>θy</sub> is shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation, below. If K is reduced as in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis]], then K<sub>θ</sub> must also be reduced.
-====751.9.2.6.1 Modeling Abutment Stiffnesses====
-'''"Full-Zero" Abutment Stiffnesses'''
-For the "full-zero" stiffness approach, one abutment's backfill is in compression (full soil springs are engaged) while the other abutment's backfill is in tension (this backwall soil spring is zero because soil tensile strength is negligible. Note that although the backwall soil stiffness is zero, the pile, beam and wing stiffnesses are NOT zero.) To account for
+:K = estimated equivalent linear stiffness for translation, kip/ft.
-compression and tension at both abutments, two Seismic Structural Analysis programs are required:
-:'''(Program # 1)''' Use full springs at all pile and soil springs, except set the backwall spring equal to zero at the FIRST abutment only, and
+:K<sub>θ</sub> = estimated equivalent linear stiffness for rotation, kip*ft/radian
-:'''(Program # 2)''' Use springs at all pile and soil springs, except set the backwall spring equal to zero at the SECOND abutment only.
-For analyzing and designing the structure, use the worst case forces from these two models. When these "full-zero" models are used, the resulting longitudinal abutment soil force does not require adjustment as it would in the "half-half" model.
+:E = Young's Modulus of soil at spring location, either for in-situ soil or for compacted backfill, ksf
-'''"Half-Half" Abutment Stiffnesses'''
+:L = length of item, ft.
-For skewed bridges, the "half-half" method should not be used. For the "half-half" stiffness approach, half of the backwall soil stiffness is used at each abutment, in addition to the full stiffnesses at all other abutment spring elements (piles, beams, wings, etc.). After the seismic analysis, the "halfhalf" method also requires doubling the backwall force.
+::For backwall, L = length of backwall along skew, to inside wing face
-'''Non-Integral Abutments'''
+::For wings, L = inside layout length of wing
-For non-integral abutments with restrainers, three separate Seismic Structural Analysis Programs are required:
+::For beams, L = skewed length of beam along cl. beam
-:(1) With restrainer elements only on the first abutment: This model covers movement toward the last abutment.
+:<math> \nu</math> = Poisson's Ratio of soil at spring location, either natural or compacted
-:(2) With restrainer elements only on the last abutment: This model covers movement toward the first abutment.
+::<math>I = 1.2136 \times log_{10} \frac{L}{B} + 0.84</math> =  Shape factor for soil contact area
+:B = height or width of item, ft.
+::For backwall, B = height from top of slab to bottom of beam
+::For wings, B = equivalent height of wing = (wing area)/(wing L) For beams, B = beam width normal to beam
-:(3) Without restrainer elements: With no restrainers, the components of the springs that are longitudinal with respect to the bridge centerline will have no effect.
+[[image:751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation.jpg|center|300px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation'''</center>]]
-'''Point-of-Fixity Approximations for Piles'''
+====751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness====
-Avoid using the point-of-fixity formulas (U.S. Steel Design Handbook, 1965 & NHI Course No. 13063, 1996). Stiffnesses based on estimated points of fixity are not recommended, for several reasons:
+'''General Procedure
-a) For standard integral pile cap END bents, there is DOUBLE-curvature bending in both directions. The point-of-fixity formulas were apparently derived for SINGLE-curvature bending, so the formulas should not be used for most standard integral end bents.
+'''1)''' From the boring data and the bridge profile plot, determine the SPT blowcounts along the pile length.
-b) For standard INTERMEDIATE bents, out-of-plane bending is usually single-curvature, and in-plane bending is usually double-curvature, and one fixity length cannot model the different bending cases in both directions at the same time. Therefore, the point-of-fixity formulas should not be used for most standard intermediate bents.
+'''2)''' Determine the soil properties required for the SPILE computer program or any other computer programs based on the methods presented by Nordlund (1963,1979), Thompson (1964), Meyerhoff (1976), Cheney and Chassie (1982), and Tomlison (1979,1985). Assume that the groundwater table is at the [https://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=750.3_Bridges#750.3.2.4.1_Normal_Water_Surface_Elevation Normal Water Surface Elevation].
-c) The point-of-fixity formulas also assume homogeneous soil (no layers). When piles or drilled shafts penetrate through multiple varying soil layers, or when the water table is near the top of the pile head, use programs such as SPILE and COM624P because of their more accurate analyses and their more detailed soil layer geometries.
+'''3)''' Run the SPILE program (Urzua,1993) or other programs using the methods described above to determine Q<sub>b</sub> and Q<sub>f</sub>.
-d) It is virtually impossible to select a point of fixity such that both the maximum deflection and maximum bending both were computed correctly.
+'''4)''' Determine the axial pile stiffness, K, as described below for friction piles
+and bearing piles (Lam and Martin, 1986).
-====751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Stiffness, Wilson Equations====
+'''Friction Piles'''
-'''Abutment Soil Types'''
-:'''Compacted Backfill:''' Wings, Backwall and possibly Beam
+Q<sub>u</sub> = the ultimate axial pile capacity, in kips (or tons)
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|[http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0203.pdf Sec. 203.3.4] and [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0206.pdf Sec. 206.4.9]
-|}
-:Call the district to determine the type of borrow soil that will most likely be used as abutment backfill. When estimating soil properties (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.4 Material Properties|EPG 751.9.2.4]]), consider that backfill is compacted to 95% maximum density, so assume dense or stiff conditions.
+Q<sub>f</sub> = the ultimate friction capacity from SPILE, in kips (or tons)
-:'''Natural (in-situ):''' possibly Beam
+Q<sub>b</sub> = the ultimate bearing capacity from SPILE, in kips (or tons)
-:Use available boring data for estimating soil deposit properties.
+For steel HP friction piles, use the box perimeter for friction, but use the HP steel area for bearing.
-'''Abutment Spring Types'''
+:In compression, Q<sub>u</sub>= Q<sub>f</sub> + Q<sub>b</sub>
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="400px" align="center"
-|-
-!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Spring Location||align="center" style="background:#BEBEBE"|Direction of Spring||align="center" style="background:#BEBEBE"|Type of Soil at Location
-|-
-|____ Backwall|| Horizontal, normal to backwall ||Compacted backfill
-|-
-|____ Beam ||Vertically downward ||In-situ? or compacted?
-|-
-|____ Wings ||Horizontal, normal to wing ||Compacted backfill
-|}
-[[image:751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Springs.jpg|center|550px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Springs'''</center> <center>Orientations of Wilson Equation Stiffnesses</center>]]
+:In tension, Q<sub>u</sub> = Q<sub>f</sub> because Q<sub>b</sub> = zero.
-'''Wilson Equations (Wilson, 1988)'''
+The typical pile resistance – displacement relationship is shown in Figure 751.9.2.6.3.
-For translational and rotational stiffnesses on plate-like elements such as backwalls, wings and beams, use the Wilson equations:
-:'''Translation normal to the plane'''
+At a displacement, z, at which the pile capacity is less than the ultimate capacity (q < Q<sub>u</sub> ), the partial capacity, q, is equal to the sum of the partial friction capacity, f, and the partial bearing capacity, b.
-::<math>K = \frac{E \times L}{(1 - \nu^2)\times \ I}</math>, kip/ft.
+q = f + b, in kips
+f = friction mobilized along a pile segment at a displacement, z ≤ z<sub>c</sub>
-:'''Rotation about the transverse axis (y-axis)'''
+<math> f = Q_f \times \bigg[2 \times \sqrt \frac{z}{z_c} - \frac{z}{z_c} \bigg]</math>, kips
-::<math>K_{\theta_y} = \frac{K \times L^2}{12}</math>, kip * ft/radian.
+z<sub>c</sub> = the critical displacement of the pile segment at which Q<sub>f</sub> is fully
+mobilized. Use z<sub>c</sub> = 0.2 in.
-:'''Rotation about the longitudinal axis (x-axis)'''
+b = tip resistance mobilized at a displacement, z ≤ z'<sub>c</sub>
-::<math>K_{\theta_x} = \frac{K \times B^2}{12}</math>, kip * ft/radian.
+<math>b = Q_b \times \bigg( \frac{z}{z'_c} \bigg)^{1/3}</math>, kips
-:The axis orientation for each element used to determine K<sub>θx</sub> and K<sub>θy</sub> is shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation, below. If K is reduced as in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis]], then K<sub>θ</sub> must also be reduced.
+z'<sub>c</sub> = the critical pile displacement at which Q<sub>b</sub> is fully mobilized.
-:K = estimated equivalent linear stiffness for translation, kip/ft.
+Use z'<sub>c</sub> = 0.05*D, inches
-:K<sub>θ</sub> = estimated equivalent linear stiffness for rotation, kip*ft/radian
+D = least pile dimension (D = diameter for C.I.P. piles), inches
-:E = Young's Modulus of soil at spring location, either for in-situ soil or for compacted backfill, ksf
+However, the pile itself will deform, also. This pile deformation or pile compliance, δ, should be included in the pile resistance – displacement curve as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.3.
-:L = length of item, ft.
+<math>\delta = \frac{qL}{AE} = </math>pile compliance = pile deformation, inches
-::For backwall, L = length of backwall along skew, to inside wing face
+q = f + b = compressive axial load corresponding to a pile displacement z, kips
-::For wings, L = inside layout length of wing
+L = total friction length of the pile in the soil, inches
-::For beams, L = skewed length of beam along cl. beam
+AE = For concrete C.I.P. piles, AE = A<sub>c</sub>E<sub>c</sub>+A<sub>s</sub>E<sub>s</sub>, kips.
+::For steel HP piles, AE = A<sub>s</sub>E<sub>s</sub>, kips.
-:<math> \nu</math> = Poisson's Ratio of soil at spring location, either natural or compacted
+From Figure 751.9.2.6.3, it can be seen that the pile axial load-axial deformation curve is nonlinear. If response spectrum method is considered in the analysis, the secant modulus stiffness is used. The secant modulus stiffness, K<sub>s</sub>, is defined as the slope between two points at which the axial loads are equal to zero and Q<sub>u</sub>/2. For regular highway bridge foundation piles, typical levels of cyclic compression loading would be from 50 to 70% of
+Q<sub>u</sub>.
-::<math>I = 1.2136 \times log_{10} \frac{L}{B} + 0.84</math> =  Shape factor for soil contact area
+[[image:751.9.2.6.3.jpg|center|350px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness Model'''</center>]]
-:B = height or width of item, ft.
-::For backwall, B = height from top of slab to bottom of beam
-::For wings, B = equivalent height of wing = (wing area)/(wing L) For beams, B = beam width normal to beam
-[[image:751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation.jpg|center|300px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.2 Element Orientation'''</center>]]
+'''Steel HP Bearing Piles'''
-====751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness====
+In compression, Q<sub>f</sub> = 0, because bearing piles bear directly on rock.
-'''General Procedure
+In tension, Q<sub>f</sub> = the ultimate friction capacity of the pile.
-'''1)''' From the boring data and the bridge profile plot, determine the SPT blowcounts along the pile length.
+Q<sub>b</sub> = the ultimate bearing capacity, in kips (or tons)
-'''2)''' Determine the soil properties required for the SPILE computer program or any other computer programs based on the methods presented by Nordlund (1963,1979), Thompson (1964), Meyerhoff (1976), Cheney and Chassie (1982), and Tomlison (1979,1985). Assume that the groundwater table is at the [[750.3 Bridges#750.3.2.4.1 Design High Water Surface Elevation|Normal Water Surface Elevation]].
+:Q<sub>b</sub> = 0.25 * f<sub>y</sub> * A<sub>s</sub> (AASHTO 4.5.7.3), where:
+:A<sub>s</sub> = the HP steel pile area, in square inches
+:f<sub>y</sub> = yield stress of the pile steel, in ksi
-'''3)''' Run the SPILE program (Urzua,1993) or other programs using the methods described above to determine Q<sub>b</sub> and Q<sub>f</sub>.
+In compression, Q<sub>u</sub> = Q<sub>b</sub>, because Q<sub>f</sub> = zero.
-'''4)''' Determine the axial pile stiffness, K, as described below for friction piles
+In tension, Q<sub>u</sub> = Q<sub>f</sub>, because Q<sub>b</sub> = zero.
-and bearing piles (Lam and Martin, 1986).
-'''Friction Piles'''
+The pile is more often in compression due to preloading from dead load, so the pile axial spring constant can be calculated as:
-Q<sub>u</sub> = the ultimate axial pile capacity, in kips (or tons)
+:<math>K_s = \frac {AE}{L}</math>
-Q<sub>f</sub> = the ultimate friction capacity from SPILE, in kips (or tons)
+where:
-Q<sub>b</sub> = the ultimate bearing capacity from SPILE, in kips (or tons)
+AE = A<sub>s</sub>E<sub>s</sub>, kips, using the HP steel area, square inches.
-For steel HP friction piles, use the box perimeter for friction, but use the HP steel area for bearing.
+L = total length of pile between the pile cap and the point of bearing on rock, inches.
-:In compression, Q<sub>u</sub>= Q<sub>f</sub> + Q<sub>b</sub>
+'''Pile Group Effects'''
-:In tension, Q<sub>u</sub> = Q<sub>f</sub> because Q<sub>b</sub> = zero.
+Design pile footings with a center to center spacing of more than or equal to 3 pile diameters.
-The typical pile resistance – displacement relationship is shown in Figure 751.9.2.6.3.
+'''a)''' Pile group capacity in cohesionless soils: The ultimate group capacity for driven piles in cohesionless soils can be taken as the sum of the individual ultimate pile capacities.
-At a displacement, z, at which the pile capacity is less than the ultimate capacity (q < Q<sub>u</sub> ), the partial capacity, q, is equal to the sum of the partial friction capacity, f, and the partial bearing capacity, b.
+'''b)''' Pile group capacity in cohesive soils:
-q = f + b, in kips
+:1) For pile groups driven in clays with c ≤ 14 psi, a group efficiency of 0.7 (i.e. use 70% of the sum of the individual ultimate pile capacities) for center to center pile spacings of three times the pile diameter. If the center to center pile spacing is greater than 6 times the pile diameter, a group efficiency of 1.0 may be used. Linear interpolations should be used for intermediate center to center pile spacings.
-f = friction mobilized along a pile segment at a displacement, z ≤ z<sub>c</sub>
+:2) For pile groups driven in clays with c > 14 psi, a group efficiency of 1.0 may be used.
-<math> f = Q_f \times \bigg[2 \times \sqrt \frac{z}{z_c} - \frac{z}{z_c} \bigg]</math>, kips
+====751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)====
+'''Calculating Stiffnesses'''
-z<sub>c</sub> = the critical displacement of the pile segment at which Q<sub>f</sub> is fully
+The pile lateral translational spring constants are determined using estimated soil properties and the COM624P computer program (Wang and Reese, 1993) or any other programs that utilize non-linear p-y curves for either single piles or a pile group.
-mobilized. Use z<sub>c</sub> = 0.2 in.
-b = tip resistance mobilized at a displacement, z ≤ z'<sub>c</sub>
+) First, set up the soil depth profile at the pile location. Use the boring data and the bridge profile plot to determine the SPT blowcounts along the pile length.
-<math>b = Q_b \times \bigg( \frac{z}{z'_c} \bigg)^{1/3}</math>, kips
+) For a given soil profile, the pile lateral force-lateral deflection curve at the top of pile (pile head) can be obtained by applying incremental lateral forces at the pile head, the program then calculates the corresponding lateral deflections at the pile head. The material non-linearity of the pile is also considered in the program. Similarly, pile moment-rotational curve at the top of pile can be obtained by the COM624P program.
-z'<sub>c</sub> = the critical pile displacement at which Q<sub>b</sub> is fully mobilized.
+Since the response spectrum method is based on linear analysis, the secant modulus stiffness is used to represent the equivalent linear stiffness. The secant modulus stiffness is defined as the slope between two points at which the lateral loads are equal to zero and P(M<sub>u</sub>)/2, where Mu is the ultimate moment capacity of the pile; P(M<sub>u</sub>) represents the lateral load at which Mu is developed in the pile. The ultimate moment capacity of CIP pile or composite concrete-steel shell pile is based on the limit state of concrete strain, ε<sub>c</sub>=0.003 and the steel shell strain, ε<sub>s</sub>=0.015. The ultimate moment capacity of steel HP pile is equal to the plastic moment, M<sub>p</sub>, of the pile under constant axial load due to superstructure and substructure loads.
-Use z'<sub>c</sub> = 0.05*D, inches
+) It should be recognized that using the secant stiffness approach (including axial, lateral, and rotational stiffness) in the seismic analysis is an approximation method to simplify the time consuming non-linear dynamic analysis following the load-deformation relationship of the pile head. In general, using the secant stiffness approach in conjunction with the pile
+stress check described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis]] gives reasonable solutions in the design process without conducting an iterative procedure.
-D = least pile dimension (D = diameter for C.I.P. piles), inches
+'''Example 6.1.2.6.4.''' Find the stiffness of an individual pile at the groundline level which represents the characteristics of the soil–pile interactions.
-However, the pile itself will deform, also. This pile deformation or pile compliance, δ, should be included in the pile resistance – displacement curve as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.3.
+<u>Description:</u> A pile-cap bent with four steel HP12 x 53 piles is shown in Fig.  751.9.2.6.4.1. The bent has skew of 54.5 degrees. For individual piles, the stiffnesses of pile-soil interaction are estimated using COM624P computer program, then these stiffnesses are used to form Point elements in the structural model as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.2. The point elements are located at the ground level which represent the characteristics of the pile-soil
+interactions.
-<math>\delta = \frac{qL}{AE} = </math>pile compliance = pile deformation, inches
+[[image:751.9.2.6.4.1.jpg|center|500px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1 Intermediate Pile Bent'''</center>]]
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="280px" align="right"
-q = f + b = compressive axial load corresponding to a pile displacement z, kips
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.3 Test5out.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.3 Test 5.out]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.4 Test6out.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.4 Test 6.out]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.4 Test6out2.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.4 Test 6.out, second page]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.5 Test5Bout.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.5 Test 5B.out]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.6 Test6Bout.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.6 Test 6B.out]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.6 Test6Bout2.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.6 Test 6B.out, second page]]
+|}
-L = total friction length of the pile in the soil, inches
+The soil is classified as stiff clay with c = 2 ksf; γ= 0.069 pci; ε<sub>50</sub>= 0.007; and k =400 pci, where c is the undrained shear strength of clay; γ is effective unit weight; ε<sub>50</sub> is the strain corresponding to one-half the maximum principle stress difference; and k is the variation of soil modulus.
-AE = For concrete C.I.P. piles, AE = A<sub>c</sub>E<sub>c</sub>+A<sub>s</sub>E<sub>s</sub>, kips.
+In order to formulate the stiffnesses of pile-soil interaction, the computer program COM624P is used to obtain the translational, rotational and rotational-translational coupling stiffnesses for joints 9, 10, 11, and 12 (see Fig. 751.9.6.1.2.6.4.2). The COM624P output for fixed head and applied lateral forces in the y<sub>e</sub> direction, hinge head and applied moment in the z<sub>e</sub> direction, fixed head and applied lateral forces in the z<sub>e</sub> direction, and hinge head and applied moments in the y<sub>e</sub> direction are shown in the output files TEST5.OUT, TEST6.OUT, TEST5B.OUT, and TEST6B.OUT, respectively.
-::For steel HP piles, AE = A<sub>s</sub>E<sub>s</sub>, kips.
-From Figure 751.9.2.6.3, it can be seen that the pile axial load-axial deformation curve is nonlinear. If response spectrum method is considered in the analysis, the secant modulus stiffness is used. The secant modulus stiffness, K<sub>s</sub>, is defined as the slope between two points at which the axial loads are equal to zero and Q<sub>u</sub>/2. For regular highway bridge foundation piles, typical levels of cyclic compression loading would be from 50 to 70% of
+[[image:751.9.2.6.4.2.jpg|center|725px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.2 Structural Model'''</center>]]
-Q<sub>u</sub>.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.3.jpg|center|350px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness Model'''</center>]]
+From the TEST5.out and TEST6.out outputs, the stiffnesses of point element S<sub>33</sub> (or S(3,3)), S<sub>35</sub> (or S(3,5)), S<sub>55</sub>, S<sub>22</sub>, S<sub>26</sub>, and S<sub>66</sub> can be calculated as follows:
-'''Steel HP Bearing Piles'''
+a) For S<sub>33</sub>:
-In compression, Q<sub>f</sub> = 0, because bearing piles bear directly on rock.
+Plastic moment M<sub>pye</sub> = 1159.2 k-in.
-In tension, Q<sub>f</sub> = the ultimate friction capacity of the pile.
+<math>M = \frac{M_{pye}}{2} =</math> 579.6 k-in, which is close to M=548 k-in in the SUMMARY
+TABLE of TEST5B.OUT
-Q<sub>b</sub> = the ultimate bearing capacity, in kips (or tons)
+<math> S_{33} = \frac{P}{\delta_{ze}} = \frac{20\ kip}{0.14\ in.} =</math> 142.9 k/in.
-:Q<sub>b</sub> = 0.25 * f<sub>y</sub> * A<sub>s</sub> (AASHTO 4.5.7.3), where:
+b) For S<sub>35</sub>:
-:A<sub>s</sub> = the HP steel pile area, in square inches
-:f<sub>y</sub> = yield stress of the pile steel, in ksi
-In compression, Q<sub>u</sub> = Q<sub>b</sub>, because Q<sub>f</sub> = zero.
+<math> S_35 = \frac{M}{\delta_{ze}} = \frac{548}{0.14} =</math>3914 (kip/rad)in which δ is the lateral displacement at pile head.
-In tension, Q<sub>u</sub> = Q<sub>f</sub>, because Q<sub>b</sub> = zero.
+c) For S<sub>55</sub>:
-The pile is more often in compression due to preloading from dead load, so the pile axial spring constant can be calculated as:
+Since 579.6 k-in is close to 600 k-in, S55 can be obtained from TEST6B.OUT as
-:<math>K_s = \frac {AE}{L}</math>
+[[image:751.9.2.6.4 579.6 k in.jpg|center|370px]]
-where:
+Total rotation at top of the pile is θ<sub>ye</sub>= 0.0123/5 = 0.0025 rad.
-AE = A<sub>s</sub>E<sub>s</sub>, kips, using the HP steel area, square inches.
+<math>S_{55} = \frac{M}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{600}{0.0025} = </math>240000(k-in/rad.)
-L = total length of pile between the pile cap and the point of bearing on rock, inches.
+<math>S_{53} = \frac{P}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{16.2}{0.0025} = </math>6480(kip/rad.)
-'''Pile Group Effects'''
+Since the program performs structural analysis using symmetric stiffness matrix, use average number for S<sub>35</sub> and S<sub>53</sub> approximately: S35 = S53 = (3914+6480)/2 = 5200 (kip/rad.)
-Design pile footings with a center to center spacing of more than or equal to 3 pile diameters.
+d) For S<sub>22</sub>:
-'''a)''' Pile group capacity in cohesionless soils: The ultimate group capacity for driven piles in cohesionless soils can be taken as the sum of the individual ultimate pile capacities.
+Plastic moment M<sub>pze</sub>= 2664 kip-in.
-'''b)''' Pile group capacity in cohesive soils:
+M = (M<sub>pze</sub>)/2 = 1332 kip-in. (From TEST5.OUT SUMMARY TABLE, it is between 1100 k-in. and 1630 k-in.)
-:1) For pile groups driven in clays with c ≤ 14 psi, a group efficiency of 0.7 (i.e. use 70% of the sum of the individual ultimate pile capacities) for center to center pile spacings of three times the pile diameter. If the center to center pile spacing is greater than 6 times the pile diameter, a group efficiency of 1.0 may be used. Linear interpolations should be used for intermediate center to center pile spacings.
+<math>\frac {1332 - 1100}{1630 - 1100} = \frac{232}{530} = 0.438</math>
-:2) For pile groups driven in clays with c > 14 psi, a group efficiency of 1.0 may be used.
+<math>S_{22} = \frac{P}{\delta_{ye}} = \frac{30 + (0.438 \times 10)}{0.159 +(0.438 \times (0.289 - 0.159))} = \frac{34.38}{0.216} =</math>159.2 (kip/in.)
-====751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)====
+e) For S<sub>26</sub:>
-'''Calculating Stiffnesses'''
+<math>S_{26} = \frac{M}{\delta_{ye}} = \frac{-1332}{0.216} =</math>-6166 (kip/rad.)
+f) For S<sub>66</sub>:
-The pile lateral translational spring constants are determined using estimated soil properties and the COM624P computer program (Wang and Reese, 1993) or any other programs that utilize non-linear p-y curves for either single piles or a pile group.
+Since 1332 k-in. is closer to 1400 k-in., the S<sub>66</sub> can be obtained from TEST6.OUT as
+[[image:751.9.2.6.4 1332 k in.jpg|center|370px]]
-) First, set up the soil depth profile at the pile location. Use the boring data and the bridge profile plot to determine the SPT blowcounts along the pile length.
+Total rotation at top of the pile θ<sub>ze</sub> = 0.0132/5 = 0.0026 rad.
-) For a given soil profile, the pile lateral force-lateral deflection curve at the top of pile (pile head) can be obtained by applying incremental lateral forces at the pile head, the program then calculates the corresponding lateral deflections at the pile head. The material non-linearity of the pile is also considered in the program. Similarly, pile moment-rotational curve at the top of pile can be obtained by the COM624P program.
+<math>S_{66} = \frac{M}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{1400}{0.0026} =</math> 538460 k-in./rad.
-Since the response spectrum method is based on linear analysis, the secant modulus stiffness is used to represent the equivalent linear stiffness. The secant modulus stiffness is defined as the slope between two points at which the lateral loads are equal to zero and P(M<sub>u</sub>)/2, where Mu is the ultimate moment capacity of the pile; P(M<sub>u</sub>) represents the lateral load at which Mu is developed in the pile. The ultimate moment capacity of CIP pile or composite concrete-steel shell pile is based on the limit state of concrete strain, ε<sub>c</sub>=0.003 and the steel shell strain, ε<sub>s</sub>=0.015. The ultimate moment capacity of steel HP pile is equal to the plastic moment, M<sub>p</sub>, of the pile under constant axial load due to superstructure and substructure loads.
+<math>S_{62} = \frac{-P}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{-27.2}{0.0026} =</math> -10460 kip/rad.
-) It should be recognized that using the secant stiffness approach (including axial, lateral, and rotational stiffness) in the seismic analysis is an approximation method to simplify the time consuming non-linear dynamic analysis following the load-deformation relationship of the pile head. In general, using the secant stiffness approach in conjunction with the pile
+Since the program performs structural analysis using symmetric stiffness
-stress check described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis]] gives reasonable solutions in the design process without conducting an iterative procedure.
+matrix, use average number for S<sub>62</sub> and S<sub>26</sub> approximately: S<sub>26</sub> = S<sub>62</sub> = (−6166 − 10460)/2 = -8313 (kip/rad.)
-'''Example 6.1.2.6.4.''' Find the stiffness of an individual pile at the groundline level which represents the characteristics of the soil–pile interactions.
+g) For axial stiffness S<sub>11</sub>:
+<math>\frac{AE}{L} = \frac{15.5 \times 29000}{25 \times 12} =</math> 1498.33 kip/in
-<u>Description:</u> A pile-cap bent with four steel HP12 x 53 piles is shown in Fig.  751.9.2.6.4.1. The bent has skew of 54.5 degrees. For individual piles, the stiffnesses of pile-soil interaction are estimated using COM624P computer program, then these stiffnesses are used to form Point elements in the structural model as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.2. The point elements are located at the ground level which represent the characteristics of the pile-soil
+h) For torsional stiffness S<sub>44</sub>: GJ/L = (11100 x 1.12)/(25 x 12) = 41.44 kip-in/rad. Usually, the torsional effect of an individual pile is insignificant for the multiple-column
-interactions.
+bent.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.4.1.jpg|center|500px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1 Intermediate Pile Bent'''</center>]]
+Therefore, the stiffness matrix of the pile at the groundline level corresponding to the pile element coordinate system (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) is:
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="280px" align="right"
+[[image:751.9.2.6.4 xyz.jpg|center|375px]]
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.3 Test5out.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.3 Test 5.out]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.4 Test6out.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.4 Test 6.out]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.4 Test6out2.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.4 Test 6.out, second page]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.5 Test5Bout.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.5 Test 5B.out]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.6 Test6Bout.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.6 Test 6B.out]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.4.6 Test6Bout2.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.6 Test 6B.out, second page]]
-|}
-The soil is classified as stiff clay with c = 2 ksf; γ= 0.069 pci; ε<sub>50</sub>= 0.007; and k =400 pci, where c is the undrained shear strength of clay; γ is effective unit weight; ε<sub>50</sub> is the strain corresponding to one-half the maximum principle stress difference; and k is the variation of soil modulus.
+'''Pile Group Effects:'''
-In order to formulate the stiffnesses of pile-soil interaction, the computer program COM624P is used to obtain the translational, rotational and rotational-translational coupling stiffnesses for joints 9, 10, 11, and 12 (see Fig. 751.9.6.1.2.6.4.2). The COM624P output for fixed head and applied lateral forces in the y<sub>e</sub> direction, hinge head and applied moment in the z<sub>e</sub> direction, fixed head and applied lateral forces in the z<sub>e</sub> direction, and hinge head and applied moments in the y<sub>e</sub> direction are shown in the output files TEST5.OUT, TEST6.OUT, TEST5B.OUT, and TEST6B.OUT, respectively.
+Design pile footings with a center to center spacing of more than or equal to 3 pile diameters.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.4.2.jpg|center|725px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.2 Structural Model'''</center>]]
+For center to center pile spacing of 3 pile diameters, it is suggested that a p multiplier, P<sub>m</sub>, value of 0.8 be used to modify the p-y curve of individual piles along the lead row, 0.4 for the second row, and 0.3 for the third and subsequent rows. For larger center to center spacings, these P<sub>m</sub> values should be conservative. Alternatively, using a P<sub>m</sub> = 0.5 for all piles to represent the average adjustment factor is adequate in practical design for earthquake loadings. For center to center pile spacings of 6 pile diameters, the pile group effect can be neglected. For pile spacings between 3 and 6 pile diameters, us a linear interpolation between p multipliers of 0.5 and 1.0.
-From the TEST5.out and TEST6.out outputs, the stiffnesses of point element S<sub>33</sub> (or S(3,3)), S<sub>35</sub> (or S(3,5)), S<sub>55</sub>, S<sub>22</sub>, S<sub>26</sub>, and S<sub>66</sub> can be calculated as follows:
+'''p-y Curves for Liquefied Soil:'''
-a) For S<sub>33</sub>:
+The p-multiplier of 0.1 can be used for liquefied soil (MCEER Report 98-0018, 1998). If p-multipliers are not used, the residual shear strength of the liquefied soil can be used in accordance with [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.5 Liquifaction|EPG 751.9.2.5]] where the soil type is determined from the residual shear strength soil property correlations that can be used for the p-y analysis.
-Plastic moment M<sub>pye</sub> = 1159.2 k-in.
+====751.9.2.6.5 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness - Linear Subgrade Modulus Method====
-<math>M = \frac{M_{pye}}{2} =</math> 579.6 k-in, which is close to M=548 k-in in the SUMMARY
+The lateral load-deflection characteristics of the pile-soil system are mildly nonlinear. The elastic pile usually dominates the nonlinear soil stiffness. Furthermore, the significant soil-pile interaction zone is usually confined to a depth at the upper 5 to 10 pile diameters. Therefore, simplified single-layer pile-head stiffness design charts are appropriate for lateral loading. The stiffness charts shown in figures 6.1.2.6.5-1 – 6.1.2.6.5-4 make use of a
-TABLE of TEST5B.OUT
+discrete Winkler spring soil model in which stiffness increases linearly with depth from zero at grade level where the location of the pile head is assumed. This linear subgrade stiffness model has been found to reasonably fit pile load test data for both sand and clay soil conditions. The coefficient f in these figures is used to define the subgrade modulus E<sub>s</sub> at depth z, representing the soil stiffness per unit pile length. Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.5 and 751.9.2.6.5.6 show f values for piles embedded in sand and clay respectively (assuming elastic pile). For the purpose of selecting an appropriate f value, the soil condition at the upper 5 pile diameters should be used.
-<math> S_{33} = \frac{P}{\delta_{ze}} = \frac{20\ kip}{0.14\ in.} =</math> 142.9 k/in.
+These stiffness charts are appropriate for piles with embedded length greater than 3 times the pile characteristic length, λ. The following equation can be used to obtain the characteristic length of pile-soil system:
-b) For S<sub>35</sub>:
+:<math>\lambda = \Big( \frac{EI_p}{f}\Big)^{1/5}</math>  (1)
-<math> S_35 = \frac{M}{\delta_{ze}} = \frac{548}{0.14} =</math>3914 (kip/rad)in which δ is the lateral displacement at pile head.
+'''Embedment Effect'''
-c) For S<sub>55</sub>:
+Soil resistance on the pile increases and the stiffness coefficients at the pile head increase with the depth of embedment due to additional overburden. Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.7 – 751.9.2.6.5.9 present pile head stiffness coeficients for pile embedment depths of 5 and ten ft. based on a subgrade modulus, which increases linearly with depth.
-Since 579.6 k-in is close to 600 k-in, S55 can be obtained from TEST6B.OUT as
+'''Pile Response and Load Distribution'''
-[[image:751.9.2.6.4 579.6 k in.jpg|center|370px]]
+The pile lateral and moment distribution can be estimated by the equations shown in the Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.10 and 751.9.2.6.5.11 for non-embedded and embedded piles respectively. In the figures, the A and B shape functions are non-dimensional and can be used to solve for the pile deflections and moments along the pile including the fixed pile head condition. Tables
+.9.6.5.1 – 751.9.2.6.5.7 give the data of the shape functions.
-Total rotation at top of the pile is θ<sub>ye</sub>= 0.0123/5 = 0.0025 rad.
+'''Example 1:'''
-<math>S_{55} = \frac{M}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{600}{0.0025} = </math>240000(k-in/rad.)
+Find the stiffness matrix of a vertical pile shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1 at the groundline level.
-<math>S_{53} = \frac{P}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{16.2}{0.0025} = </math>6480(kip/rad.)
+:'''Solution"
+[[image:751.9.2.6.5 yz.jpg|left|125px]]
-Since the program performs structural analysis using symmetric stiffness matrix, use average number for S<sub>35</sub> and S<sub>53</sub> approximately: S35 = S53 = (3914+6480)/2 = 5200 (kip/rad.)
+) Calculate S<sub>33</sub>:
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
-d) For S<sub>22</sub>:
+|-
+|'''EPG 751.9.2.6.5 Figures'''
-Plastic moment M<sub>pze</sub>= 2664 kip-in.
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.1.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.1]]
-M = (M<sub>pze</sub>)/2 = 1332 kip-in. (From TEST5.OUT SUMMARY TABLE, it is between 1100 k-in. and 1630 k-in.)
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.2.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2]]
-<math>\frac {1332 - 1100}{1630 - 1100} = \frac{232}{530} = 0.438</math>
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.3.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3]]
-<math>S_{22} = \frac{P}{\delta_{ye}} = \frac{30 + (0.438 \times 10)}{0.159 +(0.438 \times (0.289 - 0.159))} = \frac{34.38}{0.216} =</math>159.2 (kip/in.)
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.4.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.4]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.5.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.5]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.6.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.7.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.8.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.8]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.9.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.9]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.10.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.10]]
+|-
+|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.11.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.11]]
+|}
-e) For S<sub>26</sub:>
+EI<sub>y</sub> = 29000 ksi x 127 in<sup>4</sup> = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> # - in<sup>4</sup>
-<math>S_{26} = \frac{M}{\delta_{ye}} = \frac{-1332}{0.216} =</math>-6166 (kip/rad.)
+From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6: for clay with undrained shear strength of 2 ksf, f = 32 pci
-f) For S<sub>66</sub>:
+From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.1, using EI = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> # - in<sup>2</sup> and f = 32 pci,
-Since 1332 k-in. is closer to 1400 k-in., the S<sub>66</sub> can be obtained from TEST6.OUT as
+:S<sub>33</sub> = 5.5 x 10<sup>4</sup> lb/in
-[[image:751.9.2.6.4 1332 k in.jpg|center|370px]]
-Total rotation at top of the pile θ<sub>ze</sub> = 0.0132/5 = 0.0026 rad.
+) Calculate S<sub>55</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2, using the same EI and f as in 1), S<sub>55</sub> = 1.2 x 10<sup>8</sup> lb-in/rad. = 120000 k-in/rad.
-<math>S_{66} = \frac{M}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{1400}{0.0026} =</math> 538460 k-in./rad.
+) Calculated S<sub>35</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3, using the same EI and f as 1), S<sub>35</sub> = 2.2 x 10<sup>6</sup> lb/rad. = 2200 k/rad.
-<math>S_{62} = \frac{-P}{\theta_{ye}} = \frac{-27.2}{0.0026} =</math> -10460 kip/rad.
+) Calculate S<sub>22</sub>: EI<sub>z</sub> = 11397000 k-in<sup>2</sup> = 1.1 x 10<sup>10</sup> #-in<sup>2</sup>
-Since the program performs structural analysis using symmetric stiffness
+From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.11, using new EI and the same f as above: S<sub>22</sub> = 8.5 x 10<sup>4</sup> lb/in
-matrix, use average number for S<sub>62</sub> and S<sub>26</sub> approximately: S<sub>26</sub> = S<sub>62</sub> = (−6166 − 10460)/2 = -8313 (kip/rad.)
-g) For axial stiffness S<sub>11</sub>:
+) Calculate S<sub>66</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2, using the same EI and f from 4): S<sub>66</sub> = 2.7 x 10<sup>8</sup> lb-in/rad. = 270000 k-in/rad.
-<math>\frac{AE}{L} = \frac{15.5 \times 29000}{25 \times 12} =</math> 1498.33 kip/in
-h) For torsional stiffness S<sub>44</sub>: GJ/L = (11100 x 1.12)/(25 x 12) = 41.44 kip-in/rad. Usually, the torsional effect of an individual pile is insignificant for the multiple-column
+) Calculate S<sub>26</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3, using the same EI and f from 4): S<sub>26</sub> = 4 x 10<sup>6</sup> lb/rad. = 4000 k/rad.
-bent.
-Therefore, the stiffness matrix of the pile at the groundline level corresponding to the pile element coordinate system (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) is:
+) S<sub>11</sub> and S<sub>44</sub> are the same as calculated in Example 1 in EPG 751.9.2.6.4.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.4 xyz.jpg|center|375px]]
+The completed stiffness matrix is as follows:
-'''Pile Group Effects:'''
+[[image:751.9.2.6.5 matrix.jpg|center|610px]]
+In comparison with the stiffness matrix calculated in Example 1 from [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]], there are some discrepancies between the two matrices. The reason for the discrepancies is because the linear subgrade modulus method (Lam, et al, 1991) is originally derived using a 1 inch deflection of the pile head in clay as shown on the figure below.
-Design pile footings with a center to center spacing of more than or equal to 3 pile diameters.
+[[image:751.9.2.6.5 deflection.jpg|center|500px]]
-For center to center pile spacing of 3 pile diameters, it is suggested that a p multiplier, P<sub>m</sub>, value of 0.8 be used to modify the p-y curve of individual piles along the lead row, 0.4 for the second row, and 0.3 for the third and subsequent rows. For larger center to center spacings, these P<sub>m</sub> values should be conservative. Alternatively, using a P<sub>m</sub> = 0.5 for all piles to represent the average adjustment factor is adequate in practical design for earthquake loadings. For center to center pile spacings of 6 pile diameters, the pile group effect can be neglected. For pile spacings between 3 and 6 pile diameters, us a linear interpolation between p multipliers of 0.5 and 1.0.
+From the above figure, it is recommended using the secant stiffness approach for the pile stiffness estimation as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4. If a p-y curve based computer program is not available, the linear subgrade modulus method may be used to estimate pile stiffness and moment distribution along a pile. However, using the linear subgrade modulus method may result in a significant underestimation of pile stiffness when a dynamic structural analysis shows that pile deflection is much less than 1 inch.
-'''p-y Curves for Liquefied Soil:'''
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
-The p-multiplier of 0.1 can be used for liquefied soil (MCEER Report 98-0018, 1998). If p-multipliers are not used, the residual shear strength of the liquefied soil can be used in accordance with [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.5 Liquifaction|EPG 751.9.2.5]] where the soil type is determined from the residual shear strength and the corresponding soil parameters in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#Table 751.9.2.4.1 Soil Property Correlations|Table 751.9.2.4.1 Soil Property Correlations]] can be used for the p-y analysis.
+|'''EPG 751.9.2.6.5 Tables'''
+|-
-====751.9.2.6.5 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness - Linear Subgrade Modulus Method====
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.1.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.1]]
+|-
-The lateral load-deflection characteristics of the pile-soil system are mildly nonlinear. The elastic pile usually dominates the nonlinear soil stiffness. Furthermore, the significant soil-pile interaction zone is usually confined to a depth at the upper 5 to 10 pile diameters. Therefore, simplified single-layer pile-head stiffness design charts are appropriate for lateral loading. The stiffness charts shown in figures 6.1.2.6.5-1 – 6.1.2.6.5-4 make use of a
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.2.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.2]]
-discrete Winkler spring soil model in which stiffness increases linearly with depth from zero at grade level where the location of the pile head is assumed. This linear subgrade stiffness model has been found to reasonably fit pile load test data for both sand and clay soil conditions. The coefficient f in these figures is used to define the subgrade modulus E<sub>s</sub> at depth z, representing the soil stiffness per unit pile length. Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.5 and 751.9.2.6.5.6 show f values for piles embedded in sand and clay respectively (assuming elastic pile). For the purpose of selecting an appropriate f value, the soil condition at the upper 5 pile diameters should be used.
+|-
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.3.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.3]]
+|-
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.4.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.4]]
+|-
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.5.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.5]]
+|-
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.6.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.6]]
+|-
+|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.7.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.7]]
+|}
-These stiffness charts are appropriate for piles with embedded length greater than 3 times the pile characteristic length, λ. The following equation can be used to obtain the characteristic length of pile-soil system:
+Note: For the following example, λ = T from Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.10 & 751.9.2.6.5.11 and Tables 751.9.2.6.5.1 through 751.9.2.6.5.7.
-:<math>\lambda = \Big( \frac{EI_p}{f}\Big)^{1/5}</math>  (1)
+'''Example 2:'''
-'''Embedment Effect'''
+Find: a) the lateral stiffness of the embedded pile-head, S<sub>33</sub> shown below.
+[[image:751.9.2.6.5 embedded pilehead.jpg|left|260px]]
+:b) the moment distribution and lateral deflection along the pile using the linear subgrade modulus method.
-Soil resistance on the pile increases and the stiffness coefficients at the pile head increase with the depth of embedment due to additional overburden. Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.7 – 751.9.2.6.5.9 present pile head stiffness coeficients for pile embedment depths of 5 and ten ft. based on a subgrade modulus, which increases linearly with depth.
+:pile-head is fixed
+:c = 2 ksf
+:γ = 0.069 pci
+:ε<sub>50</sub> = 0.007
+:k = 400 pci
+:EI<sub>y</sub> = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> #-in = 3.6 x 10<sup>6</sup> k-in<sup>2</sup>
-'''Pile Response and Load Distribution'''
+'''Solve:'''
+a) Using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6 with c = 2 ksf, f = 32 pci
-The pile lateral and moment distribution can be estimated by the equations shown in the Figs. 751.9.2.6.5.10 and 751.9.2.6.5.11 for non-embedded and embedded piles respectively. In the figures, the A and B shape functions are non-dimensional and can be used to solve for the pile deflections and moments along the pile including the fixed pile head condition. Tables
+:Using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7 with EI<sub>y</sub> = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> #-in<sup>2</sup> and f = 32 pci,
-.9.6.5.1 – 751.9.2.6.5.7 give the data of the shape functions.
-'''Example 1:'''
+:S<sub>33</sub> ≈ 1.05 x 10<Sup>5</sup> #/in = 105 k/in
+b) From eq (1), the characteristic length:
+:::<math>\lambda = \Big( \frac{EI_y}{f}\Big)^{1/5} = \Big( \frac{3.6 \times10^9\ lb-in^2}{32 pci}\Big)^{1/5}</math> = 40.76 in
+:E<sub>so</sub>= f x 4ft = (32 pci) (4 x 12) = 1536 psi
+:<math> \frac{E_{so}}{f \times \lambda} = \frac{1536}{32 \times40.76} = </math>1.178, use Table 751.9.2.6.5.5 (E<sub>so</sub> ≈ 1.0)
+from Fig.751.9.2.6.5.11:
+:Slope, S = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^2}{EI}A_s + \frac{M_t\lambda}{EI}B_s </math> (a)
+:Deflection, y = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}A_y + \frac{M_t\lambda^2}{EI}B_y </math> (b)
-Find the stiffness matrix of a vertical pile shown in Fig. 751.9.2.6.4.1 at the groundline level.
+:Moment, M = (P<sub>t</sub>λ)A<sub>m</sub> + M<sub>t</sub>B<sub>m</sub> (c)
-:'''Solution"
+For a fixed-head pile: S=0
-[[image:751.9.2.6.5 yz.jpg|left|125px]]
-) Calculate S<sub>33</sub>:
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''EPG 751.9.2.6.5 Figures'''
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.1.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.1]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.2.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.3.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.4.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.4]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.5.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.5]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.6.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.7.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.8.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.8]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.9.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.9]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.10.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.10]]
-|-
-|[[media:751.9.2.6.5.11.jpg|Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.11]]
-|}
-EI<sub>y</sub> = 29000 ksi x 127 in<sup>4</sup> = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> # - in<sup>4</sup>
+Substituting S=0 into eq (a),
-From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6: for clay with undrained shear strength of 2 ksf, f = 32 pci
+S = 0 =<math> \frac{P_t\lambda^2}{EI}A_s + \frac{M_t\lambda}{EI}B_s </math>, Where A<sub>s</sub> and B<sub>s</sub> are coefficients at the pilehead
-From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.1, using EI = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> # - in<sup>2</sup> and f = 32 pci,
+:= λA<sub>s</sub> + (M<sub>t</sub> / P<sub>t</sub>)B<sub>s</sub>
-:S<sub>33</sub> = 5.5 x 10<sup>4</sup> lb/in
+:∴(M<sub>t</sub> / P<sub>t</sub>) = -λ(A<sub>s</sub> / B<sub>s</sub>) (d) Where λ= = 40.76in.
-) Calculate S<sub>55</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2, using the same EI and f as in 1), S<sub>55</sub> = 1.2 x 10<sup>8</sup> lb-in/rad. = 120000 k-in/rad.
+From Table 751.9.2.6.5.5:  A<sub>s</sub> = -0.879 and B<sub>s</sub> = -1.290 ∴ (A<sub>s</sub> / B<sub>s</sub>) = 0.681
-) Calculated S<sub>35</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3, using the same EI and f as 1), S<sub>35</sub> = 2.2 x 10<sup>6</sup> lb/rad. = 2200 k/rad.
+Substituting eq (d) into eq (c),
-) Calculate S<sub>22</sub>: EI<sub>z</sub> = 11397000 k-in<sup>2</sup> = 1.1 x 10<sup>10</sup> #-in<sup>2</sup>
+:Moment M = (P<sub>t</sub>λ)A<sub>m</sub> +M<sub>t</sub>B<sub>m</sub>
-From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.11, using new EI and the same f as above: S<sub>22</sub> = 8.5 x 10<sup>4</sup> lb/in
+:::= <math>P_t\lambda\big(A_m + \frac{M_t}{P_t\lambda}B_m\big)</math>
+:::= <math>P_t\lambda\big(A_m - \frac{A_s}{B_s}B_m\big)</math>
-) Calculate S<sub>66</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.2, using the same EI and f from 4): S<sub>66</sub> = 2.7 x 10<sup>8</sup> lb-in/rad. = 270000 k-in/rad.
+:::= (10 kips x 40.76 in)(A<sub>m</sub> - 0.681B<sub>m</sub>)
+:::= 407.6 (A<sub>m</sub> - 0.681B<sub>m</sub>) kip-in (e)
+Using Table 751.9.2.6.5.5,the following table is created:
+[[image:751.9.2.6.5 moment.jpg|center|600px]]
+Substituting eq (d) into eq (b)
-) Calculate S<sub>26</sub>: From Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.3, using the same EI and f from 4): S<sub>26</sub> = 4 x 10<sup>6</sup> lb/rad. = 4000 k/rad.
+:y = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}A_y + \frac{M_t\lambda^2}{EI}B_y </math>
-) S<sub>11</sub> and S<sub>44</sub> are the same as calculated in Example 1 in EPG 751.9.2.6.4.
+:: = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}\big(A_y + \frac{M_t\lambda^2}{P_t\lambda}B_y \big) </math>
-The completed stiffness matrix is as follows:
-[[image:751.9.2.6.5 matrix.jpg|center|610px]]
+:: = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}\big(A_y - \frac{A_s}{B_s}B_y\big) </math>
-In comparison with the stiffness matrix calculated in Example 1 from [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]], there are some discrepancies between the two matrices. The reason for the discrepancies is because the linear subgrade modulus method (Lam, et al, 1991) is originally derived using a 1 inch deflection of the pile head in clay as shown on the figure below.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.5 deflection.jpg|center|500px]]
+:: = <math> \frac{10 \times(40.76)^3}{3.6 \times 10^6}\big(A_y - 0.681B_y\big) </math>
-From the above figure, it is recommended using the secant stiffness approach for the pile stiffness estimation as described in EPG 751.9.2.6.4. If a p-y curve based computer program is not available, the linear subgrade modulus method may be used to estimate pile stiffness and moment distribution along a pile. However, using the linear subgrade modulus method may result in a significant underestimation of pile stiffness when a dynamic structural analysis shows that pile deflection is much less than 1 inch.
+:: = 0.188(A<sub>y</sub> - 0.681B<sub>y</sub>) (f)
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+Using Table 751.9.2.6.5.5, the following table is created:
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="660px" align="center"
 |-
-|'''EPG 751.9.2.6.5 Tables'''
+|rowspan="2"|Z/λ ||rowspan="2"|Depth (z), in. || Coefficients||rowspan="2"| Deflection From eq (f)
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.1.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.1]]
+|A<sub>y</sub>|| B<sub>y</sub>
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.2.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.2]]
+|0.0|| 0.00|| 1.097|| 0.879 ||0.0937 in
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.3.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.3]]
+|0.2|| 8.15|| 0.923|| 0.641|| 0.0915 in
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.4.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.4]]
+|0.4|| 16.30|| 0.755|| 0.442|| 0.0854 in
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.5.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.5]]
+|0.8|| 32.60 ||0.460 ||0.153|| 0.0669 in
+|-
+|1.2|| 48.91|| 0.236 ||-0.012 ||0.0459 in
+|-
+|1.6|| 65.22|| 0.087|| -0.087|| 0.0275 in
+|-
+|2.0|| 81.52|| 0.001|| -0.104|| 0.0135 in
+|-
+|3.0|| 122.3|| -0.044|| -0.051|| -0.0017 in
+|-
+|3.5|| 142.7|| -0.031|| -0.023|| -0.0029 in
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.6.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.6]]
+|4.0|| 163.0|| -0.016|| -0.006|| -0.0022 in
 |-
-|[[media:Table 751.9.2.6.5.7.jpg|Table 751.9.2.6.5.7]]
+|5.0|| 203.8|| 0.000|| 0.004|| -0.0005 in
 |}
-Note: For the following example, λ = T from Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.10 & 751.9.2.6.5.11 and Tables 751.9.2.6.5.1 through 751.9.2.6.5.7.
+Check the pile stiffness: S<sub>33</sub> = 10kips/0.0937in. = 107 k/in. which is very close to the value calculated in a) using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7.
+====751.9.2.6.6 Drilled Shaft Lateral and Rotational Stiffnesses====
-'''Example 2:'''
+The diameter of the drilled shaft is usually much bigger than the typical piles used by MoDOT and the aspect ratio (length to diameter) is usually smaller for drilled shafts. Due to a smaller aspect ratio, the magnitude of rotation of the shaft can be more significant than for a pile. Therefore, the rotational resistance along the length and at the tip of the shaft, which is neglected for a typical pile, could be very significant. For simplicity, the procedure of using p-y curves for piles is recommended for drilled shafts. However, a scaling factor (larger than unity) shall be applied to either the linear subgrade modulus, Es, or the resistance value (p) of the p-y curves for shaft diameters greater than 24 inches. The scaling factor is the ratio of the shaft diameter to a 24 in. diameter shaft (Lam 1998).
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|Volume II of report #FHWA/RD-86/102, sections 5.0-5.8
+|}
-Find: a) the lateral stiffness of the embedded pile-head, S<sub>33</sub> shown below.
+====751.9.2.6.7 Spread Footing Stiffness, Equivalent Circular Footing Method====
-[[image:751.9.2.6.5 embedded pilehead.jpg|left|260px]]
-:b) the moment distribution and lateral deflection along the pile using the linear subgrade modulus method.
-:pile-head is fixed
+For spread footings and caps of pile footings, the general form of stiffness matrix is summarized in the figure below, (Lam and Martin, 1986).
-:c = 2 ksf
-:γ = 0.069 pci
-:ε<sub>50</sub> = 0.007
-:k = 400 pci
-:EI<sub>y</sub> = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> #-in = 3.6 x 10<sup>6</sup> k-in<sup>2</sup>
-'''Solve:'''
+[[image:751.9.2.6.7 matrix.jpg|center|650px|thumb|'''<center>Spread Footing Foundation Matrix, [K<sub>0</sub>]'''</center>]]
-a) Using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.6 with c = 2 ksf, f = 32 pci
-:Using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7 with EI<sub>y</sub> = 3.6 x 10<sup>9</sup> #-in<sup>2</sup> and f = 32 pci,
+For spread footings, this is the master joint stiffness matrix located at the center of gravity of the footing. For pile footings, this stiffness matrix should be combined with the pile stiffness matrices using rigid body transformation. In general, the off-diagonal (cross-coupling) terms can be neglected, for two reasons: 1) the values of the off-diagonal terms are small, especially for shallow footings, and 2) they are difficult to compute. However, for some
+unusual deeply-embedded footings where the ratio of embedment depth to equivalent diameter is greater than five, the contribution of stiffness from the cross-coupling terms may need to be included.
-:S<sub>33</sub> ≈ 1.05 x 10<Sup>5</sup> #/in = 105 k/in
+'''Stiffness Matrix'''
-b) From eq (1), the characteristic length:
+The stifness matrix [K], of an embedded footing can be express as:
-:::<math>\lambda = \Big( \frac{EI_y}{f}\Big)^{1/5} = \Big( \frac{3.6 \times10^9\ lb-in^2}{32 pci}\Big)^{1/5}</math> = 40.76 in
+:[K] = α ∗ β ∗ [K0] where:
-:E<sub>so</sub>= f x 4ft = (32 pci) (4 x 12) = 1536 psi
+::[K0] = the stiffness matrix of an equivalent circular surface footing from the above figure.
-:<math> \frac{E_{so}}{f \times \lambda} = \frac{1536}{32 \times40.76} = </math>1.178, use Table 751.9.2.6.5.5 (E<sub>so</sub> ≈ 1.0)
+::α = the foundation shape correction factor using L/B from Fig. 751.9.2.6 Shape Factor and:
+:::2L = the longer of the footing length or width in feet.
+:::2B = the shorter of the footing length or width in feet.
+::β = the foundation embedment factor using D/R from Fig. 751.9.2.6 Embedment Factor and:
+:::D = footing thickness in feet
+:::R = equivalent footing radius as defined in the figure below, in feet. Note that R is different for different modes of displacement.
-from Fig.751.9.2.6.5.11:
+[[image:751.9.2.6.7 equiv rad.jpg|center|450px|thumb|'''<center>Equivalent Radius of Rectangular Footings'''</center>]]
-:Slope, S = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^2}{EI}A_s + \frac{M_t\lambda}{EI}B_s </math> (a)
+'''Equivalent Radius'''
+:Translational:<math> R = \sqrt \frac{4BL}{\pi} </math> (Translation about any axis)
-:Deflection, y = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}A_y + \frac{M_t\lambda^2}{EI}B_y </math> (b)
+:Rotational:<math> R_1=\Bigg[ \frac{(2B)(2L)^3}{3\pi}\Bigg]^{(1/4)}</math> (Rocking about the 1-axis)
+:::<math> R_3=\Bigg[ \frac{(2B)^3(2L)}{3\pi}\Bigg]^{(1/4)}</math> (Rocking about the 3-axis)
-:Moment, M = (P<sub>t</sub>λ)A<sub>m</sub> + M<sub>t</sub>B<sub>m</sub> (c)
+:::Torsional: <math> R_2=\Bigg[ \frac{4BL(4B^3 + 4L^2)}{6\pi}\Bigg]^{(1/4)}</math> (Torsion about the 2-axis)
-For a fixed-head pile: S=0
+'''Stiffness Coefficients'''
-Substituting S=0 into eq (a),
+:Horizontal translation (KF1F1) = <math>\frac{8GR}{2 - \nu}</math>
-S = 0 =<math> \frac{P_t\lambda^2}{EI}A_s + \frac{M_t\lambda}{EI}B_s </math>, Where A<sub>s</sub> and B<sub>s</sub> are coefficients at the pilehead
+:Vertical translation (KF2F2) = <math>\frac{4GR}{1 - \nu}</math>
-:= λA<sub>s</sub> + (M<sub>t</sub> / P<sub>t</sub>)B<sub>s</sub>
+:Horizontal translation (KF3F3) = <math>\frac{8GR}{2 - \nu}</math>
-:∴(M<sub>t</sub> / P<sub>t</sub>) = -λ(A<sub>s</sub> / B<sub>s</sub>) (d) Where λ= = 40.76in.
+:Rocking rotation (KM1M1) = <math>\frac{8GR_{1}^{3}}{3(1 - \nu)}</math>
-From Table 751.9.2.6.5.5:  A<sub>s</sub> = -0.879 and B<sub>s</sub> = -1.290 ∴ (A<sub>s</sub> / B<sub>s</sub>) = 0.681
+:Torsional rotation (KM2M2) = <math>\frac{16GR_{2}^{3}}{3}</math>
-Substituting eq (d) into eq (c),
+:Rocking rotation (KM1M1) = <math>\frac{8GR_{3}^{3}}{3(1 - \nu)}</math>
-:Moment M = (P<sub>t</sub>λ)A<sub>m</sub> +M<sub>t</sub>B<sub>m</sub>
+:Where:
+::G = Shear modulus for the soil directly beneath the footing, ksf
-:::= <math>P_t\lambda\big(A_m + \frac{M_t}{P_t\lambda}B_m\big)</math>
+:::= <math>\frac{E}{2(1 + \nu)}</math>, where E and ν are from EPG 751.9.2.4
-:::= <math>P_t\lambda\big(A_m - \frac{A_s}{B_s}B_m\big)</math>
-:::= (10 kips x 40.76 in)(A<sub>m</sub> - 0.681B<sub>m</sub>)
+:::ν = Poisson’s Ratio for the soil directly beneath the footing
-:::= 407.6 (A<sub>m</sub> - 0.681B<sub>m</sub>) kip-in (e)
-Using Table 751.9.2.6.5.5,the following table is created:
+Three idealized embedment conditions are represented in the figure below. To consider all of the cases of embedment effects, β would normally be a function of R, D and h. However, report # FHWA/RD-86/102 (Volume II) shows that the effects of ground cover and excavations can be ignored, and the situation depicted in Case 1 can be used to approximate the conditions in
+Case 2 and 3. Therefore, β can be determined based solely on D/R from Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Embedment Factor for all three of the above cases.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.5 moment.jpg|center|600px]]
+[[image:751.9.2.6.7 embedment cases.jpg|center|700px]]
-Substituting eq (d) into eq (b)
-:y = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}A_y + \frac{M_t\lambda^2}{EI}B_y </math>
+[[image:751.9.2.6.7 Shape factor.jpg|center|750px||thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Shape Factor, α (Lam and Martin 1986)'''</center>]]
+[[image:751.9.2.6.7 Embedment factor.jpg|center|750px||thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Embedment Factor, β'''</center>]]
+===751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation===
+An abutment consists of many translational and rotational springs which represent the interaction between soil and backwall, beam, wings, pile caps and piles as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7A. To reduce the total number of degrees-of-freedom in the analysis and to take into account the geometric relationships among the spring constants, it is attractive to lump all the stiffnesses of these springs from “slave” joints to a “master” joint through a rigid body transformation. Any two joints on the rigid body (e.g. abutment) are constrained such that the deformation of one joint (the slave joint) can be represented by the deformation of the other joint (the master joint). Thus the degrees-of-freedom for the slave joint are transferred to the master joint, and the number of degrees-of-freedom in an abutment is reduced. Fig. 751.9.2.7B depicts the typical joints “j” and “m” for slave and master joints, respectively. For integral abutments, usually the center of gravity of the superstructure is chosen as the “master” joint as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7A. RBT can also be applied to the pile footing by transforming all the pile springs and pile cap springs to an assigned master joint. Usually the master joint is placed at the center of gravity of the pile cap. The RBT takes into account the coupling effects between translational and rotational responses of skewed abutments.
+[[image:751.9.2.7A.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7A Abutment Spring Constants Considered'''</center>]]
+'''1) RBT for Stiffness'''
+Before a seismic structural analysis computer program is run, RBT is used to sum up the stiffness effects of many individual springs (at different "slave joint" locations and in different local element directions) into one equivalent 6 X 6 stiffness matrix (at the "master joint" and in its joint coordinate system).
-:: = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}\big(A_y + \frac{M_t\lambda^2}{P_t\lambda}B_y \big) </math>
+'''2) RBT for Force'''
-:: = <math> \frac{P_t\lambda^3}{EI}\big(A_y - \frac{A_s}{B_s}B_y\big) </math>
+After the seismic structural analysis program has been run, RBT uses the master joint's forces to back-solve for individual forces and displacements at the slave joints. Usually, the master joint's displacements are not used because the displacements are very small and are more difficult to backcalculate.
-:: = <math> \frac{10 \times(40.76)^3}{3.6 \times 10^6}\big(A_y - 0.681B_y\big) </math>
+[[image:751.9.2.7B.jpg|center|450px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7B Master Joint and Slave Joint Relationship'''</center>]]
-:: = 0.188(A<sub>y</sub> - 0.681B<sub>y</sub>) (f)
+'''Iteration of RBT for Stiffness and Force'''
-Using Table 751.9.2.6.5.5, the following table is created:
+:'''A) Abutments'''
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#white" width="660px" align="center"
-|-
-|rowspan="2"|Z/λ ||rowspan="2"|Depth (z), in. || Coefficients||rowspan="2"| Deflection From eq (f)
-|-
-|A<sub>y</sub>|| B<sub>y</sub>
-|-
-|0.0|| 0.00|| 1.097|| 0.879 ||0.0937 in
-|-
-|0.2|| 8.15|| 0.923|| 0.641|| 0.0915 in
-|-
-|0.4|| 16.30|| 0.755|| 0.442|| 0.0854 in
-|-
-|0.8|| 32.60 ||0.460 ||0.153|| 0.0669 in
-|-
-|1.2|| 48.91|| 0.236 ||-0.012 ||0.0459 in
-|-
-|1.6|| 65.22|| 0.087|| -0.087|| 0.0275 in
-|-
-|2.0|| 81.52|| 0.001|| -0.104|| 0.0135 in
-|-
-|3.0|| 122.3|| -0.044|| -0.051|| -0.0017 in
-|-
-|3.5|| 142.7|| -0.031|| -0.023|| -0.0029 in
-|-
-|4.0|| 163.0|| -0.016|| -0.006|| -0.0022 in
-|-
-|5.0|| 203.8|| 0.000|| 0.004|| -0.0005 in
-|}
-Check the pile stiffness: S<sub>33</sub> = 10kips/0.0937in. = 107 k/in. which is very close to the value calculated in a) using Fig. 751.9.2.6.5.7.
+:Sometimes during Iterative Abutment Analysis (see Section 6.1.2.10), it becomes necessary to reduce spring constants at slave joints. If individual stiffnesses are reduced, then (1) and (2) above must be repeated to recompute the master joint stiffness matrix and to recompute the local slave element forces for each new iteration.
-====751.9.2.6.6 Drilled Shaft Lateral and Rotational Stiffnesses====
+:'''B) Pile Footings'''
-The diameter of the drilled shaft is usually much bigger than the typical piles used by MoDOT and the aspect ratio (length to diameter) is usually smaller for drilled shafts. Due to a smaller aspect ratio, the magnitude of rotation of the shaft can be more significant than for a pile. Therefore, the rotational resistance along the length and at the tip of the shaft, which is neglected for a typical pile, could be very significant. For simplicity, the procedure of using p-y curves for piles is recommended for drilled shafts. However, a scaling factor (larger than unity) shall be applied to either the linear subgrade modulus, Es, or the resistance value (p) of the p-y curves for shaft diameters greater than 24 inches. The scaling factor is the ratio of the shaft diameter to a 24 in. diameter shaft (Lam 1998).
+:If pile footing design significantly changes the assumed size and pile geometry of a pile footing, then (1) and (2) above must be repeated to recompute the master joint stiffness matrix and to recompute the local slave element forces for each new iteration. The distribution of seismic forces to bents is by stiffness, relative to each other, so a change in stiffness at one bent affects the force distribution to all bents, particularly the distribution between intermediate bents.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|Volume II of report #FHWA/RD-86/102, sections 5.0-5.8
-|}
-====751.9.2.6.7 Spread Footing Stiffness, Equivalent Circular Footing Method====
+:In order to perform rigid body transformation, several procedures are needed and defined in the remaining portion of EPG 751.9.2.7.
-For spread footings and caps of pile footings, the general form of stiffness matrix is summarized in the figure below, (Lam and Martin, 1986).
+====751.9.2.7.1 Joint Definition and Degrees of Freedom====
-[[image:751.9.2.6.7 matrix.jpg|center|650px|thumb|'''<center>Spread Footing Foundation Matrix, [K<sub>0</sub>]'''</center>]]
+A joint is defined as the point where one or more springs are connected. The assemblage of all springs becomes a structural model. The structural model is built by first defining the location and orientation of each joint.
-For spread footings, this is the master joint stiffness matrix located at the center of gravity of the footing. For pile footings, this stiffness matrix should be combined with the pile stiffness matrices using rigid body transformation. In general, the off-diagonal (cross-coupling) terms can be neglected, for two reasons: 1) the values of the off-diagonal terms are small, especially for shallow footings, and 2) they are difficult to compute. However, for some
+.) <u>Global Coordinate System.</u> The global coordinate system (GCS) defines the location of a structure. The GCS is a cartesian coordinate system, with three perpendicular axes x<sub>g</sub>, y<sub>g</sub> and z<sub>g</sub>. The z<sub>g</sub> axis is defined as x<sub>g</sub> cross y<sub>g</sub> (right hand rule), as shown in the figure below. The location of the GCS’s origin is arbitrary, and usually taken at the base of the structure.
-unusual deeply-embedded footings where the ratio of embedment depth to equivalent diameter is greater than five, the contribution of stiffness from the cross-coupling terms may need to be included (see [http://wwwi/intranet/br/Development.htm Bridge Development Section]).
-'''Stiffness Matrix'''
+.) <u>Joint Coordinate System.</u> The location of a joint is defined by its x<sub>g</sub>, y<sub>g</sub> and z<sub>g</sub> coordinates in the GCS. Each joint is assumed to have six degrees of freedom (dof). The first three dof are translational, and correspond to the joint’s x<sub>j</sub>, y<sub>j</sub> and z<sub>j</sub> axes. The remaining three dof are rotational, about the joint’s x<sub>j</sub>, y<sub>j</sub> and z<sub>j</sub> axes as shown in the figure below. The x<sub>j</sub>, y<sub>j</sub> and z<sub>j</sub> axes define a joint coordinate system (JCS) for a given joint. The JCS may not be parallel to the GCS, and the JCS may vary for different joints. Thus, the orientation of the JCS for a given joint is defined by two vectors <math>\overrightarrow{V}_{xj}</math> and <math>\overrightarrow{V}_{yj}</math>. The origin of the JCS is at the joint. A third vector is then <math>\overrightarrow{V}_{zj} = \overrightarrow{V}_{xj} \times \overrightarrow{V}_{yj}</math>. The three vectors are written in matrix form as:
+[[image:751.9.2.7.1 joint definition.jpg|center|310px]]
-The stifness matrix [K], of an embedded footing can be express as:
+where  <math>\overrightarrow{i}, \overrightarrow{j}</math> and <math>\overrightarrow{k}</math> are unit vectors parallel to the x<sub>g</sub>, y<sub>g</sub> and z<sub>g</sub> axes. Note that the orientation of the JCS determines the orientation of the global degrees of freedom.
-:[K] = α ∗ β ∗ [K0] where:
+[[image:751.9.2.7.1 Global and Joint Coordination System.jpg|center|370px|thumb|<center>'''Global (GCS) and Joint (JCS) Coordination System'''</center>]]
-::[K0] = the stiffness matrix of an equivalent circular surface footing from the above figure.
+====751.9.2.7.2 Rigid Body Constraints====
-::α = the foundation shape correction factor using L/B from Fig. 751.9.2.6 Shape Factor and:
-:::2L = the longer of the footing length or width in feet.
-:::2B = the shorter of the footing length or width in feet.
-::β = the foundation embedment factor using D/R from Fig. 751.9.2.6 Embedment Factor and:
-:::D = footing thickness in feet
-:::R = equivalent footing radius as defined in the figure below, in feet. Note that R is different for different modes of displacement.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.7 equiv rad.jpg|center|450px|thumb|'''<center>Equivalent Radius of Rectangular Footings'''</center>]]
+As shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7.2, summing the forces acting on the slave joint “j” about the master joint “m” in three dimensions, yields the force transformation matrix for a 3D rigid body as follows:
-'''Equivalent Radius'''
+[[image:751.9.2.7.2.jpg|center|570px]]
-:Translational:<math> R = \sqrt \frac{4BL}{\pi} </math> (Translation about any axis)
+where {δ<sub>m</sub>}<sub>j</sub> represents the displacement vector of the master joint, and {δ<sub>s</sub>}<sub>j</sub> represents the displacement vector of the slave joint.
-:Rotational:<math> R_1=\Bigg[ \frac{(2B)(2L)^3}{3\pi}\Bigg]^{(1/4)}</math> (Rocking about the 1-axis)
+====751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System (ECS)====
-:::<math> R_3=\Bigg[ \frac{(2B)^3(2L)}{3\pi}\Bigg]^{(1/4)}</math> (Rocking about the 3-axis)
+Each structural component of an abutment or pile footing such as piles, pile caps, backwalls or wings contain several spring constants in the element coordinate directions. The direction of the individual ECS is defined by the designer. Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 shows some typical ECS for piles, pile caps, backwalls and wings.
-:::Torsional: <math> R_2=\Bigg[ \frac{4BL(4B^3 + 4L^2)}{6\pi}\Bigg]^{(1/4)}</math> (Torsion about the 2-axis)
+[[image:751.9.2.7.3.jpg|center|525px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System'''</center>]]
-'''Stiffness Coefficients'''
+For example, in Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 (b), there are three translational springs, K<sub>11</sub>, K<sub>22</sub>, K<sub>33</sub>, in the ECS’ x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> directions, respectively, and 3 rotational springs, K<sub>44</sub>, K<sub>55</sub>, K<sub>66</sub>, in the ECS’ x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> directions, respectively.
-:Horizontal translation (KF1F1) = <math>\frac{8GR}{2 - \nu}</math>
+====751.9.2.7.4 Transferring Element Force Matrices====
+'''Transferring Spring Element Force Matrix From ECS to GCS'''
-:Vertical translation (KF2F2) = <math>\frac{4GR}{1 - \nu}</math>
+Let the element coordinate system be denoted x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> at a joint. The three vectors that define the orientation of the ECS can be written in matrix form as:
+[[image:751.9.2.7.4 ECS to GCS.jpg|center|540px]]
-:Horizontal translation (KF3F3) = <math>\frac{8GR}{2 - \nu}</math>
-:Rocking rotation (KM1M1) = <math>\frac{8GR_{1}^{3}}{3(1 - \nu)}</math>
+'''Transferring Element Force Matrix From GCS to JCS'''
+[[image:751.9.2.7.4 GCS to JCS.jpg|center|540px]]
-:Torsional rotation (KM2M2) = <math>\frac{16GR_{2}^{3}}{3}</math>
+====751.9.2.7.5 Transferring the Element Stiffness Matrix at Slave Joint “i” in its ECS to Master Joint in the JCS Direction====
-:Rocking rotation (KM1M1) = <math>\frac{8GR_{3}^{3}}{3(1 - \nu)}</math>
+[[image:751.9.2.7.5-1.jpg|center|540px]]
-:Where:
+:'''Example:'''
-::G = Shear modulus for the soil directly beneath the footing, ksf
-:::= <math>\frac{E}{2(1 + \nu)}</math>, where E and ν are from EPG 751.9.2.4
+:Transfer the pile-head stiffness matrix of pile no.2 as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7.5 to the master joint at joint 17. In the figure, the pile footing consists of 16 piles and a rigid pile cap. The GCS (x, y, z) and ECS (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) of the individual piles are also shown in the figure. Let all the joints JCS be in the same direction as the GCS and assume all the slave joints (at pilehead locations) have the same elevations as that of the master joint. The individual pile-head matrix corresponding to the pile ECS is:
-:::ν = Poisson’s Ratio for the soil directly beneath the footing
+[[image:751.9.2.7.5-2.jpg|center|370px]]
+:It is assumed that the rotation and lateral movements at the pile-heads are small. Therefore, the rotational stiffnesses at the pile-head are neglected in this example.
+[[image:751.9.2.7.5.jpg|center|575px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7.5 Pile Footing'''</center>]]
-Three idealized embedment conditions are represented in the figure below. To consider all of the cases of embedment effects, β would normally be a function of R, D and h. However, report # FHWA/RD-86/102 (Volume II) shows that the effects of ground cover and excavations can be ignored, and the situation depicted in Case 1 can be used to approximate the conditions in
+[[image:751.9.2.7.5-3.jpg|center|540px]]
-Case 2 and 3. Therefore, β can be determined based solely on D/R from Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Embedment Factor for all three of the above cases.
-[[image:751.9.2.6.7 embedment cases.jpg|center|700px]]
+[[image:751.9.2.7.5-4.jpg|center|540px]]
-[[image:751.9.2.6.7 Shape factor.jpg|center|750px||thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Shape Factor, α (Lam and Martin 1986)'''</center>]]
+[[image:751.9.2.7.5-5.jpg|center|540px]]
-[[image:751.9.2.6.7 Embedment factor.jpg|center|750px||thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.6.7 Embedment Factor, β'''</center>]]
+===751.9.2.8 Modeling of Intermediate Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Bents===
-===751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation===
+====751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method====
+A rigorous procedure to develop a linear 6x6 pile stiffness matrix at groundline has been described in the example in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]]. Fig. 751.9.2.8.1 illustrates the structural model used by this approach.
-An abutment consists of many translational and rotational springs which represent the interaction between soil and backwall, beam, wings, pile caps and piles as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7A. To reduce the total number of degrees-of-freedom in the analysis and to take into account the geometric relationships among the spring constants, it is attractive to lump all the stiffnesses of these springs from “slave” joints to a “master” joint through a rigid body transformation. Any two joints on the rigid body (e.g. abutment) are constrained such that the deformation of one joint (the slave joint) can be represented by the deformation of the other joint (the master joint). Thus the degrees-of-freedom for the slave joint are transferred to the master joint, and the number of degrees-of-freedom in an abutment is reduced. Fig. 751.9.2.7B depicts the typical joints “j” and “m” for slave and master joints, respectively. For integral abutments, usually the center of gravity of the superstructure is chosen as the “master” joint as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7A. RBT can also be applied to the pile footing by transforming all the pile springs and pile cap springs to an assigned master joint. Usually the master joint is placed at the center of gravity of the pile cap. The RBT takes into account the coupling effects between translational and rotational responses of skewed abutments.
+[[image:751.9.2.8.1.jpg|center|575px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.8.1 Structural Model for Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.2.7A.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7A Abutment Spring Constants Considered'''</center>]]
+The common form of the stiffness matrix in the local pile coordinate system (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) is given in eq. (1) in which the diagonal terms K<sub>x</sub>, K<sub>y</sub>, K<sub>z</sub>, K<sub>θx</sub>, K<sub>θy</sub>, K<sub>θz</sub> are stiffnesses corresponding to translational and rotational degrees of freedom associated with x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> axes, respectively. The off-diagonal terms represent coupling between two degrees of freedom. These stiffness coefficients can be calculated from the solutions presented in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6 Spring Constants|EPG 751.9.2.6]].
-'''1) RBT for Stiffness'''
+[[image:751.9.2.8.1 k pile.jpg|center|350px]]
-Before a seismic structural analysis computer program is run, RBT is used to sum up the stiffness effects of many individual springs (at different "slave joint" locations and in different local element directions) into one equivalent 6 X 6 stiffness matrix (at the "master joint" and in its joint coordinate system).
+====751.9.2.8.2 Equivalent Cantilever Column Method - a Simplied Approach====
-'''2) RBT for Force'''
+In the equivalent cantilever method, the foundation is replaced by a cantilever column that has stiffness approximately equivalent to those of the pile and surrounding soil. This is represented in Fig. 751.9.2.8.2.
-After the seismic structural analysis program has been run, RBT uses the master joint's forces to back-solve for individual forces and displacements at the slave joints. Usually, the master joint's displacements are not used because the displacements are very small and are more difficult to backcalculate.
+[[image:751.9.2.8.2.jpg|center|675px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.8.2 Structural Model for Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.2.7B.jpg|center|450px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7B Master Joint and Slave Joint Relationship'''</center>]]
+This simplified approach may be used if a seismic analysis computer program is not capable of providing user input of a 6x6 stiffness matrix to represent the foundation stiffness at ground level. The stiffness matrix of a equivalent cantilever column can be expressed as:
-'''Iteration of RBT for Stiffness and Force'''
+[[image:751.9.2.8.2 k equiv.jpg|center|450px]]
-:'''A) Abutments'''
+For translational and rotational stiffnesses, it is obvious that only three cantilever model parameters (i.e. EIy, EIz, and L) are not sufficient to satisfy all six stiffness coefficients (four diagonal stiffnesses, K<sub>y</sub>, K<sub>z</sub>, K<sub>θy</sub>, K<sub>θz</sub>, and two cross-coupling stiffness, K<sub>yθz</sub>, K<sub>zθy</sub>) in equation (1) of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method|EPG 751.9.2.8.1]].
-:Sometimes during Iterative Abutment Analysis (see Section 6.1.2.10), it becomes necessary to reduce spring constants at slave joints. If individual stiffnesses are reduced, then (1) and (2) above must be repeated to recompute the master joint stiffness matrix and to recompute the local slave element forces for each new iteration.
+However, the general approach is to match the diagonal stiffness terms K<sub>y</sub>, K<sub>z</sub> and K<sub>θz</sub>. From eqs. (1) and (2):
-:'''B) Pile Footings'''
+[[image:751.9.2.8.2 general approach.jpg|center|520px]]
-:If pile footing design significantly changes the assumed size and pile geometry of a pile footing, then (1) and (2) above must be repeated to recompute the master joint stiffness matrix and to recompute the local slave element forces for each new iteration. The distribution of seismic forces to bents is by stiffness, relative to each other, so a change in stiffness at one bent affects the force distribution to all bents, particularly the distribution between intermediate bents.
+'''Example 751.9.2.8.2:'''
-:In order to perform rigid body transformation, several procedures are needed and defined in the remaining portion of EPG 751.9.2.7.
+Find the equivalent cantilever column’s L, EI<sub>y</sub>, EI<sub>z</sub>, EA and GJ in example 751.9.2.6.4.
-====751.9.2.7.1 Joint Definition and Degrees of Freedom====
+Solve: From Example 751.9.2.6.4,
-A joint is defined as the point where one or more springs are connected. The assemblage of all springs becomes a structural model. The structural model is built by first defining the location and orientation of each joint.
+[[image:751.9.2.8.2 example.jpg|center|500px]]
-.) <u>Global Coordinate System.</u> The global coordinate system (GCS) defines the location of a structure. The GCS is a cartesian coordinate system, with three perpendicular axes x<sub>g</sub>, y<sub>g</sub> and z<sub>g</sub>. The z<sub>g</sub> axis is defined as x<sub>g</sub> cross y<sub>g</sub> (right hand rule), as shown in the figure below. The location of the GCS’s origin is arbitrary, and usually taken at the base of the structure.
+[[image:751.9.2.8.2 stiffness.jpg|center|580px]]
-.) <u>Joint Coordinate System.</u> The location of a joint is defined by its x<sub>g</sub>, y<sub>g</sub> and z<sub>g</sub> coordinates in the GCS. Each joint is assumed to have six degrees of freedom (dof). The first three dof are translational, and correspond to the joint’s x<sub>j</sub>, y<sub>j</sub> and z<sub>j</sub> axes. The remaining three dof are rotational, about the joint’s x<sub>j</sub>, y<sub>j</sub> and z<sub>j</sub> axes as shown in the figure below. The x<sub>j</sub>, y<sub>j</sub> and z<sub>j</sub> axes define a joint coordinate system (JCS) for a given joint. The JCS may not be parallel to the GCS, and the JCS may vary for different joints. Thus, the orientation of the JCS for a given joint is defined by two vectors <math>\overrightarrow{V}_{xj}</math> and <math>\overrightarrow{V}_{yj}</math>. The origin of the JCS is at the joint. A third vector is then <math>\overrightarrow{V}_{zj} = \overrightarrow{V}_{xj} \times \overrightarrow{V}_{yj}</math>. The three vectors are written in matrix form as:
+===751.9.2.9 Modeling of Pile (Drilled Shaft) Footings===
-[[image:751.9.2.7.1 joint definition.jpg|center|310px]]
+====751.9.2.9.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method – Rigorous Approach====
-where  <math>\overrightarrow{i}, \overrightarrow{j}</math> and <math>\overrightarrow{k}</math> are unit vectors parallel to the x<sub>g</sub>, y<sub>g</sub> and z<sub>g</sub> axes. Note that the orientation of the JCS determines the orientation of the global degrees of freedom.
+A rigorous approach to develop a linear 6 x 6 pile stiffness matrix at the bottom of the foundation cap has been described in Example 751.9.2.6.4 in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]]. Figure 751.9.2.9.1 illustrates the structural model used by this approach.
-[[image:751.9.2.7.1 Global and Joint Coordination System.jpg|center|370px|thumb|<center>'''Global (GCS) and Joint (JCS) Coordination System'''</center>]]
+[[image:751.9.2.9.1.jpg|center|550px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.9.1 Structural Model for Pile (and Drilled Shaft) Footing Bents'''</center>]]
-====751.9.2.7.2 Rigid Body Constraints====
+The common form of the stiffness matrix in the local pile (or shaft) coordinate system (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) is given in eq. (1) in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method|EPG 751.9.2.8.1]].
-As shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7.2, summing the forces acting on the slave joint “j” about the master joint “m” in three dimensions, yields the force transformation matrix for a 3D rigid body as follows:
+====751.9.2.9.2 Axial and Translational Stiffness Method - Simplified Approach====
-[[image:751.9.2.7.2.jpg|center|570px]]
+For a pile footing type configuration shown in Fig. 751.9.2.9.1, the rotational stiffness of the pile group tends to be dominated by the axial pile stiffness as compared to the stiffness contribution from the bending stiffness of individual piles. Therefore, a simplified fixed pile-head model can be used in the seismic analysis. Fig. 751.9.2.9.2 illustrates the pile footing model based on this approach. Only pile axial and two horizontal translational stiffnesses are considered in the analysis.
-where {δ<sub>m</sub>}<sub>j</sub> represents the displacement vector of the master joint, and {δ<sub>s</sub>}<sub>j</sub> represents the displacement vector of the slave joint.
-====751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System (ECS)====
+[[image:751.9.2.9.2.jpg|center|550px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.9.2 Structural Model for Pile (and Drilled Shaft) Footing Bents'''</center>]]
-Each structural component of an abutment or pile footing such as piles, pile caps, backwalls or wings contain several spring constants in the element coordinate directions. The direction of the individual ECS is defined by the designer. Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 shows some typical ECS for piles, pile caps, backwalls and wings.
-[[image:751.9.2.7.3.jpg|center|525px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System'''</center>]]
+The stiffness matrix of a pile can be expressed as:
+:[K<sub>pile</sub>]<sub>3x3</sub> = <math> \begin{bmatrix}
+K_x & 0 & 0\\
+& K_y & 0\\
+& 0 & K_z
+\end{bmatrix} </math>
-For example, in Fig. 751.9.2.7.3 (b), there are three translational springs, K<sub>11</sub>, K<sub>22</sub>, K<sub>33</sub>, in the ECS’ x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> directions, respectively, and 3 rotational springs, K<sub>44</sub>, K<sub>55</sub>, K<sub>66</sub>, in the ECS’ x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> directions, respectively.
+in which the diagonal terms K<sub>x</sub>, K<sub>y</sub> and K<sub>z</sub> are stiffnesses corresponding to translational degrees of freedom associated with x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub>, respectively. Except for a special case, the simplified approach shall be considered sufficient in the seismic analysis.
-====751.9.2.7.4 Transferring Element Force Matrices====
+===751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis===
-'''Transferring Spring Element Force Matrix From ECS to GCS'''
-Let the element coordinate system be denoted x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> at a joint. The three vectors that define the orientation of the ECS can be written in matrix form as:
+'''Soil Stiffness Nonlinearity'''
-[[image:751.9.2.7.4 ECS to GCS.jpg|center|540px]]
+During an earthquake, ground motion causes the bridge abutments to impact against the soil, which deforms the soil. So, soil stiffness varies nonlinearly during seismic motion.
-'''Transferring Element Force Matrix From GCS to JCS'''
+'''Linear Approximations of Nonlinear Soil Stiffnesses'''
-[[image:751.9.2.7.4 GCS to JCS.jpg|center|540px]]
-====751.9.2.7.5 Transferring the Element Stiffness Matrix at Slave Joint “i” in its ECS to Master Joint in the JCS Direction====
+By using response spectrum methods, an equivalent linear soil stiffness is required for proper modeling. Spring "constants" are not really constant, but instead they are changeable modeling tools. Equivalent linear springs are used to approximate nonlinear structure/soil interaction, similar to the "secant modulus" approximation for other nonlinear materials.
-[[image:751.9.2.7.5-1.jpg|center|540px]]
+'''Reducing Stiffnesses'''
-:'''Example:'''
+Fig. 751.9.2.10.1 is slightly altered from the AASHTO flowchart because of limits on reducing pile stiffnesses as described below.
-:Transfer the pile-head stiffness matrix of pile no.2 as shown in Fig. 751.9.2.7.5 to the master joint at joint 17. In the figure, the pile footing consists of 16 piles and a rigid pile cap. The GCS (x, y, z) and ECS (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) of the individual piles are also shown in the figure. Let all the joints JCS be in the same direction as the GCS and assume all the slave joints (at pilehead locations) have the same elevations as that of the master joint. The individual pile-head matrix corresponding to the pile ECS is:
+Equivalent linear stiffnesses are valid only if they predict achievable soil forces. The passive force applied on the backwall will never exceed the passive force capacity of the soil, because the soil would fail before this could happen. If the seismic analysis program model is outputting an abutment force which exceeds the soil pressure capacity, then the model is
+predicting something impossible, and the spring constants must be reduced before accepting the model. According to AASHTO Div. I-A 1998 C4.5.2, this force-limiting should apply to all spring locations, including: 1) soil at backwall, 2) soil at wings, 3) piles, etc. Pile stiffness reduction is limited, as described below.
-[[image:751.9.2.7.5-2.jpg|center|370px]]
+The starting values for springs should be based on the best available soil information, as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]] and [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.5 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness - Linear Subgrade Modulus Method|EPG 751.9.2.6.5]], and it is better to slightly overestimate the stiffness than to underestimate it. Overestimated stiffnesses may be reduced to satisfy the displacement demand through iterative abutment analysis, usually iterative abutment analysis does not increase underestimated stiffnesses in order to save computing time.
-:It is assumed that the rotation and lateral movements at the pile-heads are small. Therefore, the rotational stiffnesses at the pile-head are neglected in this example.
-[[image:751.9.2.7.5.jpg|center|575px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.7.5 Pile Footing'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.2.7.5-3.jpg|center|540px]]
+'''Redesigning the Abutment for Force or Displacement'''
-[[image:751.9.2.7.5-4.jpg|center|540px]]
+As indicated in the flowchart (Fig. 751.9.2.10.1) and the discussion of this section, the abutment may require redesigning if force or displacement limitations are exceeded. See [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings|EPG 751.9.2.10.1]], [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses|EPG 751.9.2.10.2]] or [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration|EPG 751.9.2.10.3]] for discussion of intermediate wings, squared-off wings, deepened beams and other remedial actions.
-[[image:751.9.2.7.5-5.jpg|center|540px]]
+[[image:751.9.2.10.1.jpg|center|800px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.10.1 Flowchart for Iterative Abutment Analysis'''</center> <center>"Sec. 6.1.2.10.2" refers to [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses|EPG 751.9.2.10.2]].</center>]]
-===751.9.2.8 Modeling of Intermediate Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Bents===
+'''General Procedure'''
-====751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method====
+:'''Iterative Abutment Analysis'''
-A rigorous procedure to develop a linear 6x6 pile stiffness matrix at groundline has been described in the example in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational STiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]]. Fig. 751.9.2.8.1 illustrates the structural model used by this approach.
-[[image:751.9.2.8.1.jpg|center|575px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.8.1 Structural Model for Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents'''</center>]]
+:Note: Each different bridge model will require its own Iterative Abutment Analysis. For example, a model without liquefaction will require a completely independent analysis from a model with liquefaction.
-The common form of the stiffness matrix in the local pile coordinate system (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) is given in eq. (1) in which the diagonal terms K<sub>x</sub>, K<sub>y</sub>, K<sub>z</sub>, K<sub>θx</sub>, K<sub>θy</sub>, K<sub>θz</sub> are stiffnesses corresponding to translational and rotational degrees of freedom associated with x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub> axes, respectively. The off-diagonal terms represent coupling between two degrees of freedom. These stiffness coefficients can be calculated from the solutions presented in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6 Spring Constants|EPG 751.9.2.6]].
+:'''1) Stiffness:'''
-[[image:751.9.2.8.1 k pile.jpg|center|350px]]
+:Compute the initial stiffness estimates as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6 Spring Constants|EPG 751.9.2.6]].
-====751.9.2.8.2 Equivalent Cantilever Column Method - a Simplied Approach====
+:'''2) RBT for Stiffness:'''
-In the equivalent cantilever method, the foundation is replaced by a cantilever column that has stiffness approximately equivalent to those of the pile and surrounding soil. This is represented in Fig. 751.9.2.8.2.
+:Combine the stiffnesses at the master joints using RBT as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation|EPG 761.9.2.7]].
-[[image:751.9.2.8.2.jpg|center|675px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.8.2 Structural Model for Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents'''</center>]]
+:'''3) Seismic Analysis:'''
-This simplified approach may be used if a seismic analysis computer program is not capable of providing user input of a 6x6 stiffness matrix to represent the foundation stiffness at ground level. The stiffness matrix of a equivalent cantilever column can be expressed as:
+:Run the Seismic Structural Analysis Program as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.8 Modeling of Intermediate Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Bents|EPG 751.9.2.8]].
-[[image:751.9.2.8.2 k equiv.jpg|center|450px]]
+:'''4) RBT for Forces:'''
-For translational and rotational stiffnesses, it is obvious that only three cantilever model parameters (i.e. EIy, EIz, and L) are not sufficient to satisfy all six stiffness coefficients (four diagonal stiffnesses, K<sub>y</sub>, K<sub>z</sub>, K<sub>θy</sub>, K<sub>θz</sub>, and two cross-coupling stiffness, K<sub>yθz</sub>, K<sub>zθy</sub>) in equation (1) of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method|EPG 751.9.2.8.1]].
+:Redistribute the master joint forces using RBT for force as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation|EPG 761.9.2.7]].
-However, the general approach is to match the diagonal stiffness terms K<sub>y</sub>, K<sub>z</sub> and K<sub>θz</sub>. From eqs. (1) and (2):
+:'''5) Soil Pressures:'''
-[[image:751.9.2.8.2 general approach.jpg|center|520px]]
+:Compute the soil pressure (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings|EPG 751.9.2.10.1]]) on the backwall and the pressure on the wings. If the pressure is greater than the allowable pressure, then reduce the corresponding stiffness accordingly and go to Step 2. If the pressures are less than the allowable, then go to Step 6.
-'''Example 751.9.2.8.2:'''
+:'''6) Pile Stresses:'''
-Find the equivalent cantilever column’s L, EI<sub>y</sub>, EI<sub>z</sub>, EA and GJ in example 751.9.2.6.4.
+::a) Check shear stress and resultant moment (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses|EPG 751.9.2.10.2]]). If pile stress or moment is greater than the allowable, for simplicity, reduce the stiffnesses in each direction accordingly, corresponding to the pile-head displacement calculated in that direction. However, in order to keep R = 1 for pile foundations, do not reduce the stiffness below the minimum stiffness. The minimum stiffness is defined as the translational stiffness at which the ultimate moment, M<sub>u</sub>, for concrete piles or plastic moment, M<sub>p</sub>, for steel piles occurred along the pile as shown in Fig.751.9.2.10.2.
-Solve: From Example 751.9.2.6.4,
+::If the new stiffness is greater than the minimum stiffness, then go to Step 2.
-[[image:751.9.2.8.2 example.jpg|center|500px]]
+::If the new stiffness is less than the minimum stiffness, then go to Step 6 (b).
-[[image:751.9.2.8.2 stiffness.jpg|center|580px]]
+::If the stress and moment are OK, then go to Step 7.
-===751.9.2.9 Modeling of Pile (Drilled Shaft) Footings===
+::b) If pile stiffness has been reduced to the minimum, then the designer must do one of the following before going to Step 2:
-====751.9.2.9.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method – Rigorous Approach====
-A rigorous approach to develop a linear 6 x 6 pile stiffness matrix at the bottom of the foundation cap has been described in Example 751.9.2.6.4 in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]]. Figure 751.9.2.9.1 illustrates the structural model used by this approach.
+:::i) For excessive transverse force, first add an intermediate wing (a maximum of two) and/or square off the exterior wings.
-[[image:751.9.2.9.1.jpg|center|550px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.9.1 Structural Model for Pile (and Drilled Shaft) Footing Bents'''</center>]]
+:::ii) For excessive longitudinal force, first try deepening the abutment beam by 6 in. min. - 12 in. max.
-The common form of the stiffness matrix in the local pile (or shaft) coordinate system (x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub>, z<sub>e</sub>) is given in eq. (1) in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method|EPG 751.9.2.8.1]].
+:::iii) If (i) and (ii) does't fix the problem, then try using a larger size pile or more piles and go to Step 2.
-====751.9.2.9.2 Axial and Translational Stiffness Method - Simplified Approach====
+:::iv) As a last resort, if the abutment is still overloaded, try stiffening the intermediate bents by using larger columns or larger piles or more piles at the intermediate bents.
+[[image:751.9.2.10.2.jpg|center|725px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.10.2 Definition of K<sub>min</sub>'''</center>]]
-For a pile footing type configuration shown in Fig. 751.9.2.9.1, the rotational stiffness of the pile group tends to be dominated by the axial pile stiffness as compared to the stiffness contribution from the bending stiffness of individual piles. Therefore, a simplified fixed pile-head model can be used in the seismic analysis. Fig. 751.9.2.9.2 illustrates the pile footing model based on this approach. Only pile axial and two horizontal translational stiffnesses are considered in the analysis.
+:'''7) Abutment Displacements:'''
-[[image:751.9.2.9.2.jpg|center|550px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.9.2 Structural Model for Pile (and Drilled Shaft) Footing Bents'''</center>]]
+:Check the displacements at the master joint (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration|EPG 751.9.2.10.3]]). If the abutment displacements are less than the allowable, then go to Step 8. If the abutment displacements are greater than the allowable, then the designer must do one of the following before going to Step 2:
+::i) Add abutment piles.
-The stiffness matrix of a pile can be expressed as:
+::ii) Use larger size abutment piles.
-:[K<sub>pile</sub>]<sub>3x3</sub> = <math> \begin{bmatrix}
-K_x & 0 & 0\\
-& K_y & 0\\
-& 0 & K_z
-\end{bmatrix} </math>
-in which the diagonal terms K<sub>x</sub>, K<sub>y</sub> and K<sub>z</sub> are stiffnesses corresponding to translational degrees of freedom associated with x<sub>e</sub>, y<sub>e</sub> and z<sub>e</sub>, respectively. Except for a special case, the simplified approach shall be considered sufficient in the seismic analysis.
+::iii) For excessive transverse displacement, add an intermediate wing (a maximum of two) and/or square off the exterior wings.
-===751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis===
+::iv) For excessive longitudinal displacement, deepen the abutment beam by 6 in. min. - 12 in. max.
-'''Soil Stiffness Nonlinearity'''
+::v) If the abutment is still overloaded, try stiffening the intermediate bents by using larger columns or larger piles or more piles at the intermediate bents.
-During an earthquake, ground motion causes the bridge abutments to impact against the soil, which deforms the soil. So, soil stiffness varies nonlinearly during seismic motion.
+::vi) As a last resort, see the Structural Design Engineer about specifying the backfill soil properties.
-'''Linear Approximations of Nonlinear Soil Stiffnesses'''
+:'''8) Complete the Seismic Design:'''
-By using response spectrum methods, an equivalent linear soil stiffness is required for proper modeling. Spring "constants" are not really constant, but instead they are changeable modeling tools. Equivalent linear springs are used to approximate nonlinear structure/soil interaction, similar to the "secant modulus" approximation for other nonlinear materials.
+Return to the checklist and/or flowchart in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations|EPG 751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations]], then design abutment components, connections and intermediate bents as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length|EPG 751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length]]. If the seismic response of the bridge changes as a result of the design being different from the model assumed, then return to Step 2.
-'''Reducing Stiffnesses'''
+====751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings====
-Fig. 751.9.2.10.1 is slightly altered from the AASHTO flowchart because of limits on reducing pile stiffnesses as described below.
+'''Compacted Backfill Soil at Abutments'''
-Equivalent linear stiffnesses are valid only if they predict achievable soil forces. The passive force applied on the backwall will never exceed the passive force capacity of the soil, because the soil would fail before this could happen. If the seismic analysis program model is outputting an abutment force which exceeds the soil pressure capacity, then the model is
+Ultimate soil capacities should be used for seismic design.
-predicting something impossible, and the spring constants must be reduced before accepting the model. According to AASHTO Div. I-A 1998 C4.5.2, this force-limiting should apply to all spring locations, including: 1) soil at backwall, 2) soil at wings, 3) piles, etc. Pile stiffness reduction is limited, as described below.
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Division I-A Sections 6.4.2(B) and 7.4.2(B)
+|}
-The starting values for springs should be based on the best available soil information, as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]] and [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.5 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness - Linear Subgrade Modulus Method|EPG 751.9.2.6.5]], and it is better to slightly overestimate the stiffness than to underestimate it. Overestimated stiffnesses may be reduced to satisfy the displacement demand through iterative abutment analysis, usually iterative abutment analysis does not increase underestimated stiffnesses in order to save computing time.
+It is not necessary to check resultant soil pressures. The longitudinal failure state of an abutment is taken to be when the ultimate soil pressure acts on the entire backwall, causing global failure of the sliding wedge of soil behind the backwall. The transverse failure state is taken to be when the ultimate soil pressure acts on the entire wing area, causing global failure of the sliding wedge of soil behind the wings. The actual distribution of stresses in
+compacted abutment fill is too complex to compute for cyclical seismic loads, and it is the global failure rather that a local failure that controls the ultimate capacity of the abutment soil. Therefore, check the backwall pressure normal to its plane, then check the wing pressure normal to its plane, considering them to be independent of each other.
-'''Redesigning the Abutment for Force or Displacement'''
+::p = F / A ≤ p<sub>A</sub>
-As indicated in the flowchart (Fig. 751.9.2.10.1) and the discussion of this section, the abutment may require redesigning if force or displacement limitations are exceeded. See [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings|EPG 751.9.2.10.1]], [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses|EPG 751.9.2.10.2]] or [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration|EPG 751.9.2.10.3]] for discussion of intermediate wings, squared-off wings, deepened beams and other remedial actions.
+p = pressure on the planar surface of the backwall or wing, ksf
-[[image:751.9.2.10.1.jpg|center|800px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.10.1 Flowchart for Iterative Abutment Analysis'''</center> <center>"Sec. 6.1.2.10.2" refers to [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses|EPG 751.9.2.10.2]].</center>]]
+F = Force on element obtained from Rigid Body Transformation (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation|EPG 761.9.2.7]]), kips. Check all seismic loading cases including both abutments and both load combinations:
-'''General Procedure'''
+::Case I = 1.0*L + 0.3*T
-:'''Iterative Abutment Analysis'''
+::Case II = 0.3*L + 1.0*T
-:Note: Each different bridge model will require its own Iterative Abutment Analysis. For example, a model without liquefaction will require a completely independent analysis from a model with liquefaction.
+A = Area of the backwall or wing, square feet
-:'''1) Stiffness:'''
+p<sub>A</sub> (for integral and non-integral abutments) = 7.7ksf = the maximum (ultimate) dynamic soil passive pressure, ksf. The maximum dynamic soil passive pressure, pA, shall be reduced for backwall heights less than 8 ft. For example: p<sub>A</sub> for a backwall height of 6 ft. p<sub>A</sub> = 7.7*(6/8) = 5.8 ksf.
-:Compute the initial stiffness estimates as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6 Spring Constants|EPG 751.9.2.6]].
+If p > p<sub>A</sub>, then reduce the stiffness as described below and iterate until the pressure is just barely less than the allowable.
-:'''2) RBT for Stiffness:'''
+::<math>K_{i + 1} = \frac{A\times p_A}{\delta_i}</math> = trial stiffness for the i+1 run, kips/foot
-:Combine the stiffnesses at the master joints using RBT as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation|EPG 761.9.2.7]].
+δ<sub>i</sub> = displacement of backwall or wing from the i run, ft.
-:'''3) Seismic Analysis:'''
+Return to the checklist and/or flowchart in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis]].
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Division I-A Sections 6.4.2(C) and 7.4.2(C)
+|}
-:Run the Seismic Structural Analysis Program as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.8 Modeling of Intermediate Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Bents|EPG 751.9.2.8]].
+====751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses====
-:'''4) RBT for Forces:'''
+'''Abutment Pile Stresses'''
+The allowable pile stress is the ultimate pile strength.
-:Redistribute the master joint forces using RBT for force as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation|EPG 761.9.2.7]].
+In order for the estimated pile stiffnesses to be valid, the pile stresses must be below the ultimate pile stress (i.e. R=1).
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Division I-A, 1992 Commentary C5.4.2
+|}
-:'''5) Soil Pressures:'''
+''Non-Integral Abutments:''
-:Compute the soil pressure (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings|EPG 751.9.2.10.1]]) on the backwall and the pressure on the wings. If the pressure is greater than the allowable pressure, then reduce the corresponding stiffness accordingly and go to Step 2. If the pressures are less than the allowable, then go to Step 6.
+Consider non-integral abutment piles as "foundation" piles in AASHTO Div. IA, 7.2.1(B), with R=1, and do not allow plastic hinging.
-:'''6) Pile Stresses:'''
+''Integral Abutments:''
-::a) Check shear stress and resultant moment (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses|EPG 751.9.2.10.2]]). If pile stress or moment is greater than the allowable, for simplicity, reduce the stiffnesses in each direction accordingly, corresponding to the pile-head displacement calculated in that direction. However, in order to keep R = 1 for pile foundations, do not reduce the stiffness below the minimum stiffness. The minimum stiffness is defined as the translational stiffness at which the ultimate moment, M<sub>u</sub>, for concrete piles or plastic moment, M<sub>p</sub>, for steel piles occurred along the pile as shown in Fig.751.9.2.10.2.
+Use R=1 for ALL end bent piles, including those on integral end bents.
-::If the new stiffness is greater than the minimum stiffness, then go to Step 2.
+:'''Concrete CIP Piles'''
+:1) Before running a seismic analysis program such as SEISAB, run one p-y curve program such as COM624P to obtain the stiffness and the lateral loadlateral displacement relationships as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]].
-::If the new stiffness is less than the minimum stiffness, then go to Step 6 (b).
+:2) After SEISAB & RBT have been run, rerun COM624P to obtain the moment demand (MR) due to the resultant applied lateral pile load, PR.
-::If the stress and moment are OK, then go to Step 7.
+:3) From the same or other COM624P programs, the resultant ultimate moment capacity, (Mu) can be obtained at the demand axial loads P = DL ± EQ. For seismic load Case I and Case II, check the following criteria:
-::b) If pile stiffness has been reduced to the minimum, then the designer must do one of the following before going to Step 2:
+::MR ≤ Mu, where:
+::MR = maximum resultant moment demand at the demand axial load, P=DL ± EQ, and at the demand resultant lateral load, PR, ft.*kips
+::PR =<math> \sqrt {(P_x)^2 + (P_y)^2}</math>, resultant applied lateral load, kips
+::P<sub>x</sub> or P<sub>y</sub> = applied lateral load at the pile-head from the RBT, in the longitudinal and transverse directions respectively, kips
+::M<sub>u</sub> = ultimate moment capacity at the demand axial load, at P = DL ± EQ, and at a limit state of ε<sub>c</sub>= 0.003 (concrete) or ε<sub>s</sub>= 0.015 (steel).
+::If M<sub>R</sub>> M<sub>u</sub>, then reduce the pile stiffnesses in both the long. and trans. directions according to the following equation:
-:::i) For excessive transverse force, first add an intermediate wing (a maximum of two) and/or square off the exterior wings.
+:::K<sub>new</sub> = <math>\frac {P'_x}{H_x}</math> or <math>\frac {P'_y}{H_y}</math>, where:
-:::ii) For excessive longitudinal force, first try deepening the abutment beam by 6 in. min. - 12 in. max.
+::K<sub>new</sub> = stiffness for new trial run, kips/ft., in the strong or weak directions.
+::P<sub>x</sub>’ and P<sub>y</sub>’ = pile-head lateral force on pile lateral load - lateral displacement curve as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]] in the long. and trans. directions, respectively.
-:::iii) If (i) and (ii) does't fix the problem, then try using a larger size pile or more piles and go to Step 2.
+::Hx and Hy = pile-head lateral displacements in the long. and trans. direction, respectively, from RBT.
-:::iv) As a last resort, if the abutment is still overloaded, try stiffening the intermediate bents by using larger columns or larger piles or more piles at the intermediate bents.
+:4) Return to the checklist or flowchart of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10]].
-[[image:751.9.2.10.2.jpg|center|725px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.10.2 Definition of K<sub>min</sub>'''</center>]]
-:'''7) Abutment Displacements:'''
+:'''Steel HP Piles'''
-:Check the displacements at the master joint (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration|EPG 751.9.2.10.3]]). If the abutment displacements are less than the allowable, then go to Step 8. If the abutment displacements are greater than the allowable, then the designer must do one of the following before going to Step 2:
+:1) Before running a seismic analysis program such as SEISAB, run two p-y curve programs such as COM624P: one for the strong direction, and one for the weak direction to obtain pile lateral load – lateral displacement curves in the strong and weak directions.
-::i) Add abutment piles.
-::ii) Use larger size abutment piles.
+:2) After SEISAB & RBT have been run, rerun COM624P to obtain the maximum demand moments along the pile in the strong direction (M<sub>x</sub>) and weak direction (M<sub>y</sub>). To obtain M<sub>x</sub>, run COM624P with the pile demand axial load, P = DL ± EQ and the pile lateral load in the strong direction (P<sub>x</sub>). To obtain M<sub>y</sub>, run another COM624P with the pile demand axial load, P = DL ± EQ, and the pile lateral load in the weak direction (P<sub>y</sub>).
-::iii) For excessive transverse displacement, add an intermediate wing (a maximum of two) and/or square off the exterior wings.
+:These two COM624P programs will have different pile section properties. Run both programs for load case I and load case II.
-::iv) For excessive longitudinal displacement, deepen the abutment beam by 6 in. min. - 12 in. max.
+:3) All piles must meet the following equation:
+:::<math>\frac{P}{0.85 A_sF_y} + \frac{M_x}{M_{px}} +\frac{M_y}{M_{py}} \le 1.0</math> (1)
-::v) If the abutment is still overloaded, try stiffening the intermediate bents by using larger columns or larger piles or more piles at the intermediate bents.
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO 10.54.2
+|}
-::vi) As a last resort, see the Structural Design Engineer about specifying the backfill soil properties.
+::where:
+:::P = applied axial load (DL ± EQ), kips
+:::M<sub>x</sub> and M<sub>y</sub> = maximum moment demand at the above axial load, P, at the corresponding lateral load, P<sub>x</sub> or P<sub>y</sub>.
+:::A<sub>s</sub> = steel area, square inches
+:::F<sub>y</sub> = yield stress of steel, usually 36 ksi or 50 ksi. The difference in price is small, so 50 ksi should be used when steel stresses are high.
-:'''8) Complete the Seismic Design:'''
+:::M<sub>p</sub> = Z*F<sub>y</sub>, where Z = plastic section modulus in the strong (x) or weak (y) direction, inch*kips
-Return to the checklist and/or flowchart in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations|EPG 751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations]], then design abutment components, connections and intermediate bents as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length|EPG 751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length]]. If the seismic response of the bridge changes as a result of the design being different from the model assumed, then return to Step 2.
+:4) If eq. (1) can not be satisfied, then reduce the pile stiffness in both the strong and weak directions according to the following equation:
+:::K<sub>new</sub> = <math>\frac {P'_x}{H_x}</math> or <math>\frac {P'_y}{H_y}</math>, where:
-====751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings====
+::K<sub>new</sub> = stiffness for new trial run, kips/ft., in the strong or weak directions.
+::P<sub>x</sub>’ and P<sub>y</sub>’ = pile-head lateral force on pile lateral load - lateral displacement curve as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]] in the long. and trans. directions, respectively.
+::Hx and Hy = pile-head lateral displacements in the long. and trans. direction, respectively, from RBT.
-'''Compacted Backfill Soil at Abutments'''
+:5) Return to the checklist or flowchart of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10]].
-Ultimate soil capacities should be used for seismic design.
+====751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration====
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|AASHTO Division I-A Sections 6.4.2(B) and 7.4.2(B)
+|AASHTO Division I-A, 1998 Commentary, C4.5.2
 |}
+In Fig. 751.9.2.10.1, Flowchart for Iterative Abutment Analysis, after the abutment forces are OK, the resultant abutment displacement must also be acceptable before finishing the seismic analysis of the bridge.
-It is not necessary to check resultant soil pressures. The longitudinal failure state of an abutment is taken to be when the ultimate soil pressure acts on the entire backwall, causing global failure of the sliding wedge of soil behind the backwall. The transverse failure state is taken to be when the ultimate soil pressure acts on the entire wing area, causing global failure of the sliding wedge of soil behind the wings. The actual distribution of stresses in
+:<math>\delta_R \le \gamma_{allowable} </math> where:
-compacted abutment fill is too complex to compute for cyclical seismic loads, and it is the global failure rather that a local failure that controls the ultimate capacity of the abutment soil. Therefore, check the backwall pressure normal to its plane, then check the wing pressure normal to its plane, considering them to be independent of each other.
+::<math>\delta_R</math> = resultant displacement of the master joint from the seismic analysis, ft.
+::<math>\delta_{R3} = \sqrt {\delta^2_L + (\delta_{0.3T})^2}</math>, for Case I = L+0.3T
+::<math>\delta_{R4} = \sqrt {(\delta_{0.3L})^2 + \delta^2_T}</math>, for Case II = 0.3L+T
-::p = F / A ≤ p<sub>A</sub>
+::δ<sub>R</sub> is at the master joint (see Fig. 751.9.2.10.3), using either CQC or SRSS.
-p = pressure on the planar surface of the backwall or wing, ksf
+::δ<sub>allowable</sub> = 0.3 ft., for integral abutments and non-integral abutments with restrainers engaged.
-F = Force on element obtained from Rigid Body Transformation (see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation|EPG 761.9.2.7]]), kips. Check all seismic loading cases including both abutments and both load combinations:
+::δ<sub>allowable</sub> = 10*A (in inches) for non-integral abutments under active Mononobe - Okabe pressure, where A = Acceleration Coefficient in ''g''s.
-::Case I = 1.0*L + 0.3*T
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
-::Case II = 0.3*L + 1.0*T
-A = Area of the backwall or wing, square feet
-p<sub>A</sub> (for integral and non-integral abutments) = 7.7ksf = the maximum (ultimate) dynamic soil passive pressure, ksf. The maximum dynamic soil passive pressure, pA, shall be reduced for backwall heights less than 8 ft. For example: p<sub>A</sub> for a backwall height of 6 ft. p<sub>A</sub> = 7.7*(6/8) = 5.8 ksf.
-If p > p<sub>A</sub>, then reduce the stiffness as described below and iterate until the pressure is just barely less than the allowable.
-::<math>K_{i + 1} = \frac{A\times p_A}{\delta_i}</math> = trial stiffness for the i+1 run, kips/foot
-δ<sub>i</sub> = displacement of backwall or wing from the i run, ft.
-Return to the checklist and/or flowchart in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis]].
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|AASHTO Division I-A Sections 6.4.2(C) and 7.4.2(C)
+|AASHTO Division I-A, 1998 Commentary
 |}
-====751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses====
+If the displacement exceeds the allowable value, then the abutment must be structurally altered as described in the flowchart description of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10]]. If the structural behavior is different as a result of these changes, it will be necessary to redesign the bridge and the abutment for Group I-VI loads and for Seismic loads.
+[[image:751.9.2.10.3.jpg|center|400px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Master Joint'''</center>]]
+==751.9.3 Seismic Design Procedure==
+===751.9.3.1 Connection Design===
-'''Abutment Pile Stresses'''
+'''Seismic Performance Categories A, B, C, D'''
-The allowable pile stress is the ultimate pile strength.
-In order for the estimated pile stiffnesses to be valid, the pile stresses must be below the ultimate pile stress (i.e. R=1).
+Seismic design forces can be considered either service loads or factored loads with a factor of 1.0. Load Factor Design (LFD) is to be used wherever possible. However, Allowable Stress Design (ASD) is still allowed when LFD would be difficult to apply. Connections must be designed for seismic forces in all four Seismic Performance Categories (A, B, C and D). For design of
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+some typical seismic connections, see the EPG articles, below:
+:a) Anchor bolts ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.1 Anchor Bolts|EPG 751.9.3.1.1]])
+:b) Dowel bars ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.2 Dowel Bars|EPG 751.9.3.1.2]])
+:c) Restrainer rods ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers|EPG 751.9.3.1.3]])
+:d) Concrete shear blocks ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.4 Concrete Shear Blocks|EPG 751.9.3.1.4]])
+:e) Concrete end diaphragms ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.5 Concrete End Diaphragms|EPG 751.9.3.1.5]])
+:f) Seismic isolation systems ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.6 Seismic Isolation Bearings|EPG 751.9.3.1.6]])
+:g) Joints (Beam/Column or Column/Footing) ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections|EPG 751.9.3.1.7]])
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|AASHTO Division I-A, 1992 Commentary C5.4.2
+|AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2
 |}
+'''Seismic Performance Category A'''
-''Non-Integral Abutments:''
+Minimum horizontal design force in each restrained direction for connections in SPC A is as described in AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2.
-Consider non-integral abutment piles as "foundation" piles in AASHTO Div. IA, 7.2.1(B), with R=1, and do not allow plastic hinging.
+A seismic analysis is not required in SPC A, so do not use R=0.8 in SPC A. Use R=1 instead.
-''Integral Abutments:''
+'''Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D'''
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6
+|}
+For design of connections in SPC B, C and D, see AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 and 7.2.1(A). For design of column joint connections in SPC C and D, see AASHTO Division I-A, Section 7.6.4 and [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections|EPG 751.9.3.1.7]].
-Use R=1 for ALL end bent piles, including those on integral end bents.
+====751.9.3.1.1 Anchor Bolts====
+'''For LRFD, see [[751.11_Bearings#751.11.2_Design|EPG 751.11.2 Design]] for anchor bolt design.'''
-:'''Concrete CIP Piles'''
+<!-- THIS INFORMATION HAS BEEN REMOVED
-:1) Before running a seismic analysis program such as SEISAB, run one p-y curve program such as COM624P to obtain the stiffness and the lateral loadlateral displacement relationships as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]].
-:2) After SEISAB & RBT have been run, rerun COM624P to obtain the moment demand (MR) due to the resultant applied lateral pile load, PR.
+Anchor bolts are used on bearings with sole plates. Design anchor bolts for flexure, shear and axial forces. Design forces are specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. Anchor bolts shall be ASTM F1554 Grade 55, unless higher grade anchor bolts are required to meet design requirements. Grade 105 bolts shall not be used in applications where welding is required.
-:3) From the same or other COM624P programs, the resultant ultimate moment capacity, (Mu) can be obtained at the demand axial loads P = DL ± EQ. For seismic load Case I and Case II, check the following criteria:
+'''Flexural Stress'''
-::MR ≤ Mu, where:
+For flexural stress, design the bolt diameter to satisfy the allowable stress as shown below. Limit the number of bolts per bearing to four by adding concrete shear blocks when required.
-::MR = maximum resultant moment demand at the demand axial load, P=DL ± EQ, and at the demand resultant lateral load, PR, ft.*kips
-::PR =<math> \sqrt {(P_x)^2 + (P_y)^2}</math>, resultant applied lateral load, kips
-::P<sub>x</sub> or P<sub>y</sub> = applied lateral load at the pile-head from the RBT, in the longitudinal and transverse directions respectively, kips
-::M<sub>u</sub> = ultimate moment capacity at the demand axial load, at P = DL ± EQ, and at a limit state of ε<sub>c</sub>= 0.003 (concrete) or ε<sub>s</sub>= 0.015 (steel).
-::If M<sub>R</sub>> M<sub>u</sub>, then reduce the pile stiffnesses in both the long. and trans. directions according to the following equation:
-:::K<sub>new</sub> = <math>\frac {P'_x}{H_x}</math> or <math>\frac {P'_y}{H_y}</math>, where:
+<math>f_b = \frac{M}{S} \le F_b</math>
-::K<sub>new</sub> = stiffness for new trial run, kips/ft., in the strong or weak directions.
+M = PL/2 = maximum moment per bolt, inch*kips
-::P<sub>x</sub>’ and P<sub>y</sub>’ = pile-head lateral force on pile lateral load - lateral displacement curve as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]] in the long. and trans. directions, respectively.
-::Hx and Hy = pile-head lateral displacements in the long. and trans. direction, respectively, from RBT.
+L = moment arm from center of sole plate to top of the beam cap, inches
-:4) Return to the checklist or flowchart of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10]].
+<math> P = \frac{F_H}{n_bR}</math> = Horizontal seismic design force per bolt, kips
-:'''Steel HP Piles'''
+F<sub>H</sub> = Horizontal seismic force per girder as shown below, kips.
+:<math> = \sqrt{(F_T)^2 + (F_L)^2}</math>
-:1) Before running a seismic analysis program such as SEISAB, run two p-y curve programs such as COM624P: one for the strong direction, and one for the weak direction to obtain pile lateral load – lateral displacement curves in the strong and weak directions.
+::'''FH in Seismic Performance Category A'''
-:2) After SEISAB & RBT have been run, rerun COM624P to obtain the maximum demand moments along the pile in the strong direction (M<sub>x</sub>) and weak direction (M<sub>y</sub>). To obtain M<sub>x</sub>, run COM624P with the pile demand axial load, P = DL ± EQ and the pile lateral load in the strong direction (P<sub>x</sub>). To obtain M<sub>y</sub>, run another COM624P with the pile demand axial load, P = DL ± EQ, and the pile lateral load in the weak direction (P<sub>y</sub>).
+::For expansion bearings, transverse F<sub>T</sub> = 0.2(DL) & longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = 0.
+::Where DL = maximum dead load girder reaction at the bent, kips.
+::For fixed bearings, transverse F<sub>T</sub> = 0.2(DL) per girder &
+:::::longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = (0.2)(segment weight)/(# of girders).
+::Segment weight should be distributed appropriately among fixed bents.
+::See also AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2.
-:These two COM624P programs will have different pile section properties. Run both programs for load case I and load case II.
+::'''FH in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D'''
-:3) All piles must meet the following equation:
+::At intermediate bents, F<sub>H</sub> = <math>\frac\sqrt {\Sigma V_L^2 + \Sigma V_T^2}{N_G}</math>, where:
-:::<math>\frac{P}{0.85 A_sF_y} + \frac{M_x}{M_{px}} +\frac{M_y}{M_{py}} \le 1.0</math> (1)
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO 10.54.2
-|}
-::where:
+:::<math>\Sigma V_L</math> = summation of top of column longitudinal shears at bent
-:::P = applied axial load (DL ± EQ), kips
+:::<math>\Sigma V_T</math> = summation of top of column transverse shears at bent
-:::M<sub>x</sub> and M<sub>y</sub> = maximum moment demand at the above axial load, P, at the corresponding lateral load, P<sub>x</sub> or P<sub>y</sub>.
+::At end bents, use the same formula as above, except substitute the abutment shears in place of the top of column shears.
-:::A<sub>s</sub> = steel area, square inches
+::n<sub>b</sub> = the number of bolts per girder
+::N<Sub>G</sub> = the number of girders at the bent
+::R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A,
+::::0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
+::S = Section modulus for the bolt = <math>\frac{\pi D^3}{32}</math>, cubic inches.
+::D = minimum body diameter, inches. For F1554 bolts use D = 0.92 x nominal bolt diameter. Alternately, the minimum body diameter can be retrieved from ASTM F1554 Table 4. For all other bolt types the nominal bolt diameter may be used because the bolt is unthreaded in the flexural zone and the minimum body diameter is similar to the nominal diameter.
+::F<sub>b</sub> (Grade 55) = (overstress factor=1.5)*0.55*(F<sub>y</sub>=55 ksi) = 45.4 ksi
-:::F<sub>y</sub> = yield stress of steel, usually 36 ksi or 50 ksi. The difference in price is small, so 50 ksi should be used when steel stresses are high.
+'''Shear Stress'''
-:::M<sub>p</sub> = Z*F<sub>y</sub>, where Z = plastic section modulus in the strong (x) or weak (y) direction, inch*kips
+For shear stress, design the bolt diameter to satisfy the allowable stress as shown below (f<sub>v</sub> < F<sub>v</sub>). Limit the number of bolts per bearing to four by adding concrete shear blocks when required.
-:4) If eq. (1) can not be satisfied, then reduce the pile stiffness in both the strong and weak directions according to the following equation:
+:<math>f_v = \frac{P}{A} \le F_v</math>
-:::K<sub>new</sub> = <math>\frac {P'_x}{H_x}</math> or <math>\frac {P'_y}{H_y}</math>, where:
-::K<sub>new</sub> = stiffness for new trial run, kips/ft., in the strong or weak directions.
+f<sub>v</sub> = actual shear stress on the bolt, ksi
-::P<sub>x</sub>’ and P<sub>y</sub>’ = pile-head lateral force on pile lateral load - lateral displacement curve as described in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)|EPG 751.9.2.6.4]] in the long. and trans. directions, respectively.
-::Hx and Hy = pile-head lateral displacements in the long. and trans. direction, respectively, from RBT.
-:5) Return to the checklist or flowchart of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10]].
+P = the design shear force per bolt, kips/bolt = <math>\frac{F_H}{n_bR}</math>,
+: where the definitions are the same as in the flexural stress section.
-====751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration====
+F<sub>v</sub>= allowable shear stress per bolt, ksi = 1.5*(0.17F<sub>u</sub>)*(f1)
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+:where:
-|-
+:1.5 = overstress factor for seismic loads
-|'''Additional Information'''
+:0.17F<sub>u</sub> = allowable shear stress when threads are included in shear plane per AISC, 9<sup>th</sup> Ed. Table J3.2 and Numerical Values Table 2 for A36, A307 and A449 bolts and applied here for F1554 anchor bolts. For A325 and A490 bolts refer to the values listed in AASHTO Table 10.32.3B.
-|-
+:f1 = 1.0 for F1554 bolts (all grades)
-|AASHTO Division I-A, 1998 Commentary, C4.5.2
+:f1 = 1.0 for threads in the shear plane (A36, A307, A449, A325, A490)
-|}
+:f1 = 1.25 for threads not in the shear plane (A36, A307, A449, A325, A490)
-In Fig. 751.9.2.10.1, Flowchart for Iterative Abutment Analysis, after the abutment forces are OK, the resultant abutment displacement must also be acceptable before finishing the seismic analysis of the bridge.
-:<math>\delta_R \le \gamma_{allowable} </math> where:
+:For F1554 Grade 55 anchor bolts, F<sub>v</sub> = 1.5*0.17*75*1.0 = 19.13 ksi.
-::<math>\delta_R</math> = resultant displacement of the master joint from the seismic analysis, ft.
-::<math>\delta_{R3} = \sqrt {\delta^2_L + (\delta_{0.3T})^2}</math>, for Case I = L+0.3T
-::<math>\delta_{R4} = \sqrt {(\delta_{0.3L})^2 + \delta^2_T}</math>, for Case II = 0.3L+T
-::δ<sub>R</sub> is at the master joint (see Fig. 751.9.2.10.3), using either CQC or SRSS.
-::δ<sub>allowable</sub> = 0.3 ft., for integral abutments and non-integral abutments with restrainers engaged.
+A = <math>\frac{\pi D^2}{4}</math> = Nominal area of bolt, square inches
+D = nominal bolt diameter.
-::δ<sub>allowable</sub> = 10*A (in inches) for non-integral abutments under active Mononobe - Okabe pressure, where A = Acceleration Coefficient in ''g''s.
+Note: Do not apply the 0.875 factor for new A325 bolts as shown in footnote d under AASHTO Table 10.32.3b. A325 bolts no longer come in different grades (tensile strengths).
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+Note: ASTM F1554 allows the body diameter of the bolt to be reduced to provide an area not less than the stress area of the threaded portion of the bolt. For this reason, the allowable stress is similar for threads beings included or excluded from the shear plane.
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO Division I-A, 1998 Commentary
-|}
-If the displacement exceeds the allowable value, then the abutment must be structurally altered as described in the flowchart description of [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis|EPG 751.9.2.10]]. If the structural behavior is different as a result of these changes, it will be necessary to redesign the bridge and the abutment for Group I-VI loads and for Seismic loads.
-[[image:751.9.2.10.3.jpg|center|400px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Master Joint'''</center>]]
-==751.9.3 Seismic Design Procedure==
+'''Axial Stress'''
-===751.9.3.1 Connection Design===
-'''Seismic Performance Categories A, B, C, D''''
+For axial stress, design the bolt diameter to satisfy the allowable tensile stress as shown below. For further information about vertical restrainers (hold-down devices), see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers|EPG 751.9.3.1.3]].
-Seismic design forces can be considered either service loads or factored loads with a factor of 1.0. Load Factor Design (LFD) is to be used wherever possible. However, Allowable Stress Design (ASD) is still allowed when LFD would be difficult to apply. Connections must be designed for seismic forces in all four Seismic Performance Categories (A, B, C and D). For design of
+:<math>f_t =\frac{T}{A_t} \le F_t</math>
-some typical seismic connections, see the EPG articles, below:
+where
+:f<sub>t</sub> = applied tensile stress, ksi
+:T = the maximum seismic tensile (uplift) force (DL ± EQ) per bolt from the seismic analysis, kips. If (DL+EQ) and (DL-EQ) are both compressive, then there is no need to design the bolts for axial stress.
+:A<sub>t</sub> = normal area of bolt, square inches
+:F<sub>t</sub> = allowable tensile stress = 1.5(0.33Fu) =37.13 ksi for Grade 55
-:a) Anchor bolts ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.1 Anchor Bolts|EPG 751.9.3.1.1]])
+where:
-:b) Dowel rods ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.2 Dowel Rods|EPG 751.9.3.1.2]])
+:0.33Fu = allowable tensile stress per AISC, 9<sup>th</sup> Ed. Table J3.2 and Numerical Values Table 2 for A36, A307 and A449 bolts and applied here for F1554 anchor bolts. For A325 and A490 bolts refer to the values listed in AASHTO Table 10.32.3B.
-:c) Restrainer rods ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers|EPG 751.9.3.1.3]])
-:d) Concrete shear blocks ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.4 Concrete Shear Blocks|EPG 751.9.3.1.4]])
-:e) Concrete end diaphragms ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.5 Concrete End Diaphragms|EPG 751.9.3.1.5]])
-:f) Seismic isolation systems ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.6 Seismic Isolation Bearings|EPG 751.9.3.1.6]])
-:g) Joints (Beam/Column or Column/Footing) ([[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections|EPG 751.9.3.1.7]])
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2
-|}
-'''Seismic Performance Category A'''
-Minimum horizontal design force in each restrained direction for connectionsin SPC A is as described in AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2.
+Note: Do not apply the 0.875 factor for new A325 bolts as shown in footnote d under AASHTO Table 10.32.3b. A325 bolts no longer come in different grades (tensile strengths).
+-->
-A seismic analysis is not required in SPC A, so do not use R=0.8 in SPC A. Use R=1 instead.
+====751.9.3.1.2 Dowel Bars====
+'''For LRFD, see [[751.22 Prestressed Concrete I Girders#751.22.2.7 Dowel Bars|EPG 751.22.2.7 Dowel Bars]] for dowel bar design.'''
-'''Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D'''
+<!-- THIS INFORMATION HAS BEEN REMOVED
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+Dowel bars connect standard concrete diaphragms and beams on concrete girder bridges (standard fixed diaphragms are those with beam stirrups NOT extending up into the diaphragm). Dowel bars are standard rebars designed using Allowable Stress Design and an allowable overstress of 33%. Design forces are as specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. The length of dowel bars is as shown in [[751.22 Prestressed Concrete I Girders#751.22.2.7 Dowel Bars|EPG 751.22.2.7 Dowel Bars]]. For a calculated seismic vertical reaction or an anticipated foundation settlement resulting in a net tensile reaction, use the development length of dowel bars into beam and into diaphragm based on dowel bar size.
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 5.4, 5.5 and 5.6
-|}
-For design of connections in SPC B, C and D, see AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 and 7.2.1(A). For design of column joint connections in SPC C and D, see AASHTO Division I-A, Section 7.6.4 and [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections|EPG 751.9.3.1.7]].
-====751.9.3.1.1 Anchor Bolts====
+'''Shear Stress'''
-Anchor bolts are used on bearings with sole plates. Design anchor bolts for flexure, shear and axial forces. Design forces are specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. Design strengths are from AASHTO Table 10.56A, LFD, for ASTM A325 bolts, unless otherwise noted.
+For shear stress, design the size and number of dowel bars to satisfy the allowable stress as shown below (f<sub>v</sub> < F<sub>v</sub>). The number of dowels must also fit into the space available on the key:
-'''Flexural Stress'''
+:min. bar size = #6; max. bar size = #11
-For flexural stress, design the bolt diameter to satisfy the allowable stress as shown below. Limit the number of bolts per bearing to four by adding concrete shear blocks when required.
+:min. spacing = 6"; max. spacing = 18"
-<math>f_b = \frac{M}{S} \le F_b</math>
+:min. end distance=3"; max. end distance=9" (<math>\le</math>half the spacing)
+::<math>f_v =\frac{P}{A} \le F_v</math>
-M = PL/2 = maximum moment per bolt, inch*kips
+::f<sub>v</sub> = actual shear stress on the dowel, ksi
-L = moment arm from center of sole plate to top of the beam cap, inches
+::P = the design shear force per dowel, kips/dowel = <math>\frac{F_H}{n_dR}</math>
-<math> P = \frac{F_h}{n_bN_gR}</math> = Horizontal seismic design force per bolt, kips
+::where:
-F<sub>h</sub> = Horizontal seismic force as shown below, kips.
+::F<sub>H</sub> = Horizontal seismic force as shown below, kips = <math>\sqrt {(F_T)^2 + (F_L)^2}</math>
-:<math> = \sqrt{(F_T)^2 + (F_L)^2}</math>
-::'''FH in Seismic Performance Category A'''
+:'''F<sub>H</sub> in Seismic Performance Category A'''
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Div. I-A, 5.2
+|}
+:Transverse F<sub>T</sub> = 0.2(DL)
+:where: DL = the summation of dead load reactions at the bent, kips
+:Longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = 0.2(segment wt.) where segment weight should be distributed appropriately among fixed bents.
-::For expansion bearings, transverse F<sub>T</sub> = 0.2(DL) & longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = 0.
+:'''FH in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D'''
-::Where DL = maximum dead load girder reaction at the bent, kips.
-::For fixed bearings, Transverse F<sub>T</sub> = 0.2(DL)
-:::::Longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = (0.2)(segment weight)/(# of girders).
-::Segment weight should be distributed appropriately among fixed bents.
-::See also AASHTO Division I-A, Section 5.2.
-::'''FH in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D'''
+:F<sub>H</sub> = <math>\sqrt {(\sum V_L)^2 + (\sum V_T)^2}</math>
-::At intermediate bents, F<sub>H</sub> = <math>\sqrt {(\sum V_L)^2 + (\sum V_T)^2}</math>, where:
+:where:
+::<math>\sum V_L</math> = summation of top of column longitudinal shears at all columns
-:::<math>\Epsilon V_L</math> = summation of top of column longitudinal shears at all columns
+::<math>\sum V_T</math> = summation of top of column transverse shears at all columns
+::If columns are designed for plastic hinging, use the plastic hinging shear.
-:::<math>\Epsilon V_T</math> = summation of top of column transverse shears at all columns
+:n<sub>d</sub> = the number of dowels at the bent
-::At end bents, use the same formula as above, except substitute the abutment shears in place of the top of column shears.
+:R =1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A,
-::n<sub>b</sub> = the number of bolts per girder
+:::0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
-::N<Sub>G</sub> = the number of girders at the bent
+:A = the cross-sectional area of the bar, sq. inches
-::R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A,
+:F<sub>v</sub> = allowable shear stress per dowel = 1.33*0.4*f<sub>y</sub> = 31.9 ksi / dowel
-::::0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
+:f<sub>y</sub> = yield stress of the rebar, ksi
-::S = Section modulus for the bolt = <math>\frac{\pi D^3}{32}</math>, cubic inches.
-::D = bolt diameter, inches. The gross bolt diameter may be used because the bolt is unthreaded in the flexural zone.
-::F<sub>b</sub> = (overstress factor=1.5)*0.55*(F<sub>y</sub>=50 ksi) = 41.25 ksi
-'''Shear Stress'''
+'''Axial Stress'''
-For shear stress, design the bolt diameter to satisfy the allowable stress as shown below (f<sub>v</sub> < F<sub>v</sub>). Limit the number of bolts per bearing to four by adding concrete shear blocks when required.
+For axial stress, design the total area of bars to satisfy the tensile stress as shown below.
-:<math>f_v = {frac{P}{A} \le F_v}</math>
+<math>f_t = \frac{T}{n_dA_d} \le F_t</math>
-f<sub>v</sub> = actual shear stress on the bolt, ksi
-P = the design shear force per bolt, kips/bolt = <math>\frac{F}{n_bN_gR}</math>,
-: where the definitions are the same as in the flexural stress section.
-F<sub>v</sub>= allowable shear stress per bolt, ksi = (28.5 ksi)*(f1)*(f2)*(f3)
-:where:
-:28.5 ksi = 1.5x19 ksi, where 19 ksi is from AASHTO Table 10.32.3B
-:f1 = 0.875 for bolts > 1" diameter, 1.0 for bolt diameters ≤ 1"
-:f2 = 1.25 for threads not in the shear plane (use)
-:f2 = 1.0 for threads in the shear plane (don't use)
-:f3 = 0.8 when distance between outermost bolts > 50" (rare)
-:f3 = 1.0 when distance between outermost bolts < 50" (usual case).
-:For most anchor bolts, Fv = 28.5*0.875*1.25 = 31.17 ksi.
-A = <math>\frac{\pi D^2}{4}</math> = Area of bolt, square inches
-D = The gross bolt diameter, because bolt is unthreaded in the shear zone.
-'''Axial Stress'''
-For axial stress, design the bolt diameter to satisfy the allowable tensile stress as shown below. For further information about vertical restrainers (hold-down devices), see [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers|EPG 751.9.3.1.3]].
-:<math>f_t =\frac{T}{A_t} \le F_t</math>
+where:
-where
-f<sub>t</sub> = applied tensile stress, ksi
-T = the maximum seismic tensile (uplift) force (DL ± EQ) per girder from the seismic analysis, kips. If (DL+EQ) and (DL-EQ) are both compressive, then there is no need to design the bolts for axial stress.
-A<sub>t</sub> = tensile area of bolt = 1.41 sq. in. for 1-1/2" diam. bolt
+f<sub>t</sub> = applied tensile stress, ksi / dowel
-::::::2.50 sq. in. for 2" diam. bolt
+T = seismic tensile (uplift) force (DL <math>\pm</math> EQ) at bent, kips. If both (DL + EQ) and (DL - EQ) are compressive, then there is no need to design the dowels for axial stress.
-::::::4.00 sq. in. for 2-1/2" diam. bolt
-F<sub>t</sub> = allowable tensile stress = 68 ksi
-====751.9.3.1.2 Dowel Rods====
+n<sub>d</sub> = the number of dowels at the bent
-Dowel rods connect standard concrete diaphragms and beams on concrete girder bridges (standard fixed diaphragms are those with beam stirrups NOT extending up into the diaphragm). Dowel rods are standard rebars designed using Allowable Stress Design and an allowable overstress of 33%. Design forces are as specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. The length of dowel bars is determined by development length into the beam and development length into the diaphragm.
+A<sub>d</sub> = cross-sectional area of one bar, sq. inches
-'''Shear Stress'''
+F<sub>t</sub> = allowable tensile stress per dowel = 1.33*0.55*fy = 43.9 ksi / dowel
+-->
-For shear stress, design the size and number of dowel rods to satisfy the allowable stress as shown below (f<sub>v</sub> < F<sub>v</sub>). The number of dowels must also fit into the space available on the key:
+====751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers====
+Most restrainer rods are low carbon steel (ASTM F1554, F<sub>u</sub> = 58ksi, F<sub>y</sub> = 36ksi) threaded rods at expansion gaps and hinges. They can be either longitudinal, transverse or vertical restrainers, depending on their axis of orientation. Restrainers are designed to remain elastic.
-:min. bar size = #6; max. bar size = #11
+'''Longitudinal Restrainers'''
-:min. spacing = 6"; max. spacing = 18"
+Longitudinal restrainers may be added at expansion gaps when predicted seismic displacements exceed the available support length. Restrainers should be added at all hinges with expansion gaps. Restrainers may also be added in other situations as discussed in a retrofit strategy meeting. Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders. Locate the restrainer group as close as possible to the center of gravity (c.g.) of the superstructure (see Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.3). Orient the restrainers parallel to the centerline of the superstructure, except for expansion joints on bridges with skew > 30° and all curved bridges, then consider orienting the restrainers normal to the joint. If the restrainer is connected to the bent cap, a higher force may be directed to the columns than otherwise expected, and the bent should be designed to withstand the restrainer force. See Figs. 751.9.3.1.3.3 – 751.9.3.1.3.9 for the details for Longitudinal Earthquake Restrainers for the different superstructure types.
-:min. end distance=3"; max. end distance=9" (<math>\le</math>half the spacing)
+'''Restrainer Rod Design:'''
-::<math>f_v =\frac{P}{A} \le F_v</math>
-::f<sub>v</sub> = actual shear stress on the dowel, ksi
+:'''Restrainer Capacity'''
-::P = the design shear force per dowel, kips/dowel = <math>\frac{F_H}{n_dR}</math>
+:F<sub>cap</sub> = force capacity of restrainer in kips, the smaller of these forces:
+:::A<sub>t</sub>*F<sub>t</sub> where:
+:A<Sub>t</sub> = tensile stress area of threaded rod, square inches
+:F<sub>t</sub> = =  allowable tensile stress = 1.5(0.33 F<sub>u</sub>) = 1.5 x 0.33 x 58 = 28.7 ksi for F1554, grade 36 rod.
+:::where:
+:DS = dead load of the entire superstructure unit, kips. When two segments are tied together, use the weight of the heavier segment.
+:n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap
-::where:
+:'''Restrainer Demand'''
+:F<sub>dem</sub>= demand force in kips, taken to be the larger of these forces:
+:::a) force from seismic analysis divided by the response factor, R,
-::F<sub>H</sub> = Horizontal seismic force as shown below, kips = <math>\sqrt {(F_T)^2 + (F_L)^2}</math>
+:where:
+:R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A
-:'''F<sub>H</sub> in Seismic Performance Category A'''
+:R = 0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+:::b) 0.2*DS/n where:
-|-
+:DS = dead load of the entire superstructure unit, kips. When two segments are tied together, use the weight of the heavier segment.
-|'''Additional Information'''
+:n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap
-|-
+:::c) A*DL/n where:
-|AASHTO Div. I-A, 5.2
+:A = Acceleration coefficient in ''g''s
-|}
+:DL = the weight of the lighter of the two adjoining superstructure segments
-:Transverse F<sub>T</sub> = 0.2(DL)
+:n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap
-:where: DL = the summation of dead load reactions at the bent, kips
-:Longitudinal F<sub>L</sub> = 0.2(segment wt.) where segment weight should be distributed appropriately among fixed bents.
-:'''FH in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D'''
+:'''Example 9.3.1.3-1:'''
-:F<sub>H</sub> = <math>\sqrt {(\sum V_L)^2 + (\sum V_T)^2}</math>
+:The accumulated dead load weight of a prestressed bridge segment with six girders is 1110 kips. The bridge is located in Seismic Performance Category C with A = 0.25. There are two  1 3/8 in. diameter restrainers for each girder at the end bent. From the seismic analysis, the total longitudinal force at the expansion gap is 300 kips. Check the suitability of the restrainers.
-:where:
+:'''Solution:'''
-::<math>\sum V_L</math> = summation of top of column longitudinal shears at all columns
-::<math>\sum V_T</math> = summation of top of column transverse shears at all columns
+:Demand Force: 1) 0.2*DS/n = 0.2x1110/(2x6) = 18.5 kips
-::If columns are designed for plastic hinging, use the plastic hinging shear.
+:::::2) A*DS/n = 0.25x1110/(2x6) = 23.1 kips
+:::::3) (F/R)/n = (300/0.8)/12 = 31.25 kips ← '''Controls'''
-:n<sub>d</sub> = the number of dowels at the bent
+:Design Capacity: At*Ft = 1.48 x 28.71 ksi = 42.6 kips
-:R =1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A,
+::42.6 kips > 31,25 kips '''Capacity is O.K.'''
-:::0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
-:A = the cross-sectional area of the bar, sq. inches
-:F<sub>v</sub> = allowable shear stress per dowel = 1.33*0.4*f<sub>y</sub> = 31.9 ksi / dowel
-:f<sub>y</sub> = yield stress of the rebar, ksi
-'''Axial Stress'''
+::∴ Two 1 3/8 in. diameter rods for each girder are satisfactory.
-For axial stress, design the total area of bars to satisfy the tensile stress as shown below.
+:Note: Usually, restrainers should be omitted on the exterior face of exterior girders. For exterior girders, the two restrainers should be located on the interior face of the girder.
-<math>f_t = \frac{T}{n_dA_d} \le F_t</math>
+'''Anchor Stud Design'''
-where:
+Anchor studs shall be designed using ultimate strength design and concrete shear cone failure theory. The standard stud size is 7/8” φ x 7” stud.
-f<sub>t</sub> = applied tensile stress, ksi / dowel
+Use a response modification factor for connections of 0.8.
-T = seismic tensile (uplift) force (DL <math>\pm</math> EQ) at bent, kips. If both (DL + EQ) and (DL - EQ) are compressive, then there is no need to design the dowels for axial stress.
-n<sub>d</sub> = the number of dowels at the bent
+Locate the studs on the concrete backwall or diaphragm using the minimum spacing, 2R, and the minimum edge distance, R, where R is the major radius of the concrete shear cone as shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.1, below. If the minimum spacing or minimum edge distance cannot be met, then see manufacturer's catalog for computation of partial cone strength reductions. If possible, center the stud group around the restrainer rod.
-A<sub>d</sub> = cross-sectional area of one bar, sq. inches
+[[image:751.9.3.1.3.1.jpg|center|275px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.1 Concrete Shear Cone for Anchor Stud'''</center>]]
-F<sub>t</sub> = allowable tensile stress per dowel = 1.33*0.55*fy = 43.9 ksi / dowel
+'''Anchor Plate Design'''
-====751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers====
+The area of the steel anchor plate shall be sized by the number of anchor studs required for tensile pullout and by the stud spacing (2R above) and edge distance on the plate. Locate the studs on the backwall or diaphragm using the minimum spacing, 2R, and the minimum edge distance, R. If the minimum spacing or minimum edge distance cannot be met, then consider
+the partial cone strength reductions. If possible, center the stud group around the restrainer rod. The thickness of the plate shall be sized by:
-Most restrainer rods are low-carbon steel (ASTM A307, F<sub>u</sub>=60ksi, F<sub>y</sub>36ksi)
+(a) Flexural stress on the plate considering the plate as a beam continuous-over-simple-supports with an allowable stress of 0.55Fy and a 33% allowable overstress in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D,
-threaded rods at expansion gaps and hinges. They can be either longitudinal, transverse or vertical restrainers, depending on their axis of orientation. Restrainers are designed to remain elastic. Design forces are as specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. Design tensile strengths are from AASHTO Table 10.56A for ASTM A307 rods. Allowable tensile stress Ft = 30 ksi on the tensile stress area of the rod. Tensile stress areas of available threaded rod sizes are in the AISC manual and in the ASTM A307 specification.
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 & 7.2.1 and AASHTO Table 10.32.1A
+|}
+(b) Bearing stress on concrete (to account for the possibilities of local crushing at the expansion gap and/or restrainer deflection greater than 1/2" and/or backwall knockoff) of 0.3*f '<sub>c</sub>, with a multiplier, <math>\sqrt {\frac{A_2}{A_1}}</math>, (where A<sub>1</sub> is the loaded area and A<sub>2</sub> is the maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometrically similar and concentric with the loaded area), plus a 33% allowable overstress in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D. or
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
+|-
+|'''Additional Information'''
+|-
+|AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 & 7.2.1 and AASHTO 8.15.2.1.3
+|}
+(c) minimum plate thickness = 3/8"
-'''Longitudinal Restrainers'''
+The backwall should be designed for flexure and shear as specified for abutment components in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.2 Abutment Component Design|EPG 751.9.3.2]].
-Longitudinal restrainers may be added at expansion gaps when predicted seismic displacements exceed the available support length. Restrainers should be added at all hinges with expansion gaps. Restrainers may also be added in other situations as discussed in a retrofit strategy meeting. Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders. Locate the restrainer group
+'''Transverse Restrainers'''
-as close as possible to the center of gravity (c.g.) of the superstructure (see Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.3). Orient the restrainers parallel to the centerline of the superstructure, except for expansion joints on bridges with skew > 30° and all curved bridges, then consider orienting the restrainers normal to the joint. If the restrainer is connected to the bent cap, a higher
-force may be directed to the columns than otherwise expected, and the bent should be designed to withstand the restrainer force. See Figs. 751.9.3.1.3.3 – 751.9.3.1.3.9 for the details for Longitudinal Earthquake Restrainers for the different superstructure types.
-'''Restrainer Rod Design:'''
+Transverse restrainers are mainly used to keep the superstructure from sliding off the bearings. This type of restrainer is used either in place of, or along with, concrete shear blocks. The design procedure for transverse restrainers is the same as the design procedure for longitudinal restrainers with the exception that the demand force, F<sub>dem</sub>, is only part a) of the longitudinal restrainer demand force design.
-:'''Restrainer Capacity'''
+'''Vertical Restrainers (Hold-down Devices)'''
-:F<sub>cap</sub> = force capacity of restrainer in kips, the smaller of these forces:
+Vertical restrainers are only required in Seismic Performance Categories C and D (AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.5(B)), but they may also be used on important structures in SPC B. Vertical restrainers shall be used at all supports or hinges in continuous structures when the vertical seismic force (EQ) exceeds 50% of the dead load reaction (DR).
-:::a) A<sub>t</sub>*F<sub>t</sub> where:
-:A<Sub>t</sub> = tensile stress area of threaded rod from AISC manual
-:F<sub>t</sub> = 30 ksi = allowable tensile stress, from AASHTO Table 10.56A
-:::b) 0.35*DS/n where:
-:DS = dead load of the entire superstructure unit, kips. When two segments are tied together, use the weight of the heavier segment.
-:n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap
-:'''Restrainer Demand'''
+When 0.5(DR) < EQ < 1.0(DR), then the minimum net uplift force = 10% of the dead load downward force that would be exerted if the span were simply supported.
-:F<sub>dem</sub>= demand force in kips, taken to be the larger of these forces:
-:::a) force from seismic analysis divided by the response factor, R,
-:where:
+When EQ > 1.0(DR), then the net uplift force = 1.2*(EQ-DR), but not less than 10% of the dead load downward force that would be exerted if the span were simply supported.
-:R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A
-:R = 0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
-:::b) 0.2*DS/n where:
-:DS = dead load of the entire superstructure unit, kips. When two segments are tied together, use the weight of the heavier segment.
-:n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap
-:::c) A*DL/n where:
-:A = Acceleration coefficient in ''g''s
-:DL = the weight of the lighter of the two adjoining superstructure segments
-:n = the number of restrainers at the expansion gap
-:'''Example 6.1.3.1.3-1:'''
+Vertical restrainers can take several forms: (a) using existing anchor bolts, (b) adding threaded rods, (c) adding vertical restraining plates, or (d) adding prestressing strands. If vertical restrainers are required, see the Structural Project Manager to determine which vertical restrainer system should be used.
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=350px heights=200px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.2_vert_restrainer-01.jpg|'''End Section thru Girder'''
+File:751.9.3.1.3.2_vert_restrainer-02.jpg|'''Section thru Intermediate Bent Beam at Expansion Gap'''
+</gallery>
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.2 Examples of Vertical Restrainers'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=650px heights=650px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.3_long_restrainer_eb_steel-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|
+(1) (Expansion Gap @ 60°F) + 1/2“</br>
+(2) Expansion Gap @ 60°F</br>
+(3) Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.</br>
+(4) On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.</br>
+(5) Locate the restrainer as close as possible to the neutral axis of the superstructure and as close as possible to the bottom of the diaphragm.</br>
+(6) End bent backwalls are to be designed for active seismic soil pressure as described in [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.3.2_Abutment_Component_Design|EPG 751.9.3.2]].</br>
+(7) Omit restrainers  on exterior faces of exterior girders.
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.3 Longitudinal Restrainers (End Bents - Steel Girders)'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=400px heights=400px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.4_long_restrainer_eb_conc-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|
+Note: For skewed structures, see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.3.1.3.9|Figure 751.9.3.1.3.9]].</br>
+:(1)	On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.
+:(2)	Locate at the center of gravity for the superstructure, using the spacing between girders.<br>If different beam depths are used, locate the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller beam. May adjust for clearance.
+:(3)	Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.
+:(4)	End bent backwalls are to be designed for active seismic soil pressure as described in [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.3.2_Abutment_Component_Design|EPG 751.9.3.2]].
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.4 Longitudinal Restrainers (End Bents - Concrete Girders)'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=400px heights=400px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.5_long_restrainer_ib_conc-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|Note: For skewed structures, see [[751.9_Bridge_Seismic_Design#751.9.3.1.3.9|Figure 751.9.3.1.3.9]].</br>
-The accumulated dead load weight of a prestressed bridge segment with six girders is 1100 kips. The bridge is located in Seismic Performance Category C with A=0.25. There are two  1 3/8 in. diameter restrainers for each girder at the end bent. From the seismic analysis, the total longitudinal force at the expansion gap is 300 kips. Check the suitability of the restrainers.
+{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+! colspan="6" | Yb = GRAVITY NEUTRAL AXIS OF PRESTRESSED I-GIRDERS *
-:'''Solution:'''
+|-
+| rowspan="2" | ROADWAY || Rowspan="2" | GIRDER</BR>SPACING || colspan="4" | GIRDER TYPE
-:Demand Force: 1) 0.2*DS/n = 0.2x1110/(2x6) = 18.5 kips
+|-
-:::::2) A*DS/n = 0.25x1110/(2x6) = 23.1 kips
+| III || IV || VI || VII
-:::::3) (F/R)/n = (300/0.8)/12 = 31.25 kips ← '''Controls'''
+|-
+| 26'-0" || 7’-6” || 32.7 || 36.5 || 41.1 || 54.2
+|-
+| 28’-0” || 8’-2” || 33.2 || 37.0 || 41.6 || 54.9
+|-
+| 30’-0” || 8’-8” || 33.6 || 37.5 || 42.1 || 55.5
+|-
+| 32’-0” || 9’-2” || 33.9 || 37.9 || 42.6 || 56.1
+|-
+| 36’-0” || 8’-2” || 33.2 || 37.1 || 41.7 || 55.0
+|-
+| 38’-0” || 8’-8” || 33.5 || 37.4 || 42.1 || 55.5
+|-
+| 40’-0” || 9’-0” || 33.8 || 37.8 || 42.5 || 55.9
+|-
+| 44’-0” || 9’-9” || 34.4 || 38.4 || 43.2 || 56.8
+|}
-:Design Capacity: 1) 0.35xDS/n = 0.35x1110/(2x6) = 32.37 kips ← '''Controls'''
+<nowiki>*</nowiki> Yb = Inches from bottom of beam, based on an 8½” slab.</br>
-:::::2) At*Ft = 1.16in2x30ksi = 34.8 kips
+:(1)	On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.
+:(2)	Locate at the center of gravity for the superstructure. Use the gravity neutral axis of the</br>composite section, using the spacing between girders. If different beam depths are used, locate</br>the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller beam. May adjust for clearance.
+:(3)	Omit restrainers on exterior faces of exterior girders.
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.5 Longitudinal Restrainers (Intermediate Bents - Concrete Girders)'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=650px heights=650px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.6_long_restrainer_ib_st_conc-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|
+(1)	(Expansion Gap @ 60°F) + 1/2“</br>
+(2)	Expansion Gap @ 60°F</br>
+(3)	Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.</br>
+(4)	On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.</br>
+(5)	Locate the restrainer as close as possible to the neutral axis of the superstructure. Use the gravity neutral axis of the composite</br>section, using the spacing between girders. If different beam depths are used, locate the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller</br>beam. Adjust the restrainer to clear channel and shop weld. Larger bracing is required for prestressed to steel beam restrainers.</br>
+(6)	Omit restrainers  on exterior faces of exterior girders.</br>
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.6 Longitudinal Restrainers (Intermediate Bents - Steel to Concrete Girders)'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=650px heights=650px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.7_long_restrainer_hinged-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|
+(1)	(Expansion Gap @ 60°F) + 1/2“</br>
+(2)	Expansion Gap @ 60°F</br>
+(3)	Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.</br>
+(4)	On skewed structures, adjust this distance parallel to the centerline of roadway.</br>
+(5)	Locate the restrainer as close as possible to the neutral axis of the superstructure and as close as possible to the bottom of</br>the diaphragm. Use the gravity neutral axis of the girder, using the spacing between girders. If different beam depths are used,</br>locate the restrainers at the neutral axis of the smaller beam. Adjust the restrainer to clear channel and shop weld.</br>
+(6)	Omit restrainers  on exterior faces of exterior girders.
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.7 Longitudinal Restrainers (Hinged Connection)'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=650px heights=650px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.8_anchor_plates-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|
+Note: Use Detail A for prestressed I-Girder structures at end and intermediate bents and also for all exterior</br>girders on inside face.
+: Use Detail B for steel structures at end bents or P/S I-Girders to steel structures at intermediate bents</br>or whenever more than two restrainers occupy one anchor plate.
+: Pull-out 32k per stud. Working stress load 16k per stud. (See TRW Nelson Division catalog.)
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.8 Details A and B for Anchor Plates'''</big>
+</div>
+----
+<div id="751.9.3.1.3.9" style="text-align: center; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;">
+<gallery mode=packed widths=650px heights=650px>
+File:751.9.3.1.3.9_skewed-01.jpg|
+</gallery>
+{| style="text-align: left; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;"
+|
+<nowiki>*</nowiki> For dimension properties of pipe, see AISC Steel Construction Manual, Part 1.</br>
+(1) Design length as required for the weld to develop the seismic force.</br>
+|}
+<big>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.9 Details for Longitudinal Restrainers on Skewed Structures'''</big>
+</div>
+----
-::32.37 kips > 31,25 kips '''Capacity is O.K.'''
+====751.9.3.1.4 Concrete Shear Blocks====
+'''For LRFD, see [[751.22 Prestressed Concrete I Girders#751.22.3.13 Concrete Shear Blocks|EPG 751.22.3.13 Concrete Shear Blocks]] for Concrete Shear Blocks design'''
-::∴ Two 1 3/8 in. diameter rods for each girder are satisfactory.
+<!-- REMOVED CONTENT PER RR3868
+Concrete shear blocks are used when 4 anchor bolts per bearing are insufficient, or for preventing loss of support on beams and stub bent footings. Design shear keys as specified in AASHTO 8.16.6.4. Design forces are as specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. The following dimensions and sizes are for rough guidelines only and may be
+altered to fit specific situations:
-:Note: Usually, restrainers should be omitted on the exterior face of exterior girders. For exterior girders, the two restrainers should be located on the interior face of the girder.
+Concrete shear block dimensions:
-'''Anchor Stud Design'''
+L = Length shall extend all the way across the beam (for ease of forming), oriented parallel to centerline of roadway.
-Anchor studs shall be designed using ultimate strength design and concrete shear cone failure theory. The standard stud size is 7/8” φ x 7” stud.
+W = Width is as required for concrete area. Allow about 1/2 in. (typical) clearance between the edge of the sole plate and the edge of the block to allow engaging of anchor bolts.
+H = Height of shear block shall extend to about an inch (+/-) above the top of the sole plate.
-Use a response modification factor for connections of 0.8.
+Steel reinforcement:
-Locate the studs on the concrete backwall or diaphragm using the minimum spacing, 2R, and the minimum edge distance, R, where R is the major radius of the concrete shear cone as shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.1, below. If the minimum spacing or minimum edge distance cannot be met, then see manufacturer's catalog for computation of partial cone strength reductions. If possible, center the stud group around the restrainer rod.
+Bar size = #4 min. to # 6 max. hairpins placed parallel to the centerline of the beam, with #4 horizontal straight bars at the top of the hairpin to ensure proper alignment.
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.1.jpg|center|275px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.1 Concrete Shear Cone for Anchor Stud'''</center>]]
+Spacing = Spacing of hairpin shear bars as required to provide the required steel area, with 6" minimum to 12" maximum. The maximum edge distance in the direction of the spacing = half of reinforcement spacing.
-'''Anchor Plate Design'''
+<math>V_{dem} = \frac{F_T}{R\times \phi \times N_B} </math> = demand shear per block, kips/block
-The area of the steel anchor plate shall be sized by the number of anchor studs required for tensile pullout and by the stud spacing (2R above) and edge distance on the plate. Locate the studs on the backwall or diaphragm using the minimum spacing, 2R, and the minimum edge distance, R. If the minimum spacing or minimum edge distance cannot be met, then consider
+:where:
-the partial cone strength reductions. If possible, center the stud group around the restrainer rod. The thickness of the plate shall be sized by:
-(a) Flexural stress on the plate considering the plate as a beam continuous-over-simple-supports with an allowable stress of 0.55Fy and a 33% allowable overstress in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D,
+:F<sub>T</sub> = transverse component of total horizontal seismic force demand at the bent, normal to the centerline of the roadway, kips. Both seismic load cases, Case 1 = L+0.3T and Case 2 = 0.3L+T, must be satisfied.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 & 7.2.1 and AASHTO Table 10.32.1A
-|}
-(b) Bearing stress on concrete (to account for the possibilities of local crushing at the expansion gap and/or restrainer deflection greater than 1/2" and/or backwall knockoff) of 0.3*f '<sub>c</sub>, with a multiplier, <math>\sqrt {\frac{A_2}{A_1}}</math>, (where A<sub>1</sub> is the loaded area and A<sub>2</sub> is the maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometrically similar and concentric with the loaded area), plus a 33% allowable overstress in Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D. or
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
-|-
-|'''Additional Information'''
-|-
-|AASHTO Division I-A, Sections 6.2.1 & 7.2.1 and AASHTO 8.15.2.1.3
-|}
-(c) minimum plate thickness = 3/8"
-The backwall should be designed for flexure and shear as specified for abutment components in [[751.9 LFD Seismic#751.9.3.2 Abutment Component Design|EPG 751.9.3.2]].
+:R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A
+:::0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
+:φ = 0.85 for shear
+:N<sub>B</sub> = the number of blocks resisting the seismic force. The designer should consider using a value of NB that is less than the total number of blocks, because all blocks may not resist equal amounts of force.
-'''Transverse Restrainers'''
+V<sub>cap</sub> = A<sub>vf</sub>*f<sub>y</sub>*μ = nominal shear capacity of concrete shear block, kips/block
-Transverse restrainers are mainly used to keep the superstructure from sliding off the bearings. This type of restrainer is used either in place of, or along with, concrete shear blocks. The design procedure for transverse restrainers is the same as the design procedure for longitudinal restrainers with the exception that the demand force, F<sub>dem</sub>, is only part a) of the longitudinal restrainer demand force design.
+:V<sub>cap</sub> ≤ 0.2 ∗ f'<sub>c</sub> ∗ A <sub>cv</sub>, kips
-'''Vertical Restrainers (Hold-down Devices)'''
+:V<sub>cap</sub> ≤ 0.8 ∗ A<sub>cv</sub> , kips
-Vertical restrainers are only required in Seismic Performance Categories C and D (AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.5(B)), but they may also be used on important structures in SPC B. Vertical restrainers shall be used at all supports or hinges in continuous structures when the vertical seismic force (EQ) exceeds 50% of the dead load reaction (DR).
+A<sub>vf</sub> = cross-sectional area of reinforcing bars at the shear plane, sq. inches
-When 0.5(DR) < EQ < 1.0(DR), then the minimum net uplift force = 10% of the dead load downward force that would be exerted if the span were simply supported.
+f<sub>y</sub> = yield strength of reinforcing bars, ksi
-When EQ > 1.0(DR), then the net uplift force = 1.2*(EQ-DR), but not less than 10% of the dead load downward force that would be exerted if the span were simply supported.
+μ = 1.0 for retrofits (bushhammering > 1/4", in [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=11 Sec.703.3.11] )
-Vertical restrainers can take several forms: (a) using existing anchor bolts, (b) adding threaded rods, (c) adding vertical restraining plates, or (d) adding prestressing strands. If vertical restrainers are required, see the Structural Project Manager to determine which vertical restrainer system should be used.
+μ = 1.4 for new structures (monolithic construction)
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.2.jpg|center|700px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.2 Examples of Vertical Restrainers'''</center>]]
+f'<sub>c</sub> = final compressive strength of concrete at 28-day cure, ksi
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.3.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.3 Longitudinal Restrainers (End Bents - Steel Girders)'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.4.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.4 Longitudinal Restrainers (End Bents - Concrete Girders)'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.5.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.5 Longitudinal Restrainers (Intermediate Bents - Concrete Girders)'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.6.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.6 Longitudinal Restrainers (Intermediate Bents - Steel to Concrete Girders)'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.7.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.7 Longitudinal Restrainers (Hinged Connection)'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.8.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.8 Details "A" and "B" for Anchor Plates'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.3.9.jpg|center|720px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.3.9 Details for Longitudinal Restrainers on Skewed Structures'''</center>]]
-====751.9.3.1.4 Concrete Shear Blocks====
-Concrete shear blocks are used when 4 anchor bolts per bearing are insufficient, or for preventing loss of support on beams and stub bent footings. Design shear keys as specified in AASHTO 8.16.6.4. Design forces are as specified in AASHTO Div. I-A, Sections 3.6, 3.7, 5.2, 6.2 or 7.2. The following dimensions and sizes are for rough guidelines only and may be
-altered to fit specific situations:
-Concrete block dimensions:
-L = Length shall extend all the way across the beam (for ease of forming), oriented parallel to centerline of roadway.
-W = Width is as required for concrete area. Allow about 1/2 in. (typical) clearance between the edge of the sole plate and the edge of the block to allow engaging of anchor bolts.
-H = Height of shear block shall extend to about an inch (+/-) above the top of the sole plate.
-Steel reinforcement:
-Bar size = #4 min. to # 6 max. hairpins placed parallel to the centerline of the beam, with #4 horizontal straight bars at the top of the hairpin to ensure proper alignment.
-Spacing = Spacing of hairpin shear bars as required to provide the required steel area, with 6" minimum to 12" maximum. The maximum edge distance in the direction of the spacing = half of reinforcement spacing.
-<math>V_{dem} = \frac{F_T}{R\times \phi \times N_B} </math> = demand shear per block, kips/block where:
-:F<sub>T</sub> = transverse component of total horizontal seismic force demand at the bent, normal to the centerline of the roadway, kips. Both seismic load cases, Case 1=L+0.3T and Case 2=0.3L+T, must be satisfied.
-:R = 1.0 for Seismic Performance Category A
-:::0.8 for Seismic Performance Categories B, C and D
-:φ = 0.85 for shear
-:N<sub>B</sub> = the number of blocks resisting the seismic force. The designer should consider using a value of NB that is less than the total number of blocks, because all blocks may not resist equal amounts of force.
-V<sub>cap</sub> = A<sub>vf</sub>*f<sub>y</sub>*μ = nominal shear capacity of concrete shear block, kips/block
-:V<sub>cap</sub> ≤ 0.2 ∗ f'<sub>c</sub> ∗ A <sub>cv</sub>, kips
-:V<sub>cap</sub> ≤ 0.8 ∗ A<sub>cv</sub> , kips
-A<sub>vf</sub> = cross-sectional area of reinforcing bars at the shear plane, sq. inches
-f<sub>y</sub> = yield strength of reinforcing bars, ksi
-μ = 1.0 for retrofits (bushhammering > 1/4", in [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0703.pdf Sec.703.3.21] )
-μ = 1.4 for new structures (monolithic construction)
-f'<sub>c</sub> = final compressive strength of concrete at 28-day cure, ksi
 A<sub>cv</sub> = area of concrete block at the shear plane, sq. inches
-'''Example:''' An example of a shear block design can be found in [[751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders#751.22.3.17 Shear Blocks|EPG 751.22.3.17]].
+'''Example:''' An example of a shear block details can be found in [[751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders#751.22.3.13 Concrete Shear Blocks|EPG 751.22.3.13]].
+-->
 ====751.9.3.1.5 Concrete End Diaphragms====
@@ Line 1,934: / Line 2,011: @@
 '''Isolation Bearings'''
-Seismic isolation bearings shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 1999. Isolation bearings should only be used when specified on the design layout or when required for special retrofit projects. See the Structural Project Manager for approval and for the design specifications for the specific proprietary system to be used.
+Seismic isolation bearings shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 3<sup>rd</sup> Ed., July 2010. Isolation bearings should only be used when specified on the design layout or when required for special retrofit projects. See the Structural Project Manager for approval and for the design specifications for the specific proprietary system to be used.
+For LRFD, Seismic isolation bearings shall conform to AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 4th Ed., 2023.
 ====751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections====
@@ Line 2,039: / Line 2,118: @@
 Note that the bending of any hooked reinforcement outward, away from the column core, shall not be used because it directs the anchorage force away from the joint. Inward bending of the column reinforcement is allowed. However, it is likely to cause a congestion problem. The use of straight column reinforcement embedded into the beam-column joint is recommended. The standard T-joint reinforcement details are shown in Figs. 751.9.3.1.7.4 - 751.9.3.1.7.6. If any reinforcement requirement based on eqs. (9) through (14) is greater than that shown in Figs. 751.9.3.1.7.4 - 751.9.3.1.7.6, the greater requirement shall be used.
+<div id="Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.4"></div>
+[[image:751.9.3.1.7.4 2019.jpg|center|600px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.4 Int. Bent "T-Joint" Details'''</center>]]
+::(1)	Increase by 25% the development length (other than top bars) or the standard hook in tension “Ldh” of EPG 751.40.8.4.2.
+::(2)	 The spiral bars or wire shall be continued for a distance equal to ½ the column diameter but not less than 15” from the face of the column connection into the footing.
+::(3)	 Use the greatest length of the following: column diameter of 1/6 of the clear height of column. Lapping of spiral reinforcement in this region is not permitted.
+::(4)	Splices may be eliminated when the column height is 20’-0” or less or restrictions do not practically allow for lap splices.
-'''Example 751.9.3.1.7.1:''' A column is subjected to an axial load (due to dead and seismic earthquake loads) of 520 kips. The column diameter is 36 in. with 20 #8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement. The beam cap dimensions are 3 ft. 9 in. wide by 3 ft. 7 in. deep with 5 #11 bars for the top reinforcement and 7 #10 bars for the bottom reinforcement as shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.7. The column overstrength moment-axial load curve is shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8. Design the reinforcement details for the beam-column joint.
+[[image:751.9.3.1.7.5 2019.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.5 Seismic Bar Details'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.7.7.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.7 Properties for Example Design'''</center>]]
+[[image:751.9.3.1.7.6 2019.jpg|center|600px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.6 Beam - Footing "T-Joint" Details'''</center>]]
+::See additional guidance in EPG 751.9.3.1.7, below, for footing reinforcement not shown.
+::(1)	Increase by 25% the development length (other than top bars) or the standard hook minimum in tension “Ldh” of EPG 751.40.8.4.2.
+::(2)	 The spirals shall be continued for a distance equal to ½ the column diameter but not less than 15” from the face of the column connection into the footing.
-[[image:751.9.3.1.7.4.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.4 Int. Bent "T-Joint" Details'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.7.5.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.5 Seismic Bar Details'''</center>]]
-[[image:751.9.3.1.7.6.jpg|center|750px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.6 Beam - Footing "T-Joint" Details'''</center>]]
+'''Example 751.9.3.1.7.1:''' A column is subjected to an axial load (due to dead and seismic earthquake loads) of 520 kips. The column diameter is 36 in. with 20 #8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement. The beam cap dimensions are 3 ft. 9 in. wide by 3 ft. 7 in. deep with 5 #11 bars for the top reinforcement and 7 #10 bars for the bottom reinforcement as shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.7. The column overstrength moment-axial load curve is shown in Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8. Design the reinforcement details for the beam-column joint.
+[[image:751.9.3.1.7.7.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.7 Properties for Example Design'''</center>]]
 [[image:751.9.3.1.7.8.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.8 Column Overstrength Interaction Diagram'''</center>]]
@@ Line 2,284: / Line 2,374: @@
 [[image:751.9.3.1.7.11.jpg|center|700px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.1.7.11 Summary of Column-Footing Joint Reinforcement'''</center>]]
+====751.9.3.1.8 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic B, C and D====
+For anchorage of piles for seismic categories B, C and D, see [[751.36 Driven Piles#751.36.4 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic Categories B, C and D|EPG 751.36.4 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic Categories B, C and D]].
 ===751.9.3.2 Abutment Component Design===
@@ Line 2,291: / Line 2,385: @@
 '''Wings (Integral OR Non-Integral Abutments)'''
-:1) Design the wing thickness for the applied shear on the wing. The design section is where the corner brace meets the inside edge of the wing. Use φ = 1.0 for shear. It is sometimes satisfactory to treat wing walls as fuse elements (i.e., broken off elements). This is mainly for integral abutment on very wide structures where large forces are drawn to the abutment. In this case, a second analysis with reduced stiffness in the transverse direction is required. Divide the wing up into two sections of f'c = 3 ksi and f'c = 4 ksi. Soil pressure acts below the bottom of the approach slab. See [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]].
+:1) Design the wing thickness for the applied shear on the wing. The design section is where the corner brace meets the inside edge of the wing. Use φ = 1.0 for shear. It is sometimes satisfactory to treat wing walls as fuse elements (i.e., broken off elements). This is mainly for integral abutment on very wide structures where large forces are drawn to the abutment. In this case, a second analysis with reduced stiffness in the transverse direction is required. Divide the wing up into two sections of f'c = 3 ksi and f'c = 4 ksi. Soil pressure acts below the bottom of the approach slab. See [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]].
-:2) Design the flexural steel in the inside face of the wing (minimum #6 - H - bars @ 8" cts.) for the applied wing moment. Moment = (wing Area)*(soil pressure)*(arm from edge of corner brace to c.g. of wing area). The design section is where the corner brace meets the inside edge of the wing. Use φ = 1.0 for flexure. Divide the wing up into two sections of f'c = 3 ksi and f'c = 4 ksi. Soil pressure acts below the bottom of the approach slab. Position the wing reinforcement so that it does not interfere with girders or piles. The top of intermediate wings shall clear the bottom of the approach slab by a minimum of 3". See [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]].
+:2) Design the flexural steel in the inside face of the wing (minimum #6 - H - bars @ 8" cts.) for the applied wing moment. Moment = (wing Area)*(soil pressure)*(arm from edge of corner brace to c.g. of wing area). The design section is where the corner brace meets the inside edge of the wing. Use φ = 1.0 for flexure. Divide the wing up into two sections of f'c = 3 ksi and f'c = 4 ksi. Soil pressure acts below the bottom of the approach slab. Position the wing reinforcement so that it does not interfere with girders or piles. The top of intermediate wings shall clear the bottom of the approach slab by a minimum of 3". See [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]].
 '''Non-Integral Abutments'''
@@ Line 2,309: / Line 2,403: @@
 '''Deadman Anchors'''
-:8) Design deadman anchors, if present, as in [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]].
+:8) Design deadman anchors, if present, as in [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]].
 ===751.9.3.3 Intermediate Bent Design===
@@ Line 2,393: / Line 2,487: @@
 In AASHTO Div. I-A Sections 6 & 7, some AASHTO terms are different from MoDOT terms. AASHTO's "pile caps" are caps of pile footings or beam caps of pile bents, and are considered "foundations". AASHTO's "pile bents" are what MoDOT calls pile cap intermediate bents, and piles on pile bents are treated as columns, not as "foundations". MoDOT's CIP piles are considered in AASHTO both as "concrete-filled pipe piles" and as "Cast-in-Place
 concrete piles" with the shell considered as both longitudinal reinforcement and as shear reinforcement.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 2,402: / Line 2,496: @@
 |}
-For drilled shafts and piles, a plastic hinge developed above the ground line is allowed for trestle piles (at intermediate bents), but not for foundation piles (below the ground line). "Trestle" and "foundation" piles are as defined in [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]].
+For drilled shafts and piles, a plastic hinge developed above the ground line is allowed for trestle piles (at intermediate bents), but not for foundation piles (below the ground line). "Trestle" and "foundation" piles are as defined in [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]].
 '''Analysis of Bent'''
@@ Line 2,416: / Line 2,510: @@
 ) The minimum pile size and reinforcement is that which was required for Groups I-VI. Check the minimum pile size using the full elastic (R=1) moments from Step (2) and φ = 0.75 to 0.9, as per AASHTO 8.16.1.2. Analyze the pile for axial / moment (P-M) interaction capacity for CIP piles. Steel piles are analyzed for buckling and for combined stresses as described in the AASHTO references.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
 |-
-|AASHTO Div. I-A,7.5.2 & AASHTO Div. I, 10.36&10.54
+|AASHTO Div. I-A,7.5.2 & AASHTO Div. I, 10.36 & 10.54
 |}
 Analyze the pile at 4 axial loads (P3max, P3min, P4max, and P4min):
@@ Line 2,428: / Line 2,522: @@
 :For LC 0.3*L + 1.0*T: a) P4max = DL + EQ, b) P4min = DL - EQ
-The shell of CIP piles provides shear reinforcement and longitudinal flexural reinforcement (see equations below). See [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]] for the design thickness of the shell.
+The shell of CIP piles provides shear reinforcement and longitudinal flexural reinforcement (see equations below). See [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]] for the design thickness of the shell.
 If UP/AP ≥ 1.0, or if UP/AP ≥ 1.0 by adding only a few bars, then skip to Step (8) for no hinging. Else, if UP/AP < 1.0 or if it takes too many added bars to increase UP/AP to more than 1.0, then perform Steps (5) or (6) first, considering plastic hinging.
@@ Line 2,467: / Line 2,561: @@
 Steel piles shall be provided with shear connector angles for anchorage.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 2,477: / Line 2,571: @@
 ) Design beams under Load Factor Design, with φ = 0.90. If the pile design was OK (no hinging) under full elastic loads from Step (4), then consider dead loads and the seismic in-plane top-of-column shears and axial loads (for P-Δ effects) for the beam design. If the column design was controlled by modified elastic loads (hinging) from Steps (5) or (6), then apply dead loads and the overstrength (φ = 1.3) plastic moments from Steps (5) or (6). For either elastic or
 plastic loads, design the beam for the negative moments at faces of equivalent square piles and for the maximum positive moments in between piles. Check shear in the beam at the faces of the
-equivalent square piles. Minimum beam width shall be as per [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]], but should also provide 6 in. concrete cover outside piles as per AASHTO Div. I Section 4.5.15.2. Note that for 20 in. and 24 in. CIP piles, the standard 30 in. integral end bent beam width must be enlarged to 32 in. and 36 in., respectively.
+equivalent square piles. Minimum beam width shall be as per [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]], but should also provide 6 in. concrete cover outside piles as per AASHTO Div. I Section 4.5.15.2. Note that for 20 in. and 24 in. CIP piles, the standard 30 in. integral end bent beam width must be enlarged to 32 in. and 36 in., respectively.
 '''T-Joint Connection Design'''
@@ Line 2,485: / Line 2,579: @@
 ====751.9.3.3.3 Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents====
-Drilled shafts (also called "Pedestal Piles") are described in [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]. In the following discussion, the portion of the pedestal pile above ground will be referred to as the "column". The portion of the pedestal pile below ground will be referred to as the "shaft". Most drilled shafts have a shaft diameter larger than the column diameter, as shown below in Fig. 751.9.3.3.3. Drilled shafts are drilled or augered in, whereas piles are driven into place.
+Drilled shafts (also called "Pedestal Piles") are described in [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]]. In the following discussion, the portion of the pedestal pile above ground will be referred to as the "column". The portion of the pedestal pile below ground will be referred to as the "shaft". Most drilled shafts have a shaft diameter larger than the column diameter, as shown below in Fig. 751.9.3.3.3. Drilled shafts are drilled or augered in, whereas piles are driven into place.
 [[image:751.9.3.3.3.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.9.3.3.3 Drilled Shaft (Pedestal Pile) Int. Bent'''</center>]]
@@ Line 2,504: / Line 2,598: @@
 ) Determine dead load (DL) axial, moment and shear force demands at "top of column" and at "bottom of column".
-) Plastic hinging of the column portion of a drilled shaft is allowed for trestle piles (intermediate bents), but not for foundation piles (end bents), as defined in [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]. The shaft portion of a drilled shaft is considered a "foundation" in AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.1(B), so plastic hinging of the shaft portion of a drilled shaft is not allowed. Calculate the full elastic <math>\big[M_{FE} = M_{DL} = \frac{M_{EQ}}{(R = 1)}\big]</math> moments at all tenth-points of the entire column & shaft, and calculate the modified elastic <math>\big[M_{ME} = M_{DL} = \frac{M_{EQ}}{(R = 5)}\big]</math> moments at tenth-points of the column portion.
+) Plastic hinging of the column portion of a drilled shaft is allowed for trestle piles (intermediate bents), but not for foundation piles (end bents), as defined in [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]]. The shaft portion of a drilled shaft is considered a "foundation" in AASHTO Div. I-A, 7.2.1(B), so plastic hinging of the shaft portion of a drilled shaft is not allowed. Calculate the full elastic <math>\big[M_{FE} = M_{DL} = \frac{M_{EQ}}{(R = 1)}\big]</math> moments at all tenth-points of the entire column & shaft, and calculate the modified elastic <math>\big[M_{ME} = M_{DL} = \frac{M_{EQ}}{(R = 5)}\big]</math> moments at tenth-points of the column portion.
 '''Column Design, Without Hinging'''
@@ Line 2,519: / Line 2,613: @@
 ) If UP/AP < 1.0 in Step (4), then the column portion is designed for modified elastic moments (R=5), and the shaft portion is designed as a foundation (R=1). Determine the column size and reinforcement required for modified elastic (R=5) moments using φ = 0.5 to 0.9 as described in AASHTO Div. I-A, Section 7.6.2(B), with the column design required for Groups I-VI loads as the minimum. Generate the column P-M interaction curve for drilled shafts. Plot the combinations (as in Step (5) above) of axial and modified elastic moment on the same graph for all 8 points on the column portion. If all the points lie within the curve, then the column design is sufficient. If not, add bars and re-plot the capacity curve until all points barely
 lie within the curve.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 2,528: / Line 2,622: @@
 Design column shear reinforcement (spirals) for the required reinforcement ratio described in the reference below.
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 2,554: / Line 2,648: @@
 ) The design moments for the shaft shall be the lesser of the full elastic moments (R=1) from Step (5) and the overstrength plastic moment capacity (φ = 1.3) of the column sized in step (6).
-{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
+{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
 |-
 |'''Additional Information'''
@@ Line 2,592: / Line 2,686: @@
 Recent earthquakes indicate that many steel bridges have suffered cross frame damage. Cross frames provide an important load path for the seismic force acting on slab-on-girder steel bridges. Cross frames shall be able to transmit all lateral forces from the superstructure to the bearings. The lateral seismic force at an individual bent calculated from the seismic analysis shall be proportionally distributed to the individual cross frames over the bent.
-For details of cross frames, see [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)]]. The components of cross frames including top and bottom chords and diagonal angle members shall be designed based on allowable stress design with consideration of the eccentric axial load and buckling stresses. Welding sizes at gusset plate connection shall also be designed for the seismic load. Cross frames shall remain elastic when subjected to the seismic force.
+For details of cross frames, see [[751.40 LFD Widening and Repair|EPG 751.40 LFD Widening and Repair]]. The components of cross frames including top and bottom chords and diagonal angle members shall be designed based on allowable stress design with consideration of the eccentric axial load and buckling stresses. Welding sizes at gusset plate connection shall also be designed for the seismic load. Cross frames shall remain elastic when subjected to the seismic force.
 The following cross frame model may be used for the structural analysis of cross frames:

751.9 Bridge Seismic Design: Difference between revisions

Latest revision as of 12:48, 19 July 2024

751.9.1 Seismic Analysis and Design Specifications

751.9.1.1 Applicability of Guidelines and Seismic Design Philosophy

751.9.1.2

751.9.1.3 Seismic Design Force Concepts

751.9.1.4 Seismic Performance Category (SPC), Acceleration Coefficient (A)

751.9.1.5 Elastic and Plastic Design

751.9.1.6 Structural Analysis Model

751.9.1.7 Directional Load Cases

751.9.1.8 Group Loading

751.9.1.9 Seismic Performance Category Specifications

751.9.2 Seismic Analysis Model

751.9.2.1 Flowchart of Seismic Analysis Procedure

751.9.2.2 Checklist for Seismic Computations

751.9.2.3 Minimum Support Length

751.9.2.4 Material Properties

751.9.2.4.1 Soil Properties

751.9.2.4.2 Concrete Properties

751.9.2.4.3 Steel Properties

751.9.2.5 Liquifaction

751.9.2.6 Spring Constants

751.9.2.6.1 Modeling Abutment Stiffnesses

751.9.2.6.2 Abutment Stiffness, Wilson Equations

751.9.2.6.3 Pile Axial Stiffness

751.9.2.6.4 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness, (p-y curves)

751.9.2.6.5 Pile Lateral and Rotational Stiffness - Linear Subgrade Modulus Method

751.9.2.6.6 Drilled Shaft Lateral and Rotational Stiffnesses

751.9.2.6.7 Spread Footing Stiffness, Equivalent Circular Footing Method

751.9.2.7 Rigid Body Transformation

751.9.2.7.1 Joint Definition and Degrees of Freedom

751.9.2.7.2 Rigid Body Constraints

751.9.2.7.3 Spring Element Coordinate System (ECS)

751.9.2.7.4 Transferring Element Force Matrices

751.9.2.7.5 Transferring the Element Stiffness Matrix at Slave Joint “i” in its ECS to Master Joint in the JCS Direction

751.9.2.8 Modeling of Intermediate Pile Cap and Drilled Shaft Bents

751.9.2.8.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method - a Rigorous Method

751.9.2.8.2 Equivalent Cantilever Column Method - a Simplied Approach

751.9.2.9 Modeling of Pile (Drilled Shaft) Footings

751.9.2.9.1 Coupled Foundation Stiffness Method – Rigorous Approach

751.9.2.9.2 Axial and Translational Stiffness Method - Simplified Approach

751.9.2.10 Iterative Abutment Analysis

751.9.2.10.1 Soil Pressures, Backwall and Wings

751.9.2.10.2 Abutment Pile Stresses

751.9.2.10.3 Abutment Deflection Iteration

751.9.3 Seismic Design Procedure

751.9.3.1 Connection Design

751.9.3.1.1 Anchor Bolts

751.9.3.1.2 Dowel Bars

751.9.3.1.3 Restrainers

751.9.3.1.4 Concrete Shear Blocks

751.9.3.1.5 Concrete End Diaphragms

751.9.3.1.6 Seismic Isolation Bearings

751.9.3.1.7 T- Joint Connections

751.9.3.1.8 Anchorage of Piles for Seismic B, C and D

751.9.3.2 Abutment Component Design

751.9.3.3 Intermediate Bent Design

751.9.3.3.1 Column/Footing Intermediate Bents

751.9.3.3.2 Pile Cap Intermediate Bents

751.9.3.3.3 Drilled Shaft Intermediate Bents

751.9.3.3.4 Integral Intermediate Bents

751.9.3.4 Cross Frame Analysis and Design

751.9.4 References

Navigation menu

Search